Home

Link to 500, 600, 700 Specifications/User Manual

1. Figure 3 17 Acquire Menu Stop After m Press RUN STOP button only side to use the RUN STOP button to start or stop acquiring Pressing the RUN STOP button once will stop the acquisitions The upper left hand corner in the display will say Stop and show the number of acquisitions If you press the button again the oscillo scope will resume taking acquisitions Press Single Acquisition Sequence side That selection lets you run a single sequence of acquisitions by pressing the RUN STOP button In Sample Peak Detect or Hi Res mode the oscilloscope will acquire a waveform record with the first valid trigger event and stop Hi Res is available only on TDS 500C and TDS 700C models In Envelope or Average mode the oscilloscope will make the specified number of acquisitions to complete the averaging or enveloping task TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only If the oscilloscope is in equivalent time mode and you press Single Acquisition Sequence side it will continue to recognize trigger events and acquire samples until the waveform record is filled 3 36 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms NOTE To quickly select Single Acquisition Sequence without displaying the Acquire and Stop After menus press SHIFT FORCE TRIG Now the RUN STOP button operates as just described You still must display the Acquire menu and then the
2. aes Calculates average value for Uses Sample Mode for Each Acquisition each record point over eee sh many acquisitions Use to reduce apparent noise in a repetitive signal yee Figure 3 15 How the Acquisition Modes Work TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Slee 3 31 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Hi Res Mode TDS 500C and 700C models only Hi Res mode averages all samples taken during an acquisition interval to create a record point The average results in a higher resolution lower bandwidth waveform A key advantage of Hi Res is its potential for increasing resolution regardless of the input signal Table 3 3 and the equations shown below illustrate how you can obtain up to 15 significant bits with Hi res mode Note that the resolution improvements are limited to speeds slower than 100 ns div Also resolutions above 15 bits are not allowed by internal hardware and computation limitations Si Sampling Interval for TDS 754C I ns Time Div 5 us Div At le Interval ____ Y__ _ 00 sik dana Number Of Points Div 50 Points Div as Nd Number of points per decimation interval 4 100 Resolution Enhancement
3. If you are not continuing from the previous example follow the instructions on page 2 9 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side Press AUTOSET TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main gt Frequency side Press the more side menu item if the Frequency selection does not appear in the side menu TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE Measure pop up gt Select Measrmnt main gt Frequency side Press the more side menu item if the Frequency selection does not appear in the side menu Press CH 2 gt CLEAR MENU Press SAVE RECALL SETUP gt Save Current Setup main to display the Setup main menu See Figure 2 18 contain a stored setup or with the label factory if they do not To avoid overwrit A CAUTION Setup locations in the side menu appear with the label user if they ing and losing forever a saved setup choose a setup location labeled factory Setup locations labeled factory have the factory setup stored as a default and can be used to store current setups without disturbing previously stored setups TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 29 Tutorial 2 30 Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample A Save Current Setup i To File To Setup user To Setup 2 factory To Setup3 factory
4. Figure 3 7 Record View and Time Base Readouts To Change Horizontal The TDS Oscilloscope provides control of horizontal position and scale using Scale and Position the horizontal front panel knobs By changing the horizontal position you can move the waveform right or left to see different portions of the waveform That is particularly useful when you are using larger record sizes and cannot view the entire waveform on one screen To change the horizontal scale and position 1 Turn the horizontal POSITION and horizontal SCALE knobs See Figure 3 8 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 19 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 2 If you want the POSITION knob to move faster press the SHIFT button When the light above the shift button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the POSITION knob positions waveforms more quickly A HORIZONTAL lt Jrosition gt O HORIZONTAL MENU lt SCALE D Figure 3 8 Horizontal Controls When you select a channel the horizontal SCALE knob scales all channel waveforms displayed at the same time If you select a math or reference waveform the knob scales only the selected waveform When you select a channel the horizontal POSITION knob positions all channel reference and math waveforms displayed at the same time when Horizontal Lock is set to Lock in the Zoom menu See Zoom a Waveform on page 3 51 To Change Horizontal
5. Tek Run 5 00GS s_ Sample Trigger Level 4mv E F am Set to TTL Set to ECL Set to 50 SINGLE TRIG FORCE TRIG 200mv M10 0ns Chi 4mv Co oa eo n TE A si Source coupling Stope gre Fac Co A pod lt Euge gt gt T wi JN s CUR 7 4 See C 2 Press one of these buttons to select from main menu 3 Press one of these buttons to select from side menu if displayed 4 if side menu item has an adjustable value shown in reverse video adjust it with the general purpose knob or keypad TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 7 Operating Interface Maps To Operate a Pop Up Menu COLOR FOUR CHANNEL DIGITAL REAL TIME OSCILLOSCOPE Tektronix TDS 684 Tek Run 100kKS s Sample E F Edge Source Lanre 280m more 1of 2 M 500ums Chi Logic Pulse Level oge video Source Coupling Slope Type DE T 2gemv Hofioti Press here to remove menus from Press to display pop up menus screen Press it again to make selection Alternatively press SHIFT first to make selection in the opposite direction A pop up selection ch
6. War A 88 CH3 Vertical Controls page 3 15 Zoom page 3 49 Ground Triggering page 3 63 Delay Triggering page 3 106 Horizontal Controls Edge Triggering page 3 72 page 3 19 Logic Triggering page 3 76 Pulse Triggering page 3 89 Comm Triggering page 3 103 Cursor Measurements page 3 126 InstaVu page 3 55 TDS 500C amp TDS 700C models only Color page 3 44 Display Settings page 3 38 Remote Communication page 3 174 Probe Calibration page 3 143 2 4 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Operating Interface Maps Rear Panel Map Principal Power Switch GPIB Connector page 1 7 Centronics Connector RS 232 Connector page 3 174 VGA Output POWER N k a Fuse Serial Number Power Connector Rear Panel Connectors Security Bracket page 1 6 page 1 6 SIGNAL OUTPUT Provides Analog Signal Output from CH3 or AX1 10 mV div AUX TRIGGER INPUT Provides Auxiliary Trigger Signal Input MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT Provides Main Trigger TTL Output DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT Provides Delayed Trigger TTL Output TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 5 Operating Interface Maps Display Map The Indicates position of When presen
7. chi 200m 100m M 5004s Chi 248mvV eta E A A E 3 j o acai E i HHH PONE NEEE IAT T Saved Current Factory Utilities Setup Setu Setup DIGIC OIC IC e Figure 2 18 Save Recall Setup Menu 10 Press one of the To Setup side menu buttons to store the current instrument settings into that setup location Remember which setup location you selected for use later There are more setup locations than can be listed at one time in the side menu The more side menu item gives you access to all the setup locations Once you have saved a particular setup you can change the settings as you wish knowing that you can come back to that setup at any time TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Positive Width side to add that measurement to the display TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Positive Width side to add that measurement to the display TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial Recall a Setup To recall the setup press SAVE RECALL SETUP gt Recall Saved Set up main gt Recall Setup side for the setup location you used in the last exercise The positive width measurement is now removed from the display because you selected it after you saved the setup The step just performed completes the examples You can restore the default settings by pressing SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confir
8. cccc eee eeeees 3 114 Table 3 11 Measurement definitions ccc eee eeeeee 3 135 Table 3 12 Standard masks cccsecccccccccccscceces 3 141 Table 3 13 Probe cal status cece cece cece cece eee e eens 3 150 Table A L Options soe ersun ersiw cise election oes lave 8s oe Slee wis ove se A 1 Table A 2 Standard Accessories cccccccccccccsccsees A 3 Table A 3 Optional Accessories ssssssoeoeseseceseeeeo A 4 Table A 4 Accessory software cc ccc cc cece ccc ecscceces A 7 Table E 1 External inspection check list 0eeeeeee E 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual vii Table of Contents viii TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual ae a General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground
9. Appendices Glossary Index Triggering on Pulses ctes oes bg ees ba ha ade SN ae ea als 3 89 Communications Triggering 00 eee eee ce eee eee 3 103 Delayed Tne Sern eg s 5 ve sf hae eee FES Pew Pe eas BPR Pes 3 106 Measuring Waveforms ccccccccsccsccecccescsceeees 3 113 Taking Automated Measurements 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 3 114 Taking Cursor Measurements 0 0 0c eee eee cee eee eee 3 126 Taking Graticule Measurements 00 0c cece eee eee 3 132 Displaying Histograms TDS 500C and TDS 700C Only 3 133 Mask Testing Option 2C Only 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 3 136 Optimizing Measurement Accuracy SPC and Probe Cal 3 141 Saving Waveforms and Setups c ccc cccccccccsccscees 3 151 Saving and Recalling Setups 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee eee 3 151 Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions 0 3 154 Managing the File System 0 0 0 eee eee eee 3 160 Printing a Hardcopy 0 0 cee ee eee eens 3 164 Communicating with Remote Instruments 0 000000005 3 174 Determining Status and Accessing Help cceceeeeees 3 179 Displaying Status 52 b incase ee pein Seach eee bees 3 179 Displaying Help savin Aas ee hee eg ee os a ao AE EA 3 181 Using Features for Advanced Applications e ee008 3 183 Limit Testina aes eee ee St a eek aes Os Bae 3 183 Wavetorm M
10. Standard Name Bit Rate STS 1 51 84 Mb s STS 3 155 52 Mb s FC133 132 8 Mb s FC266 265 6 Mb s FC531 531 2 Mb s FC1063 1 0625 Mb s D2 143 18 Mb s D1 270 Mb s FDDI 125 Mb s 1 AMI Alternate Mark Inversion CMI Code Mark Inversion NRZ Non return to Zero 2 These Telecom DSO standards are automatically selected from the Mask Menu The trigger uses Pulse Width trigger Use the Comm trigger menu to select communications triggering and to perform the procedures for source code standard pulse form trigger level or threshold mode and holdoff that follow To bring up the Comm Trigger menu press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Comm pop up See Figure 3 49 To select which source you want for the trigger Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Comm pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side To select the code press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Comm pop up gt Code main gt AMI CMI or NRZ pop up You can set mode and holdoff for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Tek Run eS Sample Source ch2 Edge Logic S H Pulse omy O M 5004s AA E E N video A ai
11. 2 14 Figure 2 7 TRIGGER Controls 0 cece cece cece eens 2 15 Figure 2 8 AUTOSET Button Location 0c cece eee 2 16 Figure 2 9 The Display After Pressing Autoset 2 16 Figure 2 10 Display Signals Requiring Probe Compensation 2 17 Figure 2 11 The Channel Buttons and Lights 2 18 Figure 2 12 The Vertical Main Menu and Coupling Side Menu 2 20 Figure 2 13 The Menus After Changing Channels 2 21 Figure 2 14 Measure Main Menu and Select Measurement Side Meni eran ee 2 23 Figure 2 15 Four Simultaneous Measurement Readouts 2 24 Figure 2 16 General Purpose Knob Indicators 2 26 Figure 2 17 Snapshot of Channel 1 0 cece eee wees 2 28 Figure 2 18 Save Recall Setup Menu eee ee eens 2 30 Figure 3 1 How Probe Compensation Affects Signals 3 6 Figure 3 2 P6139A Probe Adjustment cece eee wees 3 7 Figure 3 3 The Channel Readout ccceccecscceees 3 12 Figure 3 4 Waveform Selection Priority e ce eeeee 3 13 Figure 3 5 Scaling and Positioning cccceeeeeeeees 3 15 Figure 3 6 Vertical Readouts and Channel Menu 3 16 Figure 3 7 Record View and Time Base Readouts 3 19 Figure 3 8 Horizontal Controls 0 cc cece cece renee 3 20 Figure 3 9 Displaying an Extended Acquisition Length Record 3 23 Figure 3
12. Math2 Math3 Chit he Chi Che inv chi DIDO IO ao Figure 3 73 More Menu To Recall a Waveform To recall a waveform from disk to an internal reference memory From Disk TDS 600B Press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Recall Wfm To Ref main gt Recall From File side 3 158 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups TDS 500C or TDS 700C Press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Normal pop up gt Recall Wfm To Ref main gt Recall From File side Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Only files with WFM extensions are displayed Finally press To Ref1 To Ref2 To Ref3 or To Ref4 side to complete the operation To Recall an Acquisition To recall an acquisition from disk to an acquisition channel press SAVE RE From Disk TDS 500C and CALL WAVEFORM gt Extended pop up gt Recall Acq To Chan TDS700C Only nel main gt Recall From File side Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Only files with WF1 extensions are displayed Finally press To Ch1 To Ch2 To Ch3 or To Ch4 side to complete the operation You can only select channels in use Saving or recalling an acquisition stops acquisitions in process To Enable Autosave To use autosave TDS 600B Press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Autosave main gt Autosave Single Seq ON
13. Runt Class Note the position of the trigger indicator in Figure 3 47 Triggering occurs at the point the pulse returns over the first lower threshold going negative without crossing the second threshold level upper The polarity selected in the Polarity side menu determines the order that the threshold must be crossed for a runt trigger to occur Positive requires that the Jower threshold must be first crossed going positive then recrossed going negative without the upper threshold being crossed at all Negative requires that the upper threshold must be first crossed going negative then recrossed going positive without the lower threshold being crossed at all Either requires only that either one of the thresholds must be first crossed going in either direction then recrossed going in the opposite direction without the other threshold being crossed at all For all three polarity settings triggering occurs at the point the runt pulse recrosses its first threshold TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 95 Triggering on Waveforms Set the Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 Trigger Based on When you select the pulse class Width the oscilloscope will trigger on a pulse Pulse Width narrower
14. 0 eee eee eee eee 3 103 Delayed Trg sere i e ka gayi aee ninne e t bee he EAEG E 3 106 Taking Automated Measurements 0 0 0 0 e eee ee ee eee 3 114 Taking Cursor Measurements 0 0 0c cee eee eee eee 3 126 Taking Graticule Measurements 0 0c eee eee eee eee 3 132 Displaying Histograms 0 0 0 eee cece ee ee ee 3 133 Mask Testing Option 2C Only 0 0 c eee eee ee eee 3 136 Optimizing Measurement Accuracy SPC and Probe Cal 3 141 Saving and Recalling Setups 2 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 151 Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions 3 154 Managing the File System 0 0 2 eee eee eee 3 160 Printing a Hard cOpy ti 23 lt o2 cbssriet doh anete aaea Gas e a ean 3 164 Communicating with Remote Instruments 0 3 174 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Overview Determining Status and Displaying Status 00 0 es 3 179 Accessing Help Displaying the Banner 00 00sec ee cece cece eens eee 3 181 Displaying Help v 25 eee eee nee eet Re ee C8 3 181 Using Features for Limit Testing 0 ees 3 183 Advanced Applications Waveform Math 00 e eee e eect eect e eee n tent e nes 3 188 Fast Fourier Transforms 0 cece eee eee nee 3 191 Waveform Differentiation 20 0 0 cece eens 3 210 Waveform Integration 0 2 ee eee eee tne 3 215 TDS 500
15. CycleRMS EndCycle StartCycle x SampleInterval For details of the integration algorithm see page B 15 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 7 Appendix B Algorithms Delay Extinction Ratio Extinction Extinction dB Fall Time cs Timing measurement The amount of time between the MidRef and Mid2Ref crossings of two different traces or two different places on the same trace Delay measurements are actually a group of measurements To get a specific delay measurement you must specify the target and reference crossing polarities and the reference search direction Delay the time from one MidRef crossing on the source waveform to the Mid2Ref crossing on the second waveform Delay is not available in the Snapshot display Optical measurement Extinction Ratio High Low Optical measurement Extinction 100 0 Extinction Ratio Optical measurement Extinction dB 10 0 logio Extinction Ratio Timing measurement The time taken for the falling edge of a pulse to drop from a HighRef value default 90 to a LowRef value default 10 Figure B 2 shows a falling edge with the two crossings necessary to calculate a Fall measurement 1 Searching from Start to End find the first sample in the measurement zone greater than HighRef 2 From this sample continue the search to find the first negative crossing of HighRef The time of this crossing is THF U
16. For example to copy print a file called screen to a printer attached to the pt parallel port type copy screen Iptl B Your hardcopy device should now print a picture of the oscilloscope screen NOTE If you transmit hardcopy files across a computer network use a binary 8 bit data path TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 173 Saving Waveforms and Setups Communicating with Remote Instruments The TDS Oscilloscope can connect into a system environment so that you can control it remotely or exchange measurement or waveform data between it and a computer This subsection explains how to prepare and setup the oscilloscope for control and operation over the IEEE Std 488 2 1987 GPIB interface To Prepare for Remote To transfer data between the oscilloscope and other instruments over the GPIB Operation do the following tasks to make sure the instruments support GPIB protocols and observe GPIB Interface requirements Check for GPIB Protocols Make sure the instruments to be connected support the GPIB protocols These protocols cover Remote instrument control Bidirectional data transfer m Device compatibility m Status and event reporting To simplify the development of GPIB systems include instruments that use Tektronix defined codes and formats for messages that travel over the GPIB Each device that follows these codes and formats such as this oscilloscope supports standard command
17. Zone in the Display Colors menus In addition to choosing Intensified Samples in the side menu the oscilloscope must be interpolating equivalent time must be off for TDS 500C and TDS 700C models or Zoom must be on with its horizontal expansion greater that 1X See Interpolation on page 3 28 see Zooming on Waveforms on page 3 49 Variable Persistence style accumulates the record points on screen and displays them only for a specific time interval In that mode the display behaves like that of an analog oscilloscope You enter the time for that option with the keypad or the general purpose knob Record points are also displayed with colors that vary depending on the persistence of the point See Choose a Palette on page 3 45 Infinite Persistence style accumulates the record points until you change some control such as scale factor causing the display to be erased TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 39 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Adjust Intensity Set Display Readout Options 3 40 p 5 Tek Run 100kS s Hi Res Display Style 7 m vectors Dots Intensified Samples Infinite Persistence 20 0mv M 500ys Chif 26 4mv pa arlable Style Readout Filter Graticule Settings f wan Intensity 5 i lt Display gt Vectors Options Sin x x Full DIPIC IC C O LOJO C C O
18. probes use active circuit elements such as transistors There are three classes of active probes m High speed active m Differential active m Fixtured active Active voltage measuring probes use active circuit elements in the probe design to process signals from the circuit under test All active probes require a source of power for their operation Power is obtained either from an external power supply or from the oscilloscope itself NOTE When you connect an active probe to the oscilloscope such as the P6245 the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 Q If you then connect a passive probe you need to set the input impedance back to 1 MQ The procedure To Change Vertical Scale and Position on page 3 15 explains how to change the input impedance Also please read Input Impedance Considerations on page 3 7 for more information TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual D 3 Appendix E Probe Selection High Speed Active Probes Differential Probes Fixtured Active Probes Current Probes D 4 Active probes offer low input capacitance 1 to 2 pF typical while maintaining the higher input resistance of passive probes 10 KQ to 10 MQ Like Zo probes active probes are useful for making accurate timing and phase measurements However they do not degrade the amplitude accuracy Active probes typically have a dynamic range of 8 to 15 V Differential probes determine the voltage drop betwe
19. 8 Press Positive Width side more side gt Rise Time side gt of Positive Duty Cycle side All four measurements are displayed Right now they cover a part of the graticule area including the displayed waveforms 9 To move the measurement readouts outside the graticule area press CLEAR MENU See Figure 2 15 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 23 Tutorial Remove Measurement Use the Measure menu to remove waveforms you no longer want To remove a Readouts measurement individually you can also remove them as a group do the following step 1 TDS 600B Press MEASURE Remove Measrmnt main gt Measure ment 1 Measurement 2 and Measurement 4 side to remove those measurements Leave the rise time measurement displayed 2 TDS500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE Measure pop up gt Remove Measrmnt main gt Measurement 1 Measurement 2 and Measurement 4 side to remove those measurements Leave the rise time measurement displayed Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample ch omv a s00ps chi 2a8mVv Ch1 Freq 999 44 HZ chi width chi Rise Low resolution chi Duty 50 0 501s 7US ans ow a se C Press to Rem Figure 2 15 Four Simultaneous Measurement Readouts Change the Measurement By default the measurement system will use the 10
20. E Measuring Waveforms To make the best use of the TDS Oscilloscope when taking measurements you need to know how to use the five types or classes of measurements it can take This section describes how to take the following classes of measurements Fig ure 3 54 shows four measurement classes m Automated for automatically taking and displaying waveform measurements m Cursor for measuring the difference either in time or voltage between two locations in a waveform record m Graticule for making quick estimates by counting graticule divisions on screens m Histogram for displaying and automatically measuring how your vertical and horizontal units vary in the histogram box m Masks for mask counting selecting a mask or editing a mask This section also tells you how to use Probe Cal Channel Probe Deskew and Signal Path Compensation to optimize the accuracy of your measurements Histogram Cursor Automated Histogram box Graticule Readouts Measurements SS ee J A 6 Chl Frequency 100 MHz Ch 1 Period 10 ns Cursors Figure 3 54 Histogram Graticule Cursor and Automated Measurements TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 113 Measuring Waveforms Taking Automated Measurements Measurement List The TDS Oscilloscope provides the feature Measure for automatically taking and displaying waveform measurements This section describes how t
21. LowRef the waveform low reference level Used in fall and rise time calculations Typically set to 10 You can set it from 0 to 100 or to a voltage level Mid2Ref the middle reference level for a second waveform or the second middle reference of the same waveform Used in delay time calculations Typically set to 50 You can set it from 0 to 100 or to a voltage level Other Variables The oscilloscope also measures several values itself that it uses to help calculate measurements RecordLength is the number of data points in the time base You set it with the Horizontal menu Record Length item Start is the location of the start of the measurement zone X value It is 0 0 samples unless you are making a gated measurement When you use gated measurements it is the location of the left vertical cursor End is the location of the end of the measurement zone X value It is RecordLength 1 0 samples unless you are making a gated measurement When you use gated measurements it is the location of the right vertical cursor Hysteresis The hysteresis band is 10 of the waveform amplitude It is used in MCross1 MCross2 and MCross3 calculations For example once a crossing has been measured in a negative direction the waveform data must fall below 10 of the amplitude from the MidRef point before the measurement system is armed and ready for a positive crossing Similarly after a positive MidRef crossing
22. Trigger point Start of waveform record Acquisition record waveform TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Find More Information To perform tutorials that teach selecting scaling and positioning of waveforms see Example 1 Displaying a Waveform on page 2 13 and Example 2 Displaying Multiple Waveforms on page 2 17 To learn how to use delay with waveforms see Delayed Triggering on page 3 106 To learn how to magnify waveforms see Zooming on Waveforms on page 3 49 Choosing an Acquisition Mode The TDS Oscilloscopes are digital products that can acquire and process your input signal in a variety of modes To help you choose the best mode to use for your signal measurement task this section first describes m How the oscilloscope samples and digitizes an input signal m How the different acquisition modes such as interpolation affect this process m How to select among these modes Following these descriptions are procedures for selecting the sampling and acquisition modes beginning with Checking the Acquisition Readout on page 3 33 Sampling and Digitizing Acquisition is the process of sampling the analog input signal digitizing it to convert it into digital data and assembling it into a waveform record See Figure 3 11 The oscilloscope creates a digital representation of the input signal by sampling the voltage level of the signal at regular time intervals The
23. gt Histogram pop up gt Histogram Options main gt Histogram Size side Use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the histogram size The histogram box selects the section of the trace used for histograms To set the size of the histogram box press MEASURE gt Histogram pop up gt Histogram Box Limits main gt Top Limit Bottom Limit Left Limit or Right Limit side Use the general purpose knob or keypad to adjust the selected edge of the histogram box TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Histogram Measurement List The TDS Oscilloscope provides you with 10 histogram measurements Table 3 11 lists brief definitions of the measurements Table 3 11 Measurement definitions Name Mean Median StdDev Definition The average of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than and half are greater than this value The standard deviation Root Mean Square RMS deviation of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Hits in Hits in Box Box Displays the number of points in the histogram box or on the box boundary Waveren Waveform Count Displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to the histogram oun Peak Hits Displays the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram Pk Pk Displays the peak to peak value of the histogram Vertical histo
24. 2 Default settings 3 9 How to execute 3 9 AUTOSET button 2 15 AUX TRIGGER INPUT BNC 2 5 Auxiliary trigger 3 64 Average Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 Index 1 Index Average acquisition mode 3 30 3 61 Glossary 2 Average mode Acquire menu 3 184 Average Acquire menu 3 33 Average More menu 3 191 Bandwidth Glossary 2 Selecting 3 17 Bandwidth Vertical menu 3 17 Banner displaying 3 181 3 182 Base Cursor menu 3 131 Blackman Harris window 3 195 BMP 3 165 BMP Color Hardcopy menu 3 167 BMP Mono Hardcopy menu 3 167 BNC AUX TRIGGER INPUT 2 5 DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 2 5 MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT 2 5 SIGNAL OUTPUT 2 5 Bold Color menu 3 45 Burst width 3 114 Button ACQUIRE MENU 3 33 3 184 AUTOSET 2 15 CLEAR MENU 2 3 2 8 2 13 2 23 2 24 3 123 CURSOR 3 129 DELAYED TRIG 3 68 3 108 DISPLAY 3 39 3 44 FORCE TRIG 3 69 HARDCOPY 3 160 3 167 3 177 HELP 3 181 HORIZONTAL MENU 3 68 3 108 InstaVu 3 55 MEASURE 3 117 3 135 MORE 3 12 3 158 3 189 ON STBY 1 7 2 3 Save Recall SETUP 2 10 3 11 3 152 3 160 Save Recall WAVEFORM 3 155 3 160 SELECT 3 130 Glossary 11 SET LEVEL TO 50 3 69 SINGLE TRIG 3 37 3 70 STATUS 3 179 TRIGGER MENU 3 72 3 73 3 81 3 85 3 86 3 91 3 93 3 97 UTILITY 3 142 3 166 3 176 VERTICAL MENU 2 19 WAVEFORM OFF 2 21 3 13 3 43 ZOOM 3 49 3 51 Index 2 Buttons CH1 CH2 3 12 Channel selection 2 1
25. 3 200 FFTs Transform Time Records to Frequency Records The FFT time domain record just described is input for the FFT Figure 3 97 shows the transformation of that time domain data record into an FFT frequency domain record The resulting frequency domain record is one half the length of the FFT input because the FFT computes both positive and negative frequencies Since the negative values mirror the positive values only the positive values are displayed FFT Time Domain Record FFT Frequency Domain Record Figure 3 97 FFT Time Domain Record vs FFT Frequency Domain Record FFT Frequency Range and Resolution When you turn on an FFT waveform the oscilloscope displays either the magnitude or phase angle of the FFT frequency domain record The resolution between the discrete frequencies displayed in this waveform is determined by the following equation _ Sample Rate AF FFT Length Where AF is the frequency resolution Sample Rate is the sample rate of the source waveform FFT Length is the length of the FFT Time Domain waveform record The sample rate also determines the range these frequencies span they span from 0 to the sample rate of the waveform record The value of 4 the sample rate is often referred to as the Nyquist frequency or point For example a sample rate of 20 Megasamples per second would yield an FFT with a range of 0 to 10 MHz The sample rates available for acquiring data records vary over a range TD
26. Acquire Mode Sample Acquire Repetitive Signal On TDS 500C and 700C Models Only Acquire Stop After RUN STOP button only Deskew Channel P robe Unchanged TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 9 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Table 3 1 Autoset defaults Cont Control Changed by autoset to Display Style Vectors Display Intensity Overall If less than 50 set to 75 Display Format YT FastF rame TDS 500C and off 700C Models Only Horizontal P osition Horizontal Scale Centered within the graticule window As determined by the signal frequency Horizontal Time Base Main Only Horizontal Record Length Unchanged Horizontal Lock Unchanged InstaVu Acquisitions Unchanged TDS 500C and 700C Models Only Limit Test Off Trigger Position Unchanged Trigger Type Edge Trigger Source Numerically lowest of the displayed channels the selected channel Trigger Level Midpoint of data for the trigger source Trigger Slope Trigger Coupling Positive DC Trigger Holdoff Default Holdoff Set equal to 5 horizontal divisions Adjustable Holdoff 250 ns Selection in Mode and Holdoff menu determines whether the default holdoff value or the adjustable hold value is used Vertical Scale As determined by the signal level Vertical Coupling Vertical Bandwidth DC unless AC was previously set AC remains unchanged Full Vertical Offset 0 volts Zoom Off
27. Figure 3 19 Display Menu Style NOTE TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only See Using InstaVu Acquisition Mode on page 3 55 to see how Style setup differs for InstaVu mode Intensity lets you set text graticule and waveform intensity brightness levels To set the intensity Press DISPLAY Intensity main gt Text Grat or Waveform side Enter the intensity percentage values with the keypad or the general purpose knob All intensity adjustments operate over a range from 20 close to fully off to 100 fully bright Readout options control whether the trigger indicator trigger level bar and current date and time appear on the display The options also control what style trigger level bar long or short is displayed TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 1 TDS 600B Press DISPLAY Readout Options main TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Press DISPLAY Mode main gt Normal pop up gt Format RO main 2 Toggle Display T Trigger Point side to select whether or not to display T indicating the trigger point You can select ON or OFF The trigger point indicates the position of the trigger in the waveform record 3 Press Trigger Bar Style side to select either the short or the long trigger bar or to turn the trigger bar off See Figure 3 20 Note that both styles are shown for illustrating purposes but you can only display one style
28. None FDDI Halt 125 Mb s E1Sym Sym Pair 2 048 Mb s DS3 44 736 Mb s FC133E ectrical 132 7 Mb s E1 Coax Coax Pair 2 048 Mb s DS4NA 139 26 Mb s 265 6 Mb s E2 8 448 Mb s E40 Binary 0 139 26 Mb s DS4NA Mx Max Output 139 26 Mb s 531 2 Mb s STS 1 Pulse 51 84 Mb s E41 Binary 1 139 26 Mb s E5 CEPT 565 Mb s STM1E 0 Binary 0 155 52 Mb s STMI1E 1 Binary 1 155 52 Mb s STS 3 155 52 Mb s STS 3 Mx Max Output 155 52 Mb s Optimizing Measurement Accuracy SPC and Probe Cal The TDS Oscilloscope provides three features that optimize measurement accuracy Signal Path Compensation SPC lets you compensate the internal signal path used to acquire the waveforms and measure based on the ambient temperature Channel Probe Deskew lets you compensate for the fact that signals may come in from cables of different length Probe Cal lets you compensate the entire signal path from probe tip to digitized signal to improve the gain and offset accuracy of the probe This section tells you how to use both features TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 141 Measuring Waveforms Signal Path Compensation 3 142 The TDS Oscilloscope lets you compensate the internal signal path used to acquire the waveforms you measure SPC optimizes the oscilloscope capability to make accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature Run an SPC anytime you wish to ensure that the meas
29. Performing a Signal Path Compensation 3 143 Figure 3 69 Probe Cal Menu and Gain Compensation Display 3 146 Figure 3 70 Re use Probe Calibration Data Menu 3 149 Figure 3 71 Save Recall Setup Menu cccceceecees 3 152 Figure 3 72 Save Waveform Menu c ccececcecsecees 3 155 Figure 3 73 More Menu cece cece cece cece eee eeeee 3 158 Figure 3 74 File Utilities 20 0 cc cece cc cece ee eee eee 3 161 Figure 3 75 File System Labeling Menu 6 3 162 Figure 3 76 Utility Menu System I O cece eee eens 3 166 Figure 3 77 Hardcopy Formats ecccceccccccsccees 3 167 Figure 3 78 Date and Time Display cccceceecees 3 168 Figure 3 79 Connecting the Oscilloscope Directly to the Hardcopy Device 1 63 occice sissies css ccd ee oe es ie ere en ee wees 3 169 Figure 3 80 Connecting the Oscilloscope and Hardcopy Device Via a PC ec ciccicccseetecccoscs p05 oad oid vais aruet norin eTe 3 172 Figure 3 81 Typical GPIB Network Configuration 3 175 Figure 3 82 Stacking GPIB Connectors 0e eee eeee 3 176 Figure 3 83 Connecting the Oscilloscope to a Controller 3 176 Figure 3 84 Utility Menu cc ccc ccc cece eee e eens 3 177 Figure 3 85 Status Menu System ccc eee cece enone 3 180 Figure 3 86 Banner Display ccccccccccccscscceces 3 181 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User
30. Signal Limit Test Sample N R S button Setup Sources Template Dlo Figure 3 16 Acquisition Menu and Readout Selecting an The oscilloscope provides several modes see The Acquisition Modes on Acquisition Mode page 3 29 for acquiring and converting analog data into digital form To choose how the oscilloscope will create points in the waveform record 1 Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU Mode main See Figure 3 16 2 TDS 600B Press Sample Envelope Average or Peak Detect side or TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Press Sample Peak Detect Hi Res Envelope or Average side InstaVu mode must be off to use Hi Res Envelope or Average modes 3 Ifyou selected Envelope or Average enter the number of waveform records to be enveloped or averaged using the keypad or the general purpose knob TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 33 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Selecting Repetitive Sampling 3 34 NOTE TDS 500C and 700C models only Selecting Hi Res mode in the Acquire menu automatically reduces long record length settings to prevent overflow of acquisition memory Because Hi Res mode uses twice the acquisition memory used by other acquisition modes allowing selection of the longer horizontal record lengths with Hi Res mode would cause the oscilloscope to run out of memory TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only To limit the oscilloscope to real time s
31. TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Reset the Do the following steps to reset the oscilloscope to its factory default settings Oscilloscope 1 Press the Save Recall SETUP button to display the Setup menu see Fig ure 3 3 Press the button directly below the Recall Factory Setup menu item 2 Press the button to the right of the OK Confirm Factory Init side menu item 3 Press the SET LEVEL TO 50 button front panel to be sure the oscilloscope triggers on the input signal Selecting Channels The TDS Oscilloscope applies all actions based on a specific waveform such as taking measurements or applying any changes it receives to the vertical control settings to the selected waveform You can select a channel waveform a math waveform or a reference waveform This subsection describes how to select a waveform and how you can turn the display of a waveform off To Identify the To determine which channel is currently selected check the channel readout It Selected Channel shows the selected channel in inverse video in the lower left corner of the display The channel reference indicator for the selected channel also appears in reverse video along the left side of the display See Figure 3 3 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 11 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Channel Reference Indicator Channel Readout To Select and Remove Waveforms Tek
32. TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms StartCycle is the starting time for cycle measurements It is a floating point number with values between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 inclusive StartCycle MCross1 EndCycle is the ending time for cycle measurements It is a floating point number with values between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 inclusive EndCycle MCross3 Waveform lt 0 0 RecordLength 1 0 gt holds the acquired data TPOS is the location of the sample just before the trigger point the time reference zero sample In other terms it contains the domain reference location This location is where time 0 TSOFF is the offset between TPOS and the actual trigger point In other words it is the trigger sample offset Values range between 0 0 and 1 0 samples This value is determined by the instrument when it receives a trigger The actual zero reference trigger location in the measurement record is at TPOS TSOFF TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 5 Appendix B Algorithms Measurement Algorithms Amplitude Area Cycle Area The automated measurements are defined and calculated as follows Amplitude High Low The arithmetic area for one waveform Remember that one waveform is not necessarily equal to one cycle For cyclical data you may prefer to use the cycle area rather than the arithmetic area if Start End then return
33. V Bar Cursors i M 3009 chi T ov Remove Gating Statistics Level Setu Measure Measrmnt i Snapshot lt measure gt for Chi Measrmnt OFF Histogram oloo Figure 3 57 Measure Menu Gating 3 Using the general purpose knob move the selected the active cursor Press SELECT to change which cursor is active Displaying the cursor menu and turning V Bar cursors off will not turn gating off Gating arrows remain on screen to indicate the area over which the measurement is gated You must turn gating off in the Gating side menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 119 Measuring Waveforms Define High Low Setup Define Reference Levels 3 120 NOTE Cursors are displayed relative to the selected waveform If you are making a measurement using two waveforms this behavior can be a source of confusion If you turn off horizontal locking and adjust the horizontal position of one waveform independent of the other the cursors appear at the requested position with respect to the selected waveform Gated measurements remain accurate but the displayed positions of the cursors change when you change the selected waveform The oscilloscope provides two settings histogram and min max for specifying how measure determines the High and Low levels of waveforms To use the high low setup do the following step TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt H
34. You should have a stable display of the probe compensation waveform from the last step Do the following steps to first create an unstable display and then to autoset the display 1 To create an unstable display slowly turn the trigger MAIN LEVEL knob see Figure 2 7 first one direction and then the other Observe what happens when you move the trigger level above the highest part of the waveform Leave the trigger level in that untriggered state A TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL MAIN LEVEL Knob TRIG D READY DELAYED TRIG arm TRIGGER MENU SET LEVEL TO 50 Figure 2 7 TRIGGER Controls 2 Press AUTOSET see Figure 2 8 and observe the stable waveform display TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 15 Tutorial SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM APPLICATION MENU ACQUIRE MENU MEASURE HARDCOPY RUN STOP AUTOSET Button ae E OSN NS G C UTILITY SHIFT CURSOR DISPLAY CE Ce GS QQ VERTICAL A HORIZONTAL 77 Figure 2 8 AUTOSET Button Location Figure 2 9 shows the display after pressing AUTOSET If necessary you can adjust the waveform now by using the knobs discussed earlier in this example a Tek Run Oe Sample a s00ps Chi 260mv ClO C O Ch omv IC e a a Figure 2 9 The Display After Pressing Autoset TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tut
35. and 90 levels of the Reference Levels waveform for taking the rise time measurement You can change these values to other percentages or change them to absolute voltage levels 2 24 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial ae To examine the current values press Level Setup main gt High Ref side The General Purpose Knob The general purpose knob the large knob is now set to adjust the high reference level Figure 2 16 There are several important things to observe on the screen amp m The knob icon appears at the top of the screen The knob icon indicates that the general purpose knob has just been set to adjust a parameter m The upper right corner of the screen shows the readout High Ref 90 m The High Ref side menu item is highlighted and a box appears around the 90 readout in the High Ref menu item The box indicates that the general purpose knob is currently set to adjust that parameter Turn the general purpose knob left and right and then use it to adjust the high level to 80 That sets the high measurement reference to 80 Hint To make large changes quickly with the general purpose knob press the SHIFT button before turning the knob When the light above the SHIFT button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the general purpose knob speeds up significantly TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 25 Tutorial 2 26 General Purpose K
36. depending on the model see Table 1 1 m Records lengths up to 50 K standard and 500 K with Option 1M and up to 8 M with Option 2M depending on the model see Table 1 1 m Four channel or 2 2 channel operation depending on model Two plus Two channel operation allows two of four channels to be displayed simultaneously All channels have 8 bit resolution See Table 1 1 m Trigger modes include edge logic and pulse Video trigger modes available with option 05 only include NTSC SECAM PAL HDTV and FlexFor mat Available with option 2C only 28 Communications trigger modes see Table 3 8 on page 3 103 m Dual Window Zoom which shows a waveform magnified and unmagnified on the same display m Sample envelope average high res peak detect and InstaVu acquisition mode which updates the display at rates rivaling the fastest analog oscillo scopes see Table 1 1 for models and modes available TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 1 1 Product Description Differences by Model Table 1 1 lists some key TDS features and relates them to the different TDS models that this manual covers Table 1 1 Key Features and differences of models 540C 724c 754c 784c oaf a pa e e Digitizing rate max 1GS s 2GS s 4GS s No of Channels maxi 1 2 2 1 2 1 mum rate Record Lengths max To 50K Channel2 InstaVu Acquisitions Pes JN Yes Hi Res Acquisitions a aS a ee Yes Advanced DSP Math3 Std 4 Com
37. press Limit Test side once to toggle it to ON When you set Limit Test to ON the oscilloscope compares incoming waveforms against the waveform template stored in reference memory according to the settings in the Limit Test Sources side menu Single Waveform You can compare a single waveform against a single template When making a Comparisons single waveform versus a single template comparison consider the following operating characteristics m The waveform will be repositioned horizontally to move the first sample in the waveform record that is outside of template limits to center screen m The position of the waveform template will track that of the waveform TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 187 Using Features for Advanced Applications Multiple Waveform Comparisons Waveform Math 3 188 You can also compare more than one waveform against a single template or more than one waveform with each one compared against its own template or a common template When setting up for such comparisons consider the following operating characteristics m You should set Horizontal Lock to None in the Zoom side menu push ZOOM and press repeatedly Horizontal Lock to None See Zoom a Waveform on page 3 51 for more information on horizontal lock m With horizontal lock set as just described the oscilloscope will reposition each waveform horizontally to move the first sample in the waveform record that is outside of t
38. press Select Measrmnt main The readout for that menu item indicates which channel the measurement will be taken from All automated measurements are made on the selected channel The Select Measurement side menu lists some of the measurements that can be taken on waveforms There are many different measurements available up to four can be taken and displayed at any one time Pressing the button next to the more menu item brings up the other measurement selections 7 Press Frequency side If the Frequency menu item is not visible press more side repeatedly until the Frequency item appears Then press Frequency side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial Observe that the frequency measurement appears within the right side of the graticule area The measurement readout includes the notation Ch1 meaning that the measurement is taken on the channel waveform To take a measurement on another channel select that channel and then select the measurement Tek Run 100kS s Sample Select Measurement l Frequency Positi widt Negative width 200mv M 500s Chi 248mv smon L M i i o e Remove Gating Statistics fais Setu Measure EEG ia Snapshot lt Measure gt Wna aE Measrmnt OFF OFF Histogram Figure 2 14 Measure Main Menu and Select Measurement Side Menu
39. side TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Normal pop up gt Autosave main Autosave Single Seq ON side Also turn on Single Acquisition Sequence in the Acquire menu See Stop After on page 3 35 To disable this feature simply press Autosave main Autosave Single Seq OFF side If you enable both autosave and single sequence the oscilloscope will save all live channels to reference waveforms at the completion of each single sequence event All previous reference waveform data will be erased To rearm the oscilloscope for taking a new autosave single acquisition sequence press RUN STOP To avoid loss of reference waveforms you can save them to disk use the SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM menu before rearming the oscilloscope TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 159 Saving Waveforms and Setups Consider the following operating characteristics when using autosave m Autosave saves all live waveforms that is waveforms displayed in CH 1 CH 4 To be saved the live waveforms must be displayed on screen m Autosave saves each live waveform into the reference memory that corresponds to the channel CH 1 to Refl CH 2 to Ref2 and so on m Autosave when executing erases all four reference memories To avoid loss of important waveforms you may want to save them to a disk file before enabling a single acquisition sequence m Autosave is not available in InstaVu mode or if
40. stable display perform the following steps see Figure 3 56 1 TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main 2 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Select Measrmnt main 3 Select a measurement from the side menu Note the following rules for taking automatic measurements m You can only take a maximum of four measurements at a time To add a fifth you must remove one or more of the existing measurements m To vary the source for measurements simply select the other channel and then choose the measurements you want m Be careful when taking automatic measurements on noisy signals You might measure the frequency of the noise and not the desired waveform Your oscilloscope helps identify such situations by displaying a low signal amplitude or low resolution warning message TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 117 Measuring Waveforms Tek Run ei Sample Select Measurement Frequency Positi widt Negative Width EES ony Sooys Chi ov more Masks lofts Histogram OIOI JO m elect Remove Tatin a Statistics evel Setu Measure WEED g Snapshot lt measure METOE ent OFF Histogram SSeS SeS Figure 3 56 Measure Menu m Be careful when taking automatic measurements using Extended Acquisition mode and high
41. waveform data must go above 10 of the amplitude before a negative crossing can be measured Hysteresis is useful when you are measuring noisy signals because it allows the oscilloscope to ignore minor fluctuations in the signal TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 3 Appendix B Algorithms MCross Calculations MCross1 MCross2 and MCross3 refer to the first second and third MidRef cross times respectively See Figure B 1 The polarity of the crossings does not matter for these variables but the crossings alternate in polarity that is MCross1 could be a positive or negative crossing but if MCross is a positive crossing MCross2 will be a negative crossing MCross3 MCross2 EndCycle MCrossl StartCycle MidR ef Hysteresis x Amplitude MidR ef MidR ef Hysteresis x Amplitude Figure B 1 MCross Calculations The oscilloscope calculates these values as follows 1 Find the first MidRefCrossing in the waveform record or the gated region This is MCross1 2 Continuing from MCross1 find the next MidRefCrossing in the waveform record or the gated region of the opposite polarity of MCross1 This is MCross2 3 Continuing from MCross2 find the next MidRefCrossing in the waveform record or the gated region of the same polarity as MCross1 This is MCross3 MCross1Polarity is the polarity of first crossing no default It can be rising or falling B 4 TDS 500C
42. 10 Extended Acquisition Length and Zoom 3 24 Figure 3 11 Acquisition Input Analog Signal Sample and Digitize 3 25 Figure 3 12 Several Points May be Acquired for Each Point Used 3 26 Figure 3 13 Real Time Sampling ccceccecscceees 3 26 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual iii Table of Contents Figure 3 14 Equivalent Time Sampling 5e00 3 27 Figure 3 15 How the Acquisition Modes Work 3 31 Figure 3 16 Acquisition Menu and Readout 66 3 33 Figure 3 17 Acquire Menu Stop After 0e eens 3 36 Figure 3 18 Aliasing 0 cc cece cw cece cece cece eee eens 3 37 Figure 3 19 Display Menu Style 0 eee ee eee eee 3 40 Figure 3 20 Trigger Point and Level Indicators 3 41 Figure 3 21 Display Menu Setting cece eee eee 3 45 Figure 3 22 Display Menu Palette Colors 66 3 47 Figure 3 23 Display Menu Map Reference Colors 3 48 Figure 3 24 Display Menu Restore Colors 0065 3 49 Figure 3 25 Zoom Mode with Horizontal Lock Set to None 3 52 Figure 3 26 Dual Window Preview Mode seee08 3 53 Figure 3 27 Dual Zoom Shown Dual Window Preview Mode 3 55 Figure 3 28 InstaVu Display ccc ccc cccc ccc ecscccees 3 56 Figure 3 29 Normal DSO Acquisition and Display Mode Versus Insta Vu Mod oes
43. 167 3 170 Deskjet 3 167 DeskjetC 3 167 DPU411 II 3 167 DPU412 3 167 EPS Color Img 3 167 EPS Color Plt 3 167 EPS Mono Img 3 167 EPS Mono Plt 3 167 Epson 3 167 Format 3 167 GPIB 3 167 HPGL 3 167 Interleaf 3 167 Landscape 3 167 Laserjet 3 167 Layout 3 167 OK Confirm Clear Spool 3 170 Palette 3 167 PCX 3 167 PCX Color 3 167 Port 3 167 Portrait 3 167 RLE Color 3 167 Thinkjet 3 167 TIFF 3 167 Hardcopy Color menu 3 45 Hardcopy Utility menu 3 177 Help Accessing 3 179 HELP button 3 181 Help system 3 179 HF Rej Main Trigger menu 3 74 Hi Res Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 Hi Res acquisition mode 3 32 Glossary 5 Hi Res Acquire menu 3 33 High 3 115 Glossary 6 High Ref Measure menu 3 121 High speed active probes D 4 High voltage probes D 2 High Low Setup Measure menu 3 120 HiRes acquisition mode 3 61 Histogram counting 3 133 Histogram measurements 3 135 Histogram menu 3 133 3 134 Histogram Measure menu 3 120 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index Histograms 3 133 HistoMasks Status menu 3 179 Hits in Box 3 135 Holdoff trigger 3 66 Glossary 6 Horiz Pos Horizontal menu 3 22 Horiz Scale Horizontal menu 3 22 Horizontal Bar cursors 3 127 Glossary 6 Control 3 19 3 62 Menu 3 68 Position 3 19 Readouts 3 18 Scale 3 19 SCALE knob 2 14 System 2 14 Horizontal menu 3 108 Delay
44. 3 101 4 Press Set Single Source to side Repeatedly press the same button or use the general purpose knob until the channel source selected in step 1 appears in the menu label 5 Press Set Function to side Repeatedly press the same button or use the general purpose knob until diff appears in the menu label 6 Press OK Create Math Wfm side to display the derivative of the waveform you input in step 1 You should now have your derivative math waveform on screen Use the Vertical SCALE and POSITION knobs to size and position your waveform as you require TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 211 Using Features for Advanced Applications Derivative Math Waveform Source Waveform Tek Run 5 00MS s Sample ch 20 0mva Math 1 i 200kV s Mathi Math2 Math3 FFTC Ch invechi 10 08 Ref1 M 10 0 chi T Ref2 _ ov Ref3 Change Math Math waveform 4 definition i No Extended Eass Processing Average 2 Ref4 5 C Figure 3 101 Derivative Math Waveform Oloo o To Take Automated Once you have displayed your derivative math waveform you can use automated Measurements measurements to make various parameter measurements Do the following steps to display automated measurements of the w
45. 3 190 Set 2nd Source to 3 190 Set FFT Source to 3 193 Set FFT Vert Scale to 3 194 Set FFT Window to 3 195 Set Function to 3 189 Set Function to 3 211 3 216 Set operator to 3 190 Set Single Source to 3 189 3 190 Set Single Source to 3 211 3 216 Single Wfm Math 3 189 3 211 3 216 Index 10 N NAND Glossary 8 NAND Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 Negative duty cycle 3 115 Negative overshoot 3 115 Negative width 3 115 Negative Main Trigger menu 3 92 3 94 3 97 No Process More menu 3 191 Noise reducing in FFTs 3 202 reducing in phase FFTs 3 195 3 205 Noise Rej Main Trigger menu 3 74 NOR Glossary 8 NOR Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 Normal trigger mode 3 65 Glossary 8 Normal Color menu 3 45 Normal Main Trigger menu 3 75 NRZ Telecom Trigger menu 3 104 NTSC Display menu 3 42 Nyquist frequency 3 203 O OFF Real Time Only Acquire menu 3 34 Off Bus Utility menu 3 177 Offset DC See DC Offset Vertical 3 18 vertical 3 201 3 213 3 219 Offset Vertical menu 3 18 OK Confirm Clear Spool Hardcopy menu 3 170 OK Create Math Wfm More menu 3 189 OK Create Measurement Measure Delay menu 3 123 OK Erase Ref amp Panel Memory Utility menu 3 153 OK Store Template Acquire menu 3 185 ON Enable ET Acquire menu 3 34 ON STBY button 1 7 2 3 Optical Power See Mean dBm Optical probes D 5 Options A 1 Options Color menu 3 48 OR Glossar
46. 3 29 lists acquisition rates vs number of channels that are on Knob A rotary control Logic state trigger The oscilloscope checks for defined combinatorial logic conditions on channels 1 2 and 3 on a transition of channel 4 that meets the set slope and threshold conditions If the conditions of channels 1 2 and 3 are met then the oscilloscope triggers Ss Logic pattern trigger The oscilloscope triggers depending on the combinatorial logic condition of channels 1 2 3 and 4 Allowable conditions are AND OR NAND and NOR PE Low The value used as 0 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure ments May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the minimum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found below the mid point See Appendix B Algorithms for details Main menu A group of related controls for a major oscilloscope function that the oscilloscope displays across the bottom of the screen Main menu buttons Bezel buttons under the main menu display They allow you to select items in the main menu r Maximum Amplitude voltage measurement of the maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary 7 Gl
47. 3 45 Change Colors 3 46 Collision Contrast 3 48 Color 3 46 3 47 3 48 Color Matches Contents 3 47 3 48 Hardcopy 3 45 Hue 3 46 Lightness 3 46 Map Math 3 47 Map Reference 3 47 Math 3 47 Monochrome 3 45 Normal 3 45 Options 3 48 Palette 3 45 Persistence Palette 3 45 Ref 3 48 Reset All Mappings To Factory 3 49 Reset All Palettes To Factory 3 49 Reset Current Palette To Factory 3 49 Reset to Factory Color 3 46 Restore Colors 3 48 Saturation 3 46 Spectral 3 45 Temperature 3 45 View Palette 3 45 Color Color menu 3 46 3 47 3 48 Color Display menu 3 44 Comm trigger 3 65 Communication Signal Analyzer A 2 Compare Ch1 to Acquire menu 3 186 Compare Ch2 to Acquire menu 3 186 Compare Ch3 to Acquire menu 3 186 Compare Ch4 to Acquire menu 3 186 Compare Mathi to Acquire menu 3 186 Compare Math2 to Acquire menu 3 186 Compare Math3 to Acquire menu 3 186 Compensation of passive probes 3 6 Configure Utility menu 3 166 3 177 Confirm Delete File Utilities menu 3 163 Connector AUX TRIGGER INPUT 2 5 Centronics 2 5 DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT 2 5 GPIB 2 5 3 175 MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT 2 5 Power 2 5 RS 232 2 5 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual SIGNAL OUTPUT 2 5 VGA 2 5 Contrast Display menu 3 40 Conventions xiv Copy File Utilities menu 3 163 Coupling 2 19 Ground Glossary 5 Selectin
48. 34 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms If you select any of these modes before or while InstaVu is on they will remain selected in their respective menus but the oscilloscope will ignore them It will put the modes into effect when you turn InstaVu off If the oscilloscope setup is not as you expect when you turn InstaVu off this may be because the oscillo scope quit ignoring these InstaVu incompatible modes InstaVu mode disallows selection of Math waveforms If you attempt to select a math waveform from the MORE menu the oscilloscope will display an error message Either switch InstaVu off and create the math waveform or select a channel waveform and continue using InstaVu mode InstaVu displays using a persistence display style see display menu If you select Intensified time base the intensified zone is controlled by Horizontal Scale and Delay time settings as when InstaVu is off but the zone is masked by the persistence display mode and cannot be seen Turn off InstaVu to display the intensified zone Using FastFrame You can define and enable FastFrame TDS 500C and 700C models only This feature lets you capture multiple acquisitions in the acquisition memory of a single channel Figure 3 30 shows how FastFrame combines the desired captured records into one larger record For example FastFrame would let you store 10 records of 500 samples each into one record with a 5000
49. 4 Figure B 2 Fall Tame 5 655 663 96 orense aries esn ao instream E B 9 Figure B 3 Rise Time ccc secs ccs sccccecccnscssceces B 14 Figure B 4 Choosing Minima or Maxima to Use for Envelope Measurements s io 5 6 sie 5 sivs isi oie te i o 5 ee 6 06 15 l6 ae Hib 8 8 ei 9 oe 8 B 16 Figure D 1 Typical High Voltage Probes ee eeeee D 3 Figure D 2 A6303 Current Probe Used in the AM 503S Opt 03 D 5 Figure F 1 Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs F 1 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Key Features and differences of models 1 2 Table 1 2 Fuse and fuse cap part numbers 0eeeeee 1 7 Table 3 1 Autoset defaults ccc ccc cece cece cece eeeee 3 9 Table 3 2 How interleaving affects sample rate 3 29 Table 3 3 Additional resolution bits cece eeeeeeees 3 32 Table 3 4 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Sampling mode selection when fit to screen is Off ccc ccc ccc ccc eeeececes 3 35 Table 3 5 XY Format pairs ccc ccc cece cece eee eceeens 3 43 Table 3 6 Pattern and State Logic cc ccc cece eee eeeeee 3 78 Table 3 7 Pulse trigger definitions ccce ce eceeeeees 3 90 Table 3 8 Comm triggers c ccc cc cece cece cess cceees 3 103 Table 3 9 Communications pulse forms 0eceeeeees 3 106 Table 3 10 Measurement definitions
50. 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual
51. Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and marking on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product The common terminal is at ground potential Do not connect the common terminal to elevated voltages Do not apply a potential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual ix General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms A A Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practi
52. Burst width 3 114 Glossary 2 Cycle area 3 114 Glossary 3 Cycle mean 3 114 Glossary 3 Cycle RMS 3 115 Glossary 3 Delay 3 122 Glossary 3 Duty cycle 2 23 Glossary 8 Glossary 9 Extinction 3 116 Extinction dB 3 116 Extinction Ratio 3 116 Fall time 3 115 Frequency 2 22 3 115 Glossary 4 Gated Glossary 4 High 3 115 Glossary 6 Histogram 3 135 Histogram counting 3 133 Hits in Box 3 135 Low 3 115 Glossary 7 Mask Counting 3 136 Maximum 3 115 Glossary 7 Mean 3 115 3 135 Glossary 8 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Mean 1 StdDev 3 135 Mean 2 StdDev 3 135 Mean 3 StdDev 3 135 Mean dBm 3 116 Median 3 135 Minimum 3 115 Glossary 8 Negative duty cycle 3 115 Negative overshoot 3 115 Negative width 3 115 Overshoot Glossary 9 Peak Hits 3 135 Peak to peak 3 115 Glossary 9 Period 3 116 Glossary 9 Phase 3 116 Glossary 9 Pk Pk 3 135 Positive duty cycle 3 116 Positive overshoot 3 116 Positive width 3 116 Propagation delay 3 115 Readout 3 116 3 117 Reference levels 2 24 Rise time 2 23 3 116 Glossary 11 RMS 3 116 Glossary 11 StdDev 3 135 Undershoot Glossary 8 Waveform Count 3 135 Width 2 23 Glossary 8 Glossary 10 Measurement Accuracy Ensuring maximum 3 142 3 143 Measurements Algorithms B 1 Automated 2 22 automated 3 114 Classes of 3 113 Cursor 3 126 Gated 3 118 graticule 3 132 List
53. Calibration Data menu Different probe Initialized Different probe Initialized 1 Refers to a channel input that was successfully compensated at the time Probe Cal was last executed for the input channel 2 If no probe is connected the probe status in the vertical main menu is always initialized 3 A probe with a simple interface is a probe that can convey very limited information to the oscilloscope Most passive probes such as the P6139A have simple interfaces 4 Aprobe with a TEKPROBE interface is a probe that can convey additional information For instance it might automatical ly set the oscilloscope input channel impedance to match the probe send the oscilloscope a unique probe identification number and so on Some optical probes and most active probes such as the P6205 have TEKPROBE interfaces 3 150 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual ae a a Saving Waveforms and Setups The TDS Oscilloscope can save and recall the waveforms you measure and the setups you use to measure them It can also output or save a copy of its display screen This section describes how to use the following features to save recall and document your measurements m Save Recall Setups for saving the setups you create to internal memory or to a disk so you can recall and reuse those setups m Save Recall Waveform for saving waveforms to internal memory or to a disk and for recalling those waveforms to the display m Hardcopy for pri
54. Check the Vertical Scale 3 14 The TDS Oscilloscope allows you to scale change the vertical or horizontal size and position move up down left or right waveforms on screen for best display Figure 3 5 shows the results of both vertical and horizontal scaling and positioning This section first tells you how to quickly check and set vertical and horizontal scales positions and other parameters such as vertical bandwidth and horizontal record length To quickly see the position of the waveform in the display check the Channel Reference Record View and Acquisition View icons See figures 3 5 3 9 and 3 10 The Channel Reference icon at the left side of the display points to ground on the waveform record when offset is set to 0 V The oscilloscope contracts or expands the selected waveform around this point when you change the vertical scale The Record View at the top of the display indicates where the trigger occurs and what part of the waveform record is displayed In extended acquisition mode if the trigger is shown at 0 or 100 of the record view see the acquisition view for the actual trigger location In extended acquisition mode option 2M only when a live channel is dis played the acquisition view at the top of the display indicates where the trigger and waveform record occur in the extended acquisition Check the Vertical Readout at the bottom left part of the display to read the volts division setting
55. Figure 3 24 3 48 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 2 Select the object s you want to restore by pressing Reset Current Palette To Factory Reset All Palettes To Factory or Reset All Mappings To Factory in the side menu o Tek Run 100kS 5 Sample Restore Colors Reset Current Palette to Factory Reset All Palettes to Factory Reset All Mappings to Factory Ssoom lt M 500us Chif 270mV pete Palette Change ap ap Restore Settings Math Reference Options 1 lt Color Normal Colors Colors Colors Colors LOO ID CO lI Figure 3 24 Display Menu Restore Colors Zooming on Waveforms The TDS Oscilloscope can expand or compress zoom in or out on a waveform without changing the acquisition parameters sample rate record length and so on This subsection describes how to use Zoom and how it interacts with the selected waveform It also describes how interpolation can affect Zoom Use Zoom press the ZOOM button when you want to temporarily expand a waveform to inspect small feature s on that waveform For example to temporarily expand the front corner of a pulse to inspect its aberrations use Zoom to expand it horizontally and vertically After you are finished you can return to your original horizontal scale setting by pressing one menu
56. MENU gt Bandwidth main gt Full 250 MHz or 20 MHz side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 17 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Set External Attenuation TDS 500C and TDS 700C Only To Check the Horizontal Status 3 18 Fine Scale To make fine adjustments to the vertical scale press VERTICAL MENU gt Fine Scale main and use the general purpose knob or the keypad Position To adjust the vertical position to a specific number of divisions press VERTICAL MENU gt Position main and use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the offset value Press Set to 0 divs side if you want to reset the reference point of the selected waveform to the center of the display Offset Use offset to subtract DC bias before examining a waveform For example you might want to display a small ripple for example 100 mV of ripple on a power supply output for example a 15 V output Adjust offset to keep the ripple on screen while setting the vertical scale sensitive enough to best display the ripple To adjust offset press VERTICAL MENU gt Offset main Then use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the vertical offset Press Set to 0 V side if you want to reset the offset to zero Set external attenuation or gain in addition to the attenuation specified by the probe To set external attenuation press VERTICAL MENU gt Probe Func tions main gt External Attenuation or External Attenu
57. MENU gt Deskew main m Then use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the deskew time You can also eliminate any deskew setting by pressing Set to 0 S side Probe Cal The TDS Oscilloscope lets you compensate the probe based on the channel it is connected to to improve the gain and offset accuracy of the probe By executing Probe Cal on a channel with its probe installed you can optimize the oscillo scope capability to make accurate measurements using that channel and probe TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 143 Measuring Waveforms 3 144 Run a Probe Cal anytime you wish to ensure that the measurements you make are made with the most accuracy possible You should also run a Probe Cal if you have changed to a different probe since the last Probe Cal was performed Some Probes Cannot Be Compensated Some types of probes can be gain compensated some can be offset compensated and some can be compensated for both Some probes cannot be compensated at all Note the following restrictions m The oscilloscope cannot compensate probes that have an attenuation factor of greater than 20X If you attempt to compensate such a probe you will get an error message m The oscilloscope cannot compensate probes that have gain and or offset errors that are too great gt 2 gain and or gt 50 mV offset If these errors are within specified limits for your probe you may want to use another probe If they are not w
58. Manual 3 167 Saving Waveforms and Setups Date Time Stamp the Hardcopy You can display the current date and time on screen so that they appear on the hardcopies you print To date and time stamp your hardcopy do the following steps 1 Press DISPLAY gt Settings main gt Display pop up gt Readout Options main gt Display Date and Time side to toggle the setting to On 2 If you want to set the date and time skip steps 3 and 4 and continue with step 1 of Set the Date and Time below Then redo this procedure 3 Press Clear Menu to remove the menu from the display so the date and time can be displayed See Figure 3 78 The date and time are removed from the display when menus are displayed 4 Once the oscilloscope is connected to a hardcopy device press HARDCOPY to print your date time stamped hardcopy Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample wi Zoom sos CAT OW 25 Mar 1994 08 39 47 e L I GRBA SZS Date and Time Display Figure 3 78 Date and Time Display 3 168 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups Set the Date and Time You might need to set the date and time of the oscillo scope To set those parameters do the following steps 1 Press SHIFT gt UTILITY Config pop up gt Set Date amp Time main gt Year Day Month Hour or Minute side 2 Use the general p
59. Math main 2 To define the source waveform press Set Single Source to side repeatedly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform Ke 5 Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample Math Change Math waveform definition No Extended ee Processing Average 2 ch 1o0omy Ooo Math2 DIP ICIC IO Figure 3 90 More Menu 3 Press Set Function to side repeatedly to cycle it to inv invert intg or diff Waveform integration intg is described on page 3 215 and waveform differentiation diff is described on page 3 210 4 To create the math waveform press OK Create Math Wfm side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 189 Using Features for Advanced Applications To Use Dual Wfm Math 3 190 To create a math waveform that requires two waveform sources do the following steps 1 2 Press MORE gt Math Math2 or Math3 main gt Change Math waveform definition side gt Dual Wfm Math main To define the first source waveform press Set 1st Source to side repeated ly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform To define the second source waveform press Set 2nd Source to side repeatedly to cycle it to the desired channel or reference waveform To enter the math operator press Set operator to side repeatedly to cycle it through the choic
60. Run 100kKS 5 Sample amom e pei H LEESE IEI R Saved Current Factory Utilities Setup Setup Setu M 3004S chi F 27 2mv OK Recall Factory Confirm LOIDID COle _ Factory Init ens ew Co EIEE Figure 3 3 The Channel Readout To select a channel use the channel selection buttons on the right of the display These buttons labeled CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 and MORE select a channel and display it if its off The MORE button allows you to select internally stored Math and Ref waveforms for display and manipulation The selected channel is indicated by the lighting the LED above the button of the selected channel TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Do the following steps to first display and then remove waveforms from the display 1 Press CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 or CH 4 to turn on as many of these channels as desired The one you select last or first if you only select one becomes the selected channel Selecting a channel turns it on if it is not already on You do not use the channel selection buttons to select the trigger source Instead you select the trigger source in the Main Trigger menu or Delayed Trigger menu 2 Press WAVEFORM OFF to turn OFF the display of the selected channel waveform It will also remove from the display any automated measurements bei
61. Source chi Mask Display ON Std Mask Autoset Manual Std Mask Offset Adj ON M2 00Ms Chl 48mY Filter Enabled LOJO OC OC O ing OFF aa BO Figure 3 66 Mask menu NOTE If you select Manual some controls are automatically adjusted if you select Auto a complete Autoset is performed To control whether an autoset is performed when a standard mask is selected press MEASURE gt Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Op tions main Then toggle Std Mask Autoset side to Auto or Manual NOTE If you select OFF offset is not adjusted when the DS O E1 E2 E3 or T1 102 standards are selected To control whether a standard mask autoset can adjust Vertical Offset to match the waveform to the mask press MEASURE gt Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Options main Then toggle Std Mask Offset Adj side to ON or OFF TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 137 Measuring Waveforms 3 138 Adjusting Time Base Position Counting Masks Editing a Mask To enable the optical reference receiver option 3C and 4C required by some optical standards that require a Bessel Thompson response press MEA SURE gt Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Options main Then toggle Filter side to Enable To determine the calibration status of t
62. This section contains illustrations or maps of the display the front and rear panels and the menu system of the TDS Oscilloscope These maps will help you understand and operate the oscilloscope This section also contains a visual guide to using the menu system Front Panel Map Left Side Tektronix TDS 684B Samire sie tsiuoscore bese File System page 3 160 Side Menu Buttons page 2 7 H CLEAR MENU o es es fe es C Removes Menus CLEAR from the Display ON STBY Switch Main Menu Buttons page 1 7 page 2 7 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 3 Operating Interface Maps Front Panel Map Right Side Measurement System page 3 114 Cursor Measurements page 3 126 Saving and Recalling Waveforms page 3 154 File System page 3 160 Hardcopy page 3 164 File System page 3 160 Acquisition Modes page 3 29 az SAVE RECALL APPLICATION MENU ACQUIRE MENU oe AUTOSET WAVEFORM MEASURE HARDCOPY RUN STOP SELECT _ STATUS HELP Autoset page 3 8 C_ SETUP UTILITY DISPLAY InstaVu Co Help page 3 181 Status page 3 179 ee Saving and Recalling Setups page 3 151 Selecting Channels page 3 11 SINGLE TRIG FORCE TRIG Waveform Math page 3 188 PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL GND PROBE AT iy
63. To make positioning faster press the SHIFT button When the light above the SHIFT button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the POSITION knob positions waveforms more quickly The POSITION knob simply adds screen divisions to the reference point of the selected waveform Adding divisions moves the waveform up and subtracting them moves the waveform down You also can adjust the waveform position using the offset option in the Vertical menu discussed later in this section r Tek Run sarees Sample Ch Coupling Impedance DC AC Oooo oj Vertical Readout EM 00s Chi z44mV Em Bandwidth Hne Scale position Deskew Prob Full 200RV _somdiv as Figure 3 6 Vertical Readouts and Channel Menu By changing the vertical scale you can focus on a particular portion of a waveform By adjusting the vertical position you can move the waveform up or down on the display Adjustment of vertical position is particularly useful when you are comparing two or more waveforms 3 16 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Change Vertical Parameters DC ACM GND To select the coupling bandwidth and offset for the selected waveform use the Vertical menu Figure 3 6 This menu also lets you numerically change the position or scale instead of using the vertical knobs To make such changes do
64. User Manual Appendix E Probe Selection Use a current probe by clipping its jaws around the wire carrying the current that you want to measure Unlike an ammeter which you must connect in series with the circuit Because current probes are noninvasive with loading typically in the milliohm to low Q range they are especially useful where low loading of the circuit is important Current probes can also make differential measurements by measuring the results of two opposing currents in two conductors in the jaws of the probe Figure D 2 A6303 Current Probe Used in the AM 503S Opt 03 NOTE Attempting to measure more than 40 amperes of total in phase current DC peak AC using three or more current probes installed on the input channels can result in measurement or display errors Optical Probes Optical probes let you blend the functions of an optical power meter with the high speed analog waveform analysis capability of an oscilloscope You have the capability of acquiring displaying and analyzing optical and electrical signals simultaneously TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual D 5 Appendix E Probe Selection D 6 Applications include measuring the transient optical properties of lasers LEDs electro optic modulators and flashlamps You can also use these probes in the development manufacturing and maintenance of fiber optic control networks local area networks LANs fiber based systems ba
65. When you select Line as the trigger source the oscilloscope uses AC coupling to couple a sample of the AC line voltage to the trigger circuits Although trigger coupling can be set to other than AC when in Line the oscilloscope ignores the setting until another source one of Chl through Ch4 is selected In similar fashion when you select DC Aux Rear Panel as the trigger source the oscilloscope uses DC coupling to couple an auxiliary signal to the trigger circuits Although trigger coupling can be set to other than DC when in DC Aux the oscilloscope ignores the setting until one of Ch1 through Ch4 is selected TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms To Set Mode amp Holdoff You can change the holdoff time and select the trigger mode using this menu item See Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff beginning on page 3 65 for a description of these features To set mode and holdoff do the following steps 1 Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Mode amp Holdoff main gt Auto or Normal side The modes operate as follows m In Auto mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform after a specific time has elapsed even if a trigger does not occur The amount of time the oscilloscope waits depends on the time base setting m In Normal mode the oscilloscope acquires a waveform only if there is a valid trigger 2 To change the holdoff time press Holdoff side Enter the value in time using the general purpo
66. You can stack GPIB connectors on top of each other See Figure 3 82 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 175 Saving Waveforms and Setups Figure 3 82 Stacking GPIB Connectors To Set Up for Remote To set up remote communications be sure your setup will meet GPIB protocol Operation and interface requirements just described Then do the following procedures Connect the Oscilloscope to the GPIB To connect the oscilloscope plug an IEEE Std 488 2 1987 GPIB cable into the GPIB connector on the oscilloscope rear panel and into the GPIB port on your controller See Figure 3 83 Controller Digitizing Oscilloscope Rear P anel 1 M E E Eg o o OCOO i A GPIB Connector Figure 3 83 Connecting the Oscilloscope to a Controller Select GPIB Port To select the GPIB port press SHIFT gt UTILITY gt System main gt I O pop up gt Port main gt GPIB pop up 3 176 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups Configure the GPIB Port You must set two important GPIB parameters mode and address To set those parameters Press SHIFT gt UTILITY gt System main gt I O pop up gt Port main gt GPIB pop up gt Configure main gt Talk Listen Address Hardcopy Talk Only or Off Bus side See Figure 3 84 Talk Listen Address con
67. an average of multiple acquisitions To turn off math averaging for the selected math waveform press No Extended Processing side Any math operations you select for the waveform are performed on only one acquisition The Advanced DSP Math capabilities of the TDS Oscilloscope include taking the Fast Fourier Transform FFT of a waveform This section describes FFTs and how to set up the oscilloscope to display and measure FFTs The FFT allows you to transform a waveform from a display of its amplitude against time to one that plots the amplitudes of the various discrete frequencies the waveform contains Further you can also display the phase shifts of those frequencies Use FFT math waveforms in the following applications Testing impulse response of filters and systems Measuring harmonic content and distortion in systems Characterizing the frequency content of DC power supplies Analyzing vibration Analyzing harmonics in 50 and 60 cycle lines Identifying noise sources in digital logic circuits TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 191 Using Features for Advanced Applications The FFT computes and displays the frequency content of a waveform you acquire as an FFT math waveform This frequency domain waveform is based on the following equation N S7 _j2nnk 1 N X k 7 x n e for k 0 toN 1 PTS 2 Where x n is a point in the time domain record data array X k is a point in the frequency domain record da
68. any source other than Auxiliary from the side menu according to your application TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms F Pretrigger Record Posttrigger Record Delayed Runs After Main Main Triger Point lt lt Delayed Trigger Waveform Record gt Main Trigger Source a a ES From Horiz Menu Start Posttrigger Acquisition Delayed Triggerable By Events Main Trigger Point k alk Trigger Waveform Record Main j Trigger Source Delayed N N N N N N N Trigger Source N PS ae ers Start P osttrigger Acquisition Trigger Waiting for nth Event on nth Delayed Trigger Event Where n 5 Delayed Triggerable By Time k pa Trigger Waveform Record gt Main Trigger Point Main Trigger l Source Delayed Trigger Source ee re a Start P osttrigger Acquisition ying First Trigger After Delay Delayed Triggerable By Events Time Main Trigger Point k elis Trigger Waveform Record gt Main Trigger Source l Trigger Source a a Waiting for nth Event H Time Delay Start Posttrigger Acquisition Where n 4 From Delay Trig Menu Figure 3 52 How the Delayed Triggers Work TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 109 Triggering on Waveforms 3 110 4 If Type is set to Pulse press Class main and change it to either Glitch or Width as fits
69. button Zoom is also handy if you have acquired a waveform at the fastest time per division and want to further expand the waveform horizontally TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 49 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Using with Waveforms Interpolation and Zoom Checking the Zoom Factor 3 50 To help you use zoom effectively consider how it operates on waveforms When zooming vertically the oscilloscope expands or contracts the selected waveform only Also the oscilloscope only positions the selected waveform when in Zoom When zooming horizontally Zoom expands either the selected waveform all live waveforms or all live and reference waveforms depending on the setting for Horizontal Lock in the Zoom menu When zooming horizontally or vertically Zoom expands or contracts the waveform by the zoom factor To help you use Zoom effectively consider how it is affected by interpolation When you zoom on a waveform you expand a portion of it If the expansion requires the oscilloscope to show more points for that portion than it has acquired it interpolates The method the oscilloscope uses to interpolate linear or sin x x can affect the way Zoom displays your waveform If you selected sin x x the default it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot to the waveform edges If such is the case change the interpolation method to linear following the instructions on page 3 52 To read about the two
70. by turning zoom mode on and changing the time division until the waveform fits the screen To turn off this feature toggle Fit to Screen to OFF Horizontal Scale To change the horizontal scale time per division numerically in the menu instead of using the Horizontal SCALE knob Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Horiz Scale main gt Main Scale or Delayed Scale side and use the keypad or the general purpose knob to change the scale values Horizontal Position To set the horizontal position to specific values in the menu instead of using the Horizontal POSITION knob Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Horiz Pos main gt Set to 10 Set to 50 or Set to 90 side to choose how much of the waveform will be displayed to the left of the display center You can also control whether changing the horizontal position setting affects all displayed waveforms just the live waveforms or only the selected waveform See Zoom a Waveform on page 3 51 for the steps to set the horizontal lock feature To Select the You also can select Delayed Runs After Main or Delayed Triggerable Use the Delayed Time Base main time base for most applications Use the delayed time base when you want to delay an acquisition so it captures and displays events that follow other events See To Find More Information below Extended Acquisition Use Extended Acquisition mode to acquire an extended length acquisition Length Option 2M Only record After the data is acquired yo
71. comes configured for installation in a 19 inch wide instrument rack For later field conversions order kit 016 1136 00 2C Communication Signal Oscilloscope comes configured for communications signal triggering and mask testing Analyzer Option applies to TDS 500C amp TDS 700C only 3C P6701B with system Oscilloscope comes with a P6701B and calibrated short wavelength optical reference calibration receiver on channel 1 Option applies to TDS 500C amp TDS 700C only 4C P6703B with system Oscilloscope comes with a P6703B and calibrated long wavelength optical reference calibration receiver on channel 1 Option applies to TDS 500C amp TDS 700C only 22 Two passive probes Add two 500 MHz P6139A passive probes Option applies only to TDS 520C and TDS 724C models 23 Four active probes Add four 1 GHz P6243 active probes Option applies only to TDS 540C and TDS 754C models 24 Four passive probes Add four 500 MHz P6139A passive probes Option applies only to TDS 600B and TDS 784C models 26 Four active probes Add four 1 5 GHz probe only P6245 active probes Option applies only to TDS 684B and TDS 784C models 27 Two active probes Add two 1 5 GHz probe only P6245 active probes Option applies only to TDS 680B A 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix A Options and Accessories Table A 1 Options cont Option Label Description 2D Two probes Delete two standard probes normally shipped with the osci
72. coupling Slope Level ode Type k amp ep apes cal BC f 24asmv kor LOJO CIC JO es a es ee Figure 3 39 Main Trigger Menu Edge Type TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 73 Triggering on Waveforms To Select a Source To Specify Coupling DC ACM gt 3 74 To select which source you want for the trigger Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 AC Line or DC Aux side To select the coupling you want press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Coupling main gt DC AC HF Rej LF Rej or Noise Rej side DC passes all of the input signal In other words it passes both AC and DC components to the trigger circuit AC passes only the alternating components of an input signal It removes the DC component from the trigger signal HF Rej removes the high frequency portion of the triggering signal That allows only the low frequency components to pass on to the triggering system to start an acquisition High frequency rejection attenuates signals above 30 kHz LF Rej removes the low frequency portion of the triggering signal Low frequency rejection attenuates signals below 80 kHz Noise Rej provides lower sensitivity Noise Rej requires additional signal amplitude for stable triggering reducing the chance of falsely triggering on noise NOTE
73. determining the 0 and 100 levels This method works well when measuring square waves and pulse waveforms The oscilloscope calculates the histogram based High and Low values as follows 1 It makes a histogram of the record with one bin for each digitizing level 256 total 2 It splits the histogram into two sections at the halfway point between Min and Max also called Mid 3 The level with the most points in the upper histogram is the High value and the level with the most points in the lower histogram is the Low value Choose the levels where the histograms peak for High and Low If Mid gives the largest peak value within the upper or lower histogram then return the Mid value for both High and Low this is probably a very low amplitude waveform If more than one histogram level bin has the maximum value choose the bin farthest from Mid This algorithm does not work well for two level waveforms with greater than about 100 overshoot The user sets the various reference levels through the Reference Level selection of the Measure menu They include HighRef the waveform high reference level Used in fall time and rise time calculations Typically set to 90 You can set it from 0 to 100 or to a voltage level MidRef the waveform middle reference level Typically set to 50 You can set it from 0 to 100 or to a voltage level TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms
74. eee eee nee 2 13 Example 2 Displaying Multiple Waveforms 0000ee ee eee 2 17 Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements 0 eee eeee 2 22 Example 4 Saving Setups 0 0 cee cece ect eens 2 28 Reference OVERVIOW 2 teas en gS dees Ce eS SSUES cee is elie eG Be eee 3 1 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms eeeeeeeeee 3 5 Coupling Waveforms to the Oscilloscope 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 5 Setting up Automatically Autoset and Reset 0 00 00 e ee eee eee 3 8 Selecting Chanmels 22 csc ci ee eee eee bbe de eee ceed ees 3 11 Scaling and Positioning Waveforms 00 cece cece eee eee 3 14 Choosing an Acquisition Mode 0 0 cee cece cee ene 3 25 Customizing the Display 2 0 ccc cnet enna 3 38 Customizing the Display Color 0 0 cee eee ce een eee 3 44 Zooming on Waveforms ccc cece teen ene eee 3 49 Using InstaVuT Acquisition Mode 0 cece cee een eee 3 55 Using FastFrame oo cic eee odoin de le eee ee ee bee eben ees 3 59 Triggering on Waveforms cece cece cece cere eee eees 3 63 Triggering Concepts 0 cece eect tent ee eens 3 63 Triggering from the Front Panel 0 cece eee cee eee eee 3 68 Triggering on a Waveform Edge 00 e eee een eee 3 72 Triggering Based on Logic 00 unaenea 3 76 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual i Table of Contents
75. example if you count five major horizontal graticule divisions for one waveform cycle at a horizontal scale factor of 50 uS division then you can easily calculate the waveform period as 5 divisions x 50 wS division 250 us or 4 kHz Displaying Histograms TDS 500C and TDS 700C Only Vertical histogram gt Start Histogram Counting The TDS Oscilloscope can display histograms constructed from the selected trace waveform data You can display either a vertical or horizontal histogram You can display only one type of histogram at a time See Figure 3 65 7 Tek Run 100kS s Sample owen ee a J Histogram Options Histogram Source Ch Histogram ode Vertical Histogram Display Ne i Linear Histogram Size 7 00 divs Measure ppg 8 6 eee ee Mi Soois RILA Emy dieu Masks r Counting OIIO Histogram Remove Measure Measrmnt Measrmnt Histogram 3 es ms me eu es Gu aun Figure 3 65 Histogram Menu and Vertical Histogram To start histogram counting press MEASURE gt Histogram pop up gt Histogram Options main gt Histogram Mode side gt Off Vertical or Horizontal side Off turns off histogram counting and display TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 133 Measuring Waveforms Reset Histogra
76. help mode Press the SHIFT button before pressing front panel buttons that display help screens for shifted menus The shifted menus are the Acquire menu Application menu Hardcopy menu Delayed Trigger menu Status menu and Utility menu With Help off press S FF lighted when on before turning the general purpose horizontal position or vertical position knobs when you want increased knob response Less knob rotation will produce greater changes in settings with Help off press SHIFT after pressing any menu button that toggles through multiple settings such as those for pop up menus Pressing SHiF7 reverses the direction in which the pop up menu or button label toggles through the menu or parameter settings CIC C C O ai ooma M 500s Chi OV 24 Jul 1995 14 01 31 JOC O C OC Figure 3 87 Initial Help Screen When you press that button the instrument changes mode to support on line help Press HELP again to return to regular operating mode Whenever the oscilloscope is in help mode pressing any button except HELP or SHIFT turning any knob or pressing any menu item displays help text on the screen that discusses that control The menu selections that were displayed when HELP was first pressed remain on the screen On line help is available for each menu selection displayed at the time the HELP button was first pressed If you are in help mode and
77. lt Violation Zone T IH s nee at Clock Level Clock Signal Positive Tc Negative T4 Negative Ts Positive Ty t amp gt Figure 3 40 Violation Zones for Setup Hold Triggering 3 80 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Ch 1 2 3 Inputs High Don t Care Don t Care Ch 4 Input Rising Edge Trigger Class State Logic OR Pulse om X T af T on S00us 2 state Hixxy z Comm Define Inputs ode amp Holdoff Trigger Class when lt State gt Goes TRUE Type lt Lagic gt Figure 3 41 Logic Trigger Readouts State Class Selected NOTE When the trigger type Logic is selected the trigger levels must be set for each channel individually in the Set Thresholds menu pattern and state classes or the Levels setup hold class menu Therefore the Trigger Level readout will disappear on the display and the Trigger Level knob can be used to set the selected level while the Main Trigger menu is set to Logic To Trigger ona Pattern When you select the logic class Pattern the oscilloscope will trigger on a specified logic combination of the four input channels Pages 3 76 through 3 78 describe how pattern triggers work To use pattern triggering do the procedures that follow Select Pattern Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop u
78. measurement The value High Low Extinction Extinction dB Mean dBm Measurement Readouts 3 116 Optical measurement The value 100 Extinction R atio Optical measurement The value 10 log10 E xtinction R atio Optical measurement Average optical power 10 log10 Mean 0 001 With no menus displayed the measurement readouts appear far right of the display graticule See Figure 3 55 You can display and continuously update as many as four measurements at any one time With any menu displayed the readouts move to the right side of the graticule area Measurement 1 is the top readout Measurement 2 is below it and so forth Once a measurement readout is displayed in the screen area it stays in its position even when you remove any measurement readouts above it TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Measurement Readout Area Tek Run 250kKS 5 Sample C1 Period 1 0036 Min 996 045 T Max 1 004ms c1 width 503 6us Min 495 645 Display Measurements Max 504 448 cl Duty 49 8 Min 49 6 Max 50 4 LOJO CJC JO i om ae oops cht FTsmv 4 pec 1996 15 52 25 Kens es oe oe oaoa Figure 3 55 Measurement Readouts with Statistics To use the automatic measurements you first need to obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured Pressing AUTOSET may help Once you have a
79. new task and need to start fresh with known default settings 1 Press the save recall SETUP button to display the Setup menu See Figure 2 2 2 10 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial SAVE RECALL AUTOSET WAVEFORM STATUS APPLICATION MENU ACQUIRE MENU MEASURE CHARDCOPY RUN STOP e Ga Mie UTILITY al CURSOR DISPLAY SETUP SETUP Buton See Ds e Ck ES A VERTICAL a A HORIZONTAL Figure 2 2 SETUP Button Location The oscilloscope displays main menus along the bottom of the screen Figure 2 3 shows the Setup main menu OK Confirm Factory Init Menu Item and Button Recall Factory Setup Menu Item and Button Figure 2 3 The Setup Menu 2 Press the button directly below the Recall Factory Setup menu item The display shows side menus along the right side of the screen The buttons to select these side menu items are to the right of the side menu Because an accidental instrument reset could destroy a setup that took a long time to create the oscilloscope asks you to verify the Recall Factory Setup selection See Figure 2 3 3 Press the button to the right of the OK Confirm Factory Init side menu item TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial NOTE This manual uses the following notation to represent the sequence of selections you made in steps 1 2 and 3 Pr
80. occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse that is inside or optionally outside some specified time range defined by the upper limit and lower limit The oscilloscope can trigger on positive or negative width pulses A slew rate trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse edge that traverses slews between two amplitude levels at a rate faster than or slower than you specify The oscilloscope can trigger on positive or negative slew rates You can also think of slew rate triggering as triggering based on the slope change in voltage change in time of a pulse edge A timeout trigger occurs when the trigger source does not detect a pulse edge when it expected to Figure 3 45 shows the pulse trigger readout Table 3 7 on page 3 90 describes the choices for pulse triggers TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 89 Triggering on Waveforms 3 90 Trigger Class Runt J Set to ECL A Glitch fam i width oi So ons R ni chi Slew Rate Timeout i i i Mode hresholds amp Occurs Holdoff D ae Cae ES Game Cae Cc orc Source Polarity chi Positive Class lt Runt gt Figure 3 45 Pulse Trigger Readouts Table 3 7 Pulse trigger definitions Name Definition i_ Glitch positive Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects positive spike widths less than the specif
81. of automated 3 114 3 135 3 150 Snapshot of 3 123 Measuring Waveforms 3 113 Median 3 135 Memory Waveform 3 157 Menu Acquire 3 33 3 184 Color 3 44 Cursor 3 129 Delayed Trigger 3 108 3 112 Display 3 39 3 44 File Utilities 3 160 Horizontal 3 68 3 108 Main 2 6 Main Trigger 3 72 3 73 3 81 3 85 3 86 3 91 3 93 3 97 Index 9 Index Measure 3 117 3 124 More 3 158 3 189 3 193 3 211 Operation 2 7 Pop up 2 8 Glossary 9 Save Recall 3 152 Save Recall Acquisition 3 156 3 159 Save Recall Waveform 3 155 Setup 2 10 3 11 Status 3 179 Utility 3 166 Mid Ref Measure menu 3 121 Mid Ref Measure menu 3 121 Min Max Measure menu 3 120 Minimum 3 115 Glossary 8 Mode amp Holdoff Main Trigger menu 3 75 Model number location 2 3 Models Manual references to xiv Models key features and differences 1 2 Monochrome Color menu 3 45 MORE button 3 12 3 158 3 186 3 189 More menu 3 158 3 189 3 211 Average 3 191 Blackman Harris 3 195 Change Math waveform definition 3 193 3 211 3 216 dBV RMS 3 194 diff 3 211 Dual Wfm Math 3 190 FFT 3 193 Hamming 3 195 Hanning 3 195 intg 3 216 Linear RMS 3 194 Math1 Math2 Math3 3 193 3 211 3 216 Math1 2 3 3 191 No Process 3 191 OK Create Math Waveform 3 189 3 216 Phase deg 3 194 Phase rad 3 194 Rectangular 3 195 Reference waveform status 3 158 Set 1st Source to
82. or frame count in size such that the product will fit the record length Press Horiz Pos main then Frame side and use the general purpose knob to enter the number of a specific frame to view After you press Enter that frame should appear on the display TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms If you shift the waveform right or left with the front panel HORIZONTAL POSITION knob the window next to the side menu Frame button will indicate the frame number of the waveform at the center of the screen FastFrame Operating Characteristics Consider the following operating character istics when using FastFrame Envelope Average and Hi Res form the envelope or average following the last frame of the concatenated record For example if Average or Hi Res acquisition modes are selected and the frame count is 10 segments 1 through 10 will show Sample or Hi Res frames and frame 11 will show the average of frames 1 through 10 If there is not room for one additional frame the envelope or average of the frames replaces the display of the last acquired frame Average and envelope counts have no affect in FastFrame You can press RUN STOP to terminate a FastFrame sequence If any frames were acquired they are displayed If no frames were acquired the previous FastFrame waveform is displayed Because FastFrame waveforms contain many triggers trigger position indicators are removed from both t
83. page 3 194 for more information Tek Run 50 0MS s Sample R O E E E e LENS M i 00us Chi 1 34 V Math 10 0 dB 2 50MHz II 1C 1 G Figure 3 95 Cursor Measurement of an FFT Waveform 6 Press V Bars side Use the general purpose knob to align one of the two vertical cursors to a point of interest along the horizontal axis of the waveform 7 Press SELECT to select the alternate cursor 8 Align the selected cursor to another point of interest on the math waveform TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 197 Using Features for Advanced Applications To Take Automated Measurements of an FFT The FFT Frequency Domain Record 3 198 9 Read the frequency difference between the cursors from the A readout Read the frequency of the selected cursor relative to the zero frequency point from the readout The cursor units will always be in Hz regardless of the setting in the Time Units side menu The first point of the FFT record is the zero frequency point for the readout 10 Press Function main gt Paired side 11 Use the technique just outlined to place the vertical bar of each paired cursor to the points along the horizontal axis you are interested in 12 Read the amplitude between the X of the two paired cursors from the top most A readout Read the amplitude of the short horizontal bar of
84. pop up gt Class main gt State pop up gt Define Inputs main 2 Choose either High H Low L or Don t Care X side for the first three channels The choices for Ch4 are rising edge and falling edge Set Thresholds To set the logic threshold for each channel 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt State pop up gt Set Thresholds main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side 2 Use the MAIN TRIGGER LEVEL knob the general purpose knob or the keypad to set each threshold Define Logic To choose the type of logic function you want applied to the input channels Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt State pop up gt Define Logic main gt AND OR NAND or NOR side Set Trigger When To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met Goes TRUE or when the logic condition is not met Goes FALSE Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt State pop up gt Trigger When main gt Goes TRUE or Goes FALSE side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 85 Triggering on Waveforms To Set Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to To Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see the descriptions Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 To Trigger o
85. proper type and rating see Figure 1 1 You can use either of two fuses Each fuse requires its own cap see Table 1 2 The oscilloscope is shipped with the UL approved fuse installed 4 Check that you have the proper electrical connections The oscilloscope requires 90 to 250 VACRrms continuous range 45 Hz to 440 Hz and may require up to 300 W TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Start Up Power Connector Principal Power Switch ogo Fuse Figure 1 1 Rear Panel Controls Used in Start Up 5 Connect the proper power cord from the rear panel power connector see Figure 1 1 to the power system Table 1 2 Fuse and fuse cap part numbers Fuse 0 25 inch x 1 25 inch UL 198 6 3AG 6 A FAST 250 V 5mm x 20 mm IEC 127 5 A T 250 V Fuse part number 159 0013 00 159 0210 00 Fuse cap part number 200 2264 00 200 2265 00 Front Cover Removal To remove the front cover grasp the left and right edges and snap the cover off of the front subpanel To reinstall the cover align it to the front subpanel and snap it back on Power On To power on the oscilloscope do the following steps 1 Check that the rear panel principal power switch is on see Figure 1 1 The principal power switch controls all AC power to the instrument 2 Ifthe
86. pulses regardless of width 3 Press Runt is Wider Than side to trigger only on runt pulses that exceed the width you set Enter the width using the general purpose knob or keypad Set the Thresholds To set the two threshold levels used in detecting a runt pulse 1 Press TRIGGER MENU Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Runt pop up gt Thresholds main 2 Use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the values for the high and low thresholds Hint To use the Trigger Bar feature to set the threshold levels on the pulse train press DISPLAY Readout Options main gt Trigger Bar Style side until Long appears in that menu item 3 94 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Tek Run euaaar Sample Runt High Threshold 3 00 V Pulse Runt Thresholds Selected trigger bar at upper threshold Unselected trigger bar at lower tes ofa eq E CEE oe peg Gee Lac A 4 threshold ales l o Set to TTL Runt Pulse Crosses First Threshold a d A Set to ECL Only Recrosses First Threshold Glitch Level and Triggers Acquisition ae ich ie M 50 0ns Runt Chi Slew Rate Timeout ORE Hoy rier iE _ hype Class source Polarity When hresholds amp lt Pulse gt lt Runt gt Occurs Holdoff Kea e oe e ee ee Figure 3 47 Main Trigger Menu
87. region Low The value used as 0 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method it is the minimum value found With the histogram method it refers to the most common value found below the midpoint Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Maximum Mean Minimum Negative Duty Cycle Negative Overshoot Negative Width Peak to Peak Voltage measurement The maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Negative Width Period Voltage measurement Measured over the entire waveform or gated region NegativeDutyCycle x 100 Low Min x 100 NegativeOvershoot Amplitude Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region The distance time between MidR ef default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse Voltage measurement The absolute difference between the maxi
88. related to the use or service of the oscilloscope m The TDS Family Digitizing Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual diskette is included with the user manual describes using a computer to control the oscilloscope through the GPIB interface m The TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Reference gives you a quick overview of how to operate the oscilloscope m The TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Technical Reference Performance Verification and Specifications tells how to verify the performance of the oscilloscope and lists its specifications m The TDS Family Option 05 Video Trigger Instruction Manual describes use of the video trigger option for TDS oscilloscopes equipped with that option only m The TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Service Manual provides informa tion for maintaining and servicing the oscilloscope to the module level TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual xi Preface Default Model Model References Conventions xii This manual documents the TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Digitizing Oscilloscopes Take special note of the following conventions Some TDS models have two auxiliary channels called AUX 1 and AUX 2 instead of CH 3 and CH 4 References to these channels default to CH 3 and CH 4 if your oscilloscope is one of these models read AUX 1 and AUX 2 respectively for all references to CH 3 and CH 4 in this manual The TDS 684B display screen appears as the default screen wherever a di
89. sample length RealTime m Al l ee FastFrame oo Eons e Figure 3 30 Fast Frame TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 59 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 3 60 If you are using the FastFrame mode you can jump to the desired frame To use FastFrame do the following steps 1 Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt FastFrame Setup main gt FastFrame side to toggle on or off the use of FastFrame see Figure 3 31 7 Tek Run 50 0MS s Sampie REI Frame Length 100 E FastFrame Setup FastFrame a ON Frame erin h sheni 4 Frame count 3 Joomvayy Tomi dous chis 4oamv PeaOn Time Base trigger Ri H Horie PR Exa Acq i Position main 50 508 div cia SetuP LOlOJClC O IPI IC lO O O Figure 3 31 Horizontal Menu FastFrame Setup Press Frame Length or Frame Count side and use the general purpose knob to enter FastFrame parameters Frame Length refers to the number of samples in each acquisition Frame count refers to the number of acquisitions to store in the acquisition memory of the channel The oscilloscope will set the record length to a value greater than or equal to the product of the frame count and the frame length If the product exceeds the maximum available record length the oscilloscope will reduce the frame length
90. sampled and digitized points are stored in memory along with corresponding timing information You can use this digital representation of the signal for display measurements or further processing cn on 5 0 V 5 0 V YY ao a ae or 5 0 V 5 0 V Input Signal Sampled Points Digital Values Figure 3 11 Acquisition Input Analog Signal Sample and Digitize TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 25 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms The oscilloscope uses the samples it takes see Figure 3 13 to create a waveform record containing a user specified number of data or record points Each record point represents a certain voltage level that occurs a determined amount of time from the trigger event The oscilloscope may take more samples than the number of points in your waveform record In fact the oscilloscope may take several samples for each record point see Figure 3 12 The digitizer can use any extra samples to perform additional processing such as averaging or looking for minimum and maximum values The methods of sampling and acquisition modes you choose determine how the oscilloscope assembles the sample points it acquires into the waveform record lt Interval for one waveform record point Samples for a record point Figure 3 12 Several Points May be Acquired for Each Point Used Real time Sampling The two general methods of sampling are real time and equivalent ti
91. selection for Horizontal Lock in the side menu Zoom affects the displayed waveforms as follows None only the waveform currently selected can be magnified and positioned horizontally Figure 3 25 Live all live as opposed to reference waveforms can be magnified and positioned horizontally at the same time If a reference or math waveform is selected and Horizontal Lock set to Live only the selected reference or math waveform is magnified and positioned All all waveforms displayed live math and reference can be magnified and positioned horizontally at the same time 5 Press ZOOM gt Lock main gt All Live or None side NOTE Although Zoom must be turned on to control which waveforms Zoom affects the setting for Horizontal Lock affects which waveforms the horizontal control positions whether Zoom is on or off The rules for the three settings are listed in step 4 on page 3 51 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 51 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Only the selected waveform the top one changes size Set Interpolation Reset Zoom Using Dual Window Mode 3 52 Tek Run 100kS s Sample Chi zoom 1 0X Vert 2 0XHorz 0 00 Horizontal i Lock All Live None 2oomv SM 250s Chi 264mv ied ety Aa aa aa Mode None Graticule Reset Upper ceeieseelS Figure 3 2
92. set explicitly in the units of the selected waveform typically volts See Figure 3 58 Use the general purpose knob or keypad to enter the values is the default selection It is useful for general purpose applications Units helps you set precise values For example if your are measuring specifications on an RS 232 C circuit set the levels precisely to RS 232 C specification voltage values by defining the high and low references in units Tek Run ta Sample Min Max all other waveforms Set Levels in E units 200mV M 500ps Chis 336mv PS L 2 i zi o ii iy eager fen vi ee a a ee Remove Gating Statistics Eta Measure Measrmnt io Snapshot lt Measure gt for Chl Measrmnt OFF OFF Histogram 11 1 19 1 Figure 3 58 Measure Menu Reference Levels 3 Press High Ref Mid Ref Low Ref or Mid2 Ref side High Ref Sets the high reference level The default is 90 Mid Ref Sets the middle reference level The default is 50 Low Ref Sets the low reference level The default is 10 mA Mid2 Ref Sets the middle reference level used on the second waveform specified in the Delay or Phase Measurements The default is 50 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 121 Measuring Waveforms Take a Delay The delay measurement lets you measure from an edge on the selected waveform Mea
93. side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 153 Saving Waveforms and Setups Executing Tek Secure accomplishes the following tasks m Replaces all waveforms in reference memories with zero sample values m Replaces the current front panel setup and all setups stored in setup memory with the factory setup m Calculates the checksums of all waveform memory and setup memory locations to verify successful completion of setup and waveform erasure m If the checksum calculation is unsuccessful displays a warning message if the checksum calculation is successful displays a confirmation message To Run the File Utilities To run file utilities see the Managing the File System on page 3 160 To Find More Information See Example 4 Saving Setups on page 2 28 Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions TDS Oscilloscope provides four internal reference memories in any of which you can store a waveform Waveforms thus stored are retained even when you turn the oscilloscope off or unplug it The oscilloscope also can save waveforms and with Option 2M extended record length acquisitions to disk This section describes how to save delete and display reference waveforms and acquisitions The oscilloscope can display up to 11 waveforms at one time That includes waveforms from the four input channels four reference waveforms and three math waveforms You can save any combination of different size waveform records You
94. steps that you perform to accomplish the task that the topic defines You should read Conventions on page xii of Preface before reading about these tasks Each topic just listed comprises more basic operation tasks and topics A list of these tasks follows TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 1 Overview Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Triggering on Waveforms Measuring Waveforms Saving Waveforms and Setups Coupling Waveforms to the Oscilloscope 00 000 3 5 Setting up Automatically Autoset and Reset 0 0 3 8 Selecting Channels is 0c cine donee dl wel eh eae neta ara 3 11 Scaling and Positioning Waveforms 0 0 cece eee eee 3 14 Choosing an Acquisition Mode 0 0c eee eee eee 3 25 Customizing the Display 0 0 cece cee ee eee 3 38 Customizing the Display Color 0 0 cece eee eee eee 3 44 Zooming on Waveforms 0 ce cee eee eee eee tees 3 49 Using InstaVu Acquisition Mode 2 ce eee eee ee eee 3 55 Using FastFrame 2 0 0 eee e ences 3 59 Triggering Concepts 0 0 cee Kerei pa ee eee ene 3 63 Triggering from the Front Panel 0 0 0 0s eee eee eee 3 68 Triggering on a Waveform Edge 0 0 cee eee ee eee 3 72 Triggering Based on Logic 0 0 eee eee eee 3 76 Triggering on Pulses occ es ee be eee ereti be eee ite 3 89 Communications Triggering
95. testing you must do four tasks m Create the limit test template from a waveform m Specify the channel to compare to the template m Specify the action to take if incoming waveform data exceeds the set limits Turn limit testing on so that the parameters you have specified will take effect TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 183 Using Features for Advanced Applications Figure 3 88 Comparing a Waveform to a Limit Template To do the tasks just listed do the following procedures To Create Limit Test To use an incoming or stored waveform to create the limit test template first you Template select a source and specify a template destination Then you create the template envelope by specifying the amount of variation from template you will tolerate To do these tasks perform the following steps 1 Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU to bring up the Acquire menu 2 Press Create Limit Test Template main gt Template Source side gt Ch1 Ch2 Math1 Math2 Math3 Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 side See Figure 3 89 NOTE The template will be smoother if you acquire the template waveform using Average acquisition mode If you are unsure how to select Average see Selecting an Acquisition Mode on page 3 33 3 Once you have selected a source select a destination for the template press Template Destination side gt Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 3 184 TDS 500C T
96. that window with the least Blackman Harris until the frequencies merge Use the window just before the window that lets the frequencies merge for best compro mise between resolution and amplitude accuracy NOTE If the Hanning window merges the frequencies try the Hamming window before settling on the rectangular window Depending on the distance of the frequencies you are trying to measure from the fundamental the Hamming window sometimes resolves frequencies better than the Hanning Window Characteristics When evaluating a window for use you may want to examine how it modifies the FFT time domain data Figure 3 100 shows each window its bandpass characteristic bandwidth and highest side lobe Consider the following characteristics m The narrower the central lobe for a given window the better it can resolve a frequency m The lower the lobes on the side of each central lobe are the better the amplitude accuracy of the frequency measured in the FFT using that window m Narrow lobes increase frequency resolution because they are more selective Lower side lobe amplitudes increase accuracy because they reduce leakage 3 208 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Leakage results when the time domain waveform delivered to the FFT function contains a non integer number of waveform cycles Since there are fractions of cycles in such records there are discontinuities at th
97. the selected solid cursor relative to either 1 Vrms 0 dB ground 0 volts or zero phase level 0 degrees or 0 radians from the readout Read the frequency between the long horizontal bars of both paired cursors from the bottom A readout You can use automated measurements to measure FFT math waveforms Use the procedure To Take Automated Measurements found in Waveform Differentiation on page 3 212 There are several characteristics of FFTs that affect how they are displayed and should be interpreted Read this topic to learn about the FFT frequency domain record how the source waveform relates to the record length frequency resolution and frequency range of that record The FFT frequency domain waveform is the FFT math waveform that you display Continue reading the topics that follow to learn how to optimize the oscilloscope setup for good display of your FFT waveforms FFTs May Not Use All of the Waveform Record The FFT math waveform is a display of the magnitude or phase data from the FFT frequency domain record This frequency domain record is derived from the FFT time domain record which is derived from the waveform record All three records are described below TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Waveform Record the complete waveform record acquired from an input channel and displayed from the same channel or a reference memory The length of this time dom
98. the time spanned by the acquisition data m Waveform Record Start displays selects the percentage of the acquisition data that is before the waveform record of the selected channel and any locked live channels m Fit To Screen duplicates the function of Fit To Screen in the Record Length menu To set the starting position of the waveform record in the acquisition data press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Extd Acq Setup main gt Waveform Record Start side Then use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the percentage To view all acquisition data use the Horizontal Position to pan the waveform record through the acquisition record Or use Zoom or Fit To Screen to compress the acquisition data into the waveform record M Extd Acq Setup Extended Acquisition 4 ON Acq Lengthy _ wfm Length any 500k M2 00ms Chi i ch oov egger Record Hone 7 Timepase position Length Scale lowe 90 500 div WwavetfoP Record Start fm Record Start 85 33001 A im Wes coe eee aon OAA 40m Fit to Screen E ON x FastFrame Sa Setup Pup eam e gt lt D Figure 3 10 Extended Acquisition Length a 3 24 nd Zoom Percentage of w acquisition data before ee start of the waveform OWS record End of waveform record
99. the waveform 8 Press SELECT to select the alternate cursor 9 Align the alternate cursor to another point of interest on the math waveform 10 Read the time difference between the cursors from the A readout Read the time difference between the selected cursor and the trigger point for the source waveform from the readout 11 Press Function main gt Paired side 12 Use the technique just outlined to place the long vertical bar of each paired cursor to the points along the horizontal axis you are interested in 3 218 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications 13 Read the following values from the cursor readouts m Read the integrated voltage over time between the Xs of both paired cursors in volt seconds from the A readout m Read the integrated voltage over time between the X of the selected cursor and the reference indicator of the math waveform from the readout m Read the time difference between the long vertical bars of the paired cursors from the A readout To Take Automated You can also use automated measurements to measure integral math waveforms Measurements Use the same procedure as is found under To Take Automated Measurements on page 3 212 When using that procedure note that your measurements on an integral waveform will be in volt seconds rather than in volts per second as is indicated for the differential waveform measured in the procedure Of
100. to include only the waveform portion within the box 3 To scale or position the magnified waveform press Selected Grati cule main gt Upper side Use the vertical and horizontal knobs to scale and position the magnified waveform Note that as you scale or move the magnified waveform the oscilloscope scales or moves the box relative to the unmagnified waveform so the box encloses only the waveform portion magnified in the upper graticule In Dual Window Zoom mode the oscilloscope does not display the zoom magnification factors however it does display the scale factors volts divi sion and time division for the zoomed waveform Tek Run LRG Sample Zoomed Magnified Waveforms N mg eede pea e 5o omv Nonzoomed Waveforms with Box Indicators at Corners Denoting am Toom Dz Offset the Selected Graticule 2 500mS Oooo oj eTecte Graticule tower as os os os os os oe Figure 3 26 Dual Window Preview Mode TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 53 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Dual Zoom a Waveform To Set Dual Zoom Offset 3 54 To select Dual Zoom press ZOOM Mode main gt Dual Zoom side to toggle it to ON See Figure 3 27 Dual zoom displays a second zoomed view of the selected unzoomed waveform The seco
101. transient events Record length The specified number of samples in a waveform Reference memory Memory in a oscilloscope used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The oscilloscope saves the data even when the oscilloscope is turned off or unplugged TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary Tee Rise time The time it takes for a leading edge of a pulse to rise from a LowRef value typically 10 to a HighRef value typically 90 of its amplitude RMS Amplitude voltage measurement of the true Root Mean Square voltage Runt trigger A mode in which the oscilloscope triggers on a runt A runt is a pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first The crossings detected can be positive negative or either Sample acquisition mode The oscilloscope creates a record point by saving the first sample during each acquisition interval That is the default mode of the acquisition Sample interval The time interval between successive samples in a time base For real time digitizers the sample interval is the reciprocal of the sample rate For equivalent time digitizers the time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time not real time Sampling The process of capturing an analog input such as a voltage at a discrete point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized Two general meth
102. want to see help on selections from menus not displayed you first exit help mode display the menu you want information on and press HELP again to re enter help mode TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual ee ey Using Features for Advanced Applications The TDS Oscilloscope provides powerful features for testing and digitally proces sing the waveforms you acquire This section describes how to use the following features m Limit Testing for testing the waveforms you acquire against a template you create on this page Waveform Math for inverting adding subtracting and multiplying of waveforms see page 3 188 m Fast Fourier Transforms for displaying the frequency content of waveforms see page 3 191 m Waveform Differentiation for displaying the derivative of a waveform see page 3 210 m Waveform Integration for displaying the integral of a waveform see page 3 215 NOTE If InstaVu Extended Acquisition or Masks mode is on the features listed above are not available Limit Testing The TDS Oscilloscope provides limit testing which can automatically compare each incoming or math waveform against a template waveform You set an envelope of limits around a waveform and the oscilloscope finds waveforms that fall outside those limits See Figure 3 88 When it finds such a waveform the oscilloscope can generate a hardcopy ring a bell and stop and wait for your input To use limit
103. waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed This position is ground when offset is set to 0 V otherwise it is ground plus offset Coupling The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power or information can be transferred from one to the other You can couple the input signal to the trigger and vertical systems several different ways Cursors Paired markers that you can use to make measurements between two waveform locations The oscilloscope displays the values expressed in volts or time of the position of the active cursor and the distance between the two cursors Cycle area A measurement of waveform area taken over one cycle Expressed in volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Cycle mean An amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over one cycle Cycle RMS The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle DC coupling A mode that passes both AC and DC signal components to the circuit Available for both the trigger system and the vertical system Delay measurement A measurement of the time between the middle reference crossings of two different waveforms Delay time The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of data TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 Digitizing The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a set of discr
104. way the oscilloscope calculates values for record points when the oscilloscope cannot acquire all the points for a complete record with a single trigger event That condition occurs when the oscilloscope is limited to real time sampling and the time base is set to a value that exceeds the effective sample rate of the oscilloscope The oscilloscope has two interpolation options linear or sin x x interpolation Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight line fit between the actual values acquired Sin x x computes record points in a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that curve Intensity Display brightness InstaVu acquisition mode A mode that increases the waveform capture rate to up to 400 000 wave forms per second This very fast capture rate greatly increases the probability that runts glitches and other short term changes will accumulate in waveform memory The oscilloscope then displays the waveform at the normal display rate using variable or infinite persistence Glossary 6 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary Interleaving TDS 500B and TDS 700A Models Only A method by which these oscilloscopes attain higher digitizing speeds The oscilloscope applies the digitizing resources of unused channels that is channels that are turned off to sample those that are in use turned on Table 3 2 on page
105. will find saving waveforms useful when working with many waveforms and channels If you have more waveforms than you can display you can save one of the waveforms and then stop acquiring it By doing so you free an input channel to display another waveform without losing the first one 3 154 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups To Save a Waveform To save a waveform do the following steps 1 Select the channel that has the waveform you want to save STOP Before doing step 2 that follows note that if you choose a reference memory location labeled active see Figure 3 72 you will overwrite the waveform that was previously stored there You can store waveforms in reference locations labeled empty without disturbing previously stored waveforms 2 TDS 600B To store a waveform internally press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Save Wfm main gt To Ref1 To Ref2 To Ref3 or To Ref4 side 3 TDS 500C and TDS 700C To store a waveform internally press SAVE RE CALL WAVEFORM gt Normal pop up gt Save Wfm main gt To Ref1 To Ref2 To Ref3 or To Ref4 side z Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample Save waveform u To File To Refl active To Ref2 active To Ref3 empty To Ref4 200mV F M50 0us Chi 200mv empty Recall wim Ena Delete Outosave ave File Fverners Single Seq Format iliti Normals tO Ref Chi Refs OF
106. your application Runt and Slew Rate pulse classes are incompatible with Delayed Triggerable Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Time Base main gt Delayed Only side Delayed Triggerable side NOTE The Delayed Triggerable menu item is not selectable unless incompatible Main Trigger menu settings are eliminated See the steps at the beginning of this procedure If such is the case the Delayed Triggerable menu item is dimmer than other items in the menu By pressing Intensified side you can display an intensified zone that shows where the delayed timebase record may occur a valid delay trigger event must be received relative to the main trigger on the main time base For Delayed Triggerable After mode the start of the intensified zone corresponds to the possible start point of the delayed time base record The end of the zone continues to the end of main time base since a delayed time base record may be triggered at any point after the delay time elapses To learn how to define the intensity level of the normal and intensified waveform see Adjust Intensity on page 3 40 Now you need to bring up the Delayed Trigger menu so that you can define the delayed trigger event Press SHIFT DELAYED TRIG gt Delay by main gt Triggerable After Time Events or Events Time side See Figure 3 53 Enter the delay time or events using the general purpose knob or the keypad If you selected Events Time use Time side and Events si
107. 0 2 50kHz M s00ps Chis 2 52 V Oooo Figure 3 92 System Response to an Impulse To Create an FFT To obtain an FFT of your waveform do the following steps 1 Connect the waveform to the desired channel input and select that channel 2 Adjust the vertical and horizontal scales and trigger the display or press AUTOSET The topic Offset Position and Scale on page 3 201 provides in depth information about optimizing your setup for FFT displays 3 Press MORE to access the menu for turning on math waveforms 4 Select a math waveform Your choices are Math1 Math2 and Math3 main 5 Ifthe selected math waveform is not FFT press Change Math Definition side gt FFT main See Figure 3 93 6 Press Set FFT Source to side repeatedly until the channel source selected in step 1 appears in the menu label TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 193 Using Features for Advanced Applications Tek Run 50 0MS s Sample Define FFT Waveform Set FFT Source to chi Set FFT Vert Scale to dBV RMS Set FFT Window to Select the type of Math function to define from Hanning the bottom row of bezel buttons Define the new function using the side buttons ear When you are satisfied with the selections press amplitudes lt Create Math wfm 3dB Press CLEAR MENY to return to the More menu without creating a Math wa
108. 00B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups Supported Formats The oscilloscope prints hardcopies of its display in many formats which allows you to choose from a wide variety of hardcopy devices It also makes it easier for you to place oscilloscope screen copies into a desktop publishing system The oscilloscope supports the following formats HP Thinkjet inkjet printer HP Deskjet inkjet printer HP Color Deskjet inkjet printer HP Laserjet laser printer Epson DPU 411 II portable thermal printer DPU 412 portable thermal printer PCX PC Paintbrush PCX Color PC Paintbrush TIFF Tag Image File Format BMP Mono Microsoft Windows file format BMP Color Microsoft Windows file format RLE Color Microsoft Windows color image file format compressed EPS Mono Image Encapsulated Postscript mono image EPS Color Image Encapsulated Postscript color image EPS Mono Plot Encapsulated Postscript mono plot EPS Color Plot Encapsulated Postscript color plot Interleaf HPGL Color Plot Depending on the output format selected the oscilloscope creates either an image or a plot Images are direct bit map representations of the oscilloscope display Plots are vector plotted representations of the display TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 165 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Set Up for Making Hardcopies 3 166 Some formats particularly Interleaf EPS TIFF PCX BMP a
109. 106 Source 3 104 Telecom Standard 3 105 Telecom Main Trigger menu 3 104 Temperature compensation 3 142 Temperature Color menu 3 45 Template Source Acquire menu 3 184 Text Grat Display menu 3 40 Thinkjet 3 165 Thinkjet Hardcopy menu 3 167 Thresholds Main Trigger menu 3 94 3 98 TIFF 3 165 TIFF Hardcopy menu 3 167 Time base Glossary 12 Time Base Horizontal menu 3 108 Time Units Cursor menu 3 131 Time Main Trigger menu 3 102 Timeout Trigger 3 91 Timeout trigger 3 89 3 101 Glossary 12 How to set up 3 101 3 112 Timeout Main Trigger menu 3 101 3 102 Index 14 Tracking Cursor menu 3 130 Trigger 3 63 3 112 Glossary 12 AC Line Voltage 3 64 Auxiliary 3 64 Comm 3 65 Coupling 3 67 Delay 3 68 Delayed 3 107 3 112 Edge 3 65 3 72 Glossary 4 Glitch 3 89 3 90 Glossary 5 Holdoff 3 66 Level 3 68 Glossary 12 Logic 3 65 3 76 3 78 Mode 3 65 Pattern 3 76 3 81 Position 3 21 3 61 3 67 Pulse 3 65 3 89 Readout 3 71 Runt 3 89 3 90 Glossary 11 Setup Hold 3 77 3 78 3 86 3 112 Slew Rate 3 91 Glossary 11 Glossary 12 Slew rate 3 89 Slope 3 68 Source 3 64 State 3 77 3 85 3 112 Status Lights 3 70 Telecom 3 103 Timeout 3 89 3 91 3 101 Glossary 12 Types 3 72 3 112 Video 3 65 Width 3 89 3 96 Trigger Bar 2 6 3 61 Trigger Bar Style Display menu 3 41 Trigger i
110. 3 92 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms To Trigger on a Runt Pulse Set to Accept or Reject Glitch To specify whether to trigger on glitches or ignore glitches press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Glitch pop up gt Glitch main gt Accept Glitch or Reject Glitch side If you choose Accept Glitch the oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses narrower than the width you specified If you select Reject Glitch it will trigger only on pulses wider than the specified width Set the Level To set the trigger level with the Level main menu or the front panel trigger LEVEL knob press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up Level main Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set to 50 side m If you select Level you set the trigger level by entering a value with the general purpose knob or the keypad m If you select Set to TTL the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the TTL switching threshold m If you select Set to ECL the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the ECL switching threshold m Ifyou select Set to 50 the oscilloscope searches for the point halfway between the peaks of the trigger source signal and sets the trigger level to that point To Set Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to To Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To lea
111. 5 Zoom Mode with Horizontal Lock Set to None To change the interpolation method used press DISPLAY gt Settings main gt Display pop up gt Filter main gt Sin x x Interpolation or Linear Interpolation side To reset all zoom factors to their defaults do the following step Press ZOOM gt Reset main gt Reset Live Factors or Reset All Factors side Reset Live Factors resets only for live waveforms as opposed to reference waveforms Reset All Factors resets for all waveforms The oscilloscope can display and control a waveform that is both zoomed and unzoomed magnified and unmagnified To do so it creates two 1 2 height graticules or windows and displays the magnified waveform in the upper and the unmagnified waveform in the lower graticule To use Dual Window Zoom also called zoom preview mode do the following steps 1 Press Zoom gt Mode main gt Preview side Note that the oscilloscope displays the box enclosed area on the waveform as magnified in the top graticule See Figure 3 26 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 2 To scale or position the unmagnified waveform press Selected Grati cule main gt Lower side Use the vertical and horizontal knobs to scale and position the unmagnified waveform in the box Note that as you scale or move the unmagnified waveform relative to the box the oscilloscope alters the magnified display accordingly
112. 5 an i aie EY A ode Type Code SS ptandatd Form hresholds amp lt Comm gt lt A gt tsolated Holdoff e Figure 3 49 Main Trigger Menu Comm Type To Selecta To select the standard and bit rate of the communication signal that triggering Communications will occur on Standard 4 Press TRIGGER MENU Type main gt Comm pop up Stan dard main 2 Select an standard from the side menu Only standards for the selected Code are displayed See Table 3 8 on page 3 103 for a list of the available standards and their bit rates To Select a Pulse Form To select the Pulse Form of the communication signal that triggering will occur on 1 Press the TRIGGER MENU Type main gt Comm pop up gt Pulse Form main 2 Select an Pulse Form from the side menu Only pulse forms for the selected Code are displayed See Table 3 9 for a list of pulse forms TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 105 Triggering on Waveforms To Set Level or Threshold Delayed Triggering 3 106 Table 3 9 Communications pulse forms Isolated 1 Eye Diagram Isolated 1 Rise Eye Diagram Pattern 0 7 Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Comm pop up gt Level or Threshold main gt High Low Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set to 50 side Only selections for the selected Code are displayed High lets you enter the high threshold usin
113. 7 3 12 Main menu 2 3 Side menu 2 3 BW symbol 3 17 C Cables 3 175 Cal Probe Vertical menu 3 143 Cart Oscilloscope A 1 Centronics 2 5 Port 3 167 3 174 CH1 CH2 buttons 3 12 Ch1 Ch2 Delayed Trigger menu 3 111 Chl Ch2 Main Trigger menu 3 74 3 82 3 85 3 86 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 96 3 97 3 101 Chl Ch2 Telecom Trigger menu 3 104 Change Colors Color menu 3 46 Channel Glossary 2 Readout 2 6 3 11 3 50 Reference Indicator 2 6 3 11 Selection buttons 2 17 3 12 Trigger input 3 64 Channel readout 2 6 Channel reference indicator Glossary 3 Channel probe deskew 3 143 Glossary 3 Channels Selecting 3 11 Circuit loading Glossary 3 Class Glitch Main Trigger menu 3 91 Class Main Trigger menu 3 96 3 101 Pattern 3 81 Runt 3 93 Setup Hold 3 86 Slew Rate 3 97 State 3 85 Classes Pulse triggers 3 90 CLEAR MENU button 2 3 2 8 2 13 2 23 2 24 3 123 Clear Spool Hardcopy menu 3 170 Clipping derivative math waveforms 3 213 FFT math waveforms 3 201 how to avoid 3 201 3 213 3 219 integral math waveforms 3 219 Clock Source Main Trigger menu 3 86 CMI Telecom Trigger menu 3 104 Code Telecom Trigger menu 3 104 Collision Contrast Color menu 3 48 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index Color 3 44 How to set 3 44 Color Deskjet 3 165 Color Matches Contents Color menu 3 47 3 48 Color menu 3 44 Bold
114. 7 WAVEFORM OFF button 2 21 3 13 3 43 Waveform record FFT 3 198 FFT frequency domain 3 199 FFT source 3 198 FFT time domain 3 199 Waveform Display menu 3 40 Waveforms And zoom 3 50 Math 3 191 Measuring 3 113 Scaling and positioning 3 14 Waveforms Status menu 3 179 Width 2 23 Glossary 8 Glossary 10 Width trigger 3 89 3 96 Index 15 Index How to set up 3 96 3 112 Width Main Trigger menu 3 92 3 96 Window 3 206 Blackman Harris 3 195 3 207 3 210 characteristics of 3 208 Hamming 3 195 3 207 3 210 Hanning 3 195 3 207 3 210 rectangular 3 195 3 207 3 210 rectangular vs bell shaped 3 209 selecting 3 207 Windowing process 3 206 Windows descriptions of 3 195 X XY Format 3 43 Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 XY format Glossary 13 XY Display menu 3 43 Y YT Format 3 43 YT format Glossary 13 Index 16 YT Display menu 3 43 Z Zero phase reference point 3 199 3 204 establishing for impulse testing 3 204 3 205 3 206 Zoom 3 49 3 62 And interpolation 3 50 And waveforms 3 50 derivative math waveforms 3 214 Dual Window mode 3 52 Dual Zoom 3 54 Dual Zoom Offset 3 54 Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 on FFT math waveforms 3 202 on integral math waveforms 3 220 ZOOM button 3 51 Zoom feature 3 49 Zoom menu Dual Zoom 3 54 Dual Zoom Offset 3 54 Preview 3 52 Reset Zoom Factors 3 52 TDS
115. 99 3 112 7 5 ns limitation 3 99 3 112 How to set up 3 97 3 112 Slope Glossary 12 Slope Delayed Trigger menu 3 111 Slope Main Trigger menu 3 75 Slope Trigger 3 68 Snapshot Readout 3 123 Snapshot of Measurements 2 27 3 123 Snapshot Measure menu 3 124 Software version 3 179 Source Delayed Trigger menu 3 111 Source Main Trigger menu 3 74 3 92 3 94 3 96 3 97 3 101 Source Telecom Trigger menu 3 104 Spectral Color menu 3 45 Spooler Hardcopy 3 170 Start up 1 5 State trigger 3 77 3 85 3 112 How to set up 3 85 3 112 State Main Trigger menu 3 85 3 86 Statistics Measure menu 3 125 3 126 Status Determining setup 3 179 STATUS button 3 179 Status menu 3 179 Display 3 179 Firmware version 3 179 Index 13 Index Histo Masks 3 179 T O 3 179 System 3 179 Trigger 3 179 Waveforms 3 179 StdDev 3 135 Stop After Limit Test Condition Met Acquire menu 3 187 Stop After Acquire menu 3 35 3 187 Style Display menu 3 39 Switch principal power 1 7 2 5 System Status menu 3 179 System Utility menu 3 166 T Talk Listen Address Utility menu 3 177 Tek Secure 3 153 Glossary 12 Tek Secure Erase Memory Utility menu 3 153 Telecom Standard Telecom Trigger menu 3 105 Telecom trigger 3 103 How to set up 3 104 Telecom Trigger menu AMI 3 104 Chi Ch2 3 104 CMI 3 104 Code 3 104 Level 3 106 NRZ 3 104 Set to 50 3 106 Set to ECL 3 106 Set to TTL 3
116. After a Probe Cal If a Probe Cal has never been performed on an input channel or if its stored Probe Cal data is erased using the Re use Probe Calibration Data menu discussed later the oscilloscope displays Initialized status in its vertical menu It also displays initialized whenever you remove a probe from an input TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 147 Measuring Waveforms 3 148 If you execute a successful Probe Cal on an input channel the oscilloscope stores the compensation data it derived in nonvolatile memory Therefore this data is available when you turn the oscilloscope off and back on and when you change probes When you install a probe or power on the oscilloscope with probes installed the oscilloscope tests the probe at each input Depending on the probe it finds on each input it takes one of the following actions If the probe has a TEKPROBE interface such an interface can convey additional information such as a unique identification number the oscilloscope determines whether it is the same probe for which data was stored If it is the oscilloscope sets status to pass if not it sets the status to Initialized If a probe has a simple oscilloscope interface the oscilloscope can usually determine if it has a different probe attenuation factor than that stored for the last Probe Cal It can also determine if the last Probe Cal was for a probe with a TEKPROBE interface If either is the case the p
117. C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 3 Overview 3 4 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual SSS Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To use the TDS Oscilloscope to measure or monitor waveforms you need to know how to acquire select and display those waveforms properly To help you do so this section describes how to do the following tasks m How to couple waveforms to the oscilloscope channels m How to select channels to turn on and off their display m How to size and position the selected channel on screen m How to use the menus to set vertical coupling offset and bandwidth and horizontal time base record length and so on parameters This section also describes how to choose the appropriate acquisition mode for acquiring your waveform how to customize the display including selecting the color of the display elements and how to use the Zoom FastFrame and InstaVu features Coupling Waveforms to the Oscilloscope Tektronix produces a variety of probes and cables suitable for connecting various types of signals to the input channels of this product This subsection covers two topics important to coupling Probe Compensation and Input Impedance Considerations If your model oscilloscope ships with a probe use it for general purpose coupling of waveforms to the oscilloscope For a list of other probes available for use see Accessory Probes on page A 5 The TDS 680B TDS 684B and TDS 784
118. C oscilloscopes ship without probes Tektronix recommends you order and use the P6245 Active Probes to take advantage of the higher bandwidth of these models TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 5 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Compensate Passive Probes 3 6 The remaining TDS 500C TDS 600B and TDS 700C oscilloscopes ship with general purpose probes either the P6139A or the P6243 depending on the oscilloscope model The standard accessory probes and quantities shipped for these oscilloscopes are listed in Standard Accessories on page A 4 Tektronix also offers a variety of optical probes differential probes adapters and BNC cabling and connectors to couple a variety of signal sources to the input channels See Options and Accessories on page A 1 or your Tektronix Sales representative for the specific items offered for signal coupling When using a passive probe with any product compensate it to ensure maximum distortion free input to the oscilloscope and to avoid high frequency amplitude errors see Figure 3 1 To compensate your probe do the following steps 1 Connect the probe to the probe compensation signal on the front panel Connect the probe ground lead to the ground terminal on the front panel 2 Press AUTOSET 3 Press VERTICAL MENU gt Bandwidth main gt 20 MHz side Probe Compensated Correctly Probe Overcompensated Probe Undercompensated Figure 3 1 How Probe Comp
119. DS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Tek Run NAMS sample Limit Test Template Template Source chi Template Destination Refi V Limit 4omaiv H Limit 4omdiv 200mvoa M50 0us Chi zoomy a d f i f ore Template Mode eign Stop After Limit Limit Test RR Signal Limit Test Sample N R S button Setup Sources Raina arn DIGIC IC IO C O LOJO O C O Figure 3 89 Acquire Menu Create Limit Test Template 4 Press V Limit side Enter the vertical voltage tolerance value using the general purpose knob or keypad 5 Press H Limit side Enter the horizontal time tolerance value using the general purpose knob or keypad Tolerance values are expressed in fractions of a major division They represent the amount by which incoming waveform data can deviate without having exceeded the limits set in the limit test The range is from 0 the incoming waveform must be exactly like the template source to 5 major divisions of tolerance 6 When you have finished specifying the limit test template press OK Store Template side This action stores the specified waveform in the specified destination using the specified tolerances Until you have done so the template waveform has been defined but not created To avoid overwriting the template you have just create
120. DS models Tektronix ships the recommended general pur pose probes as standard accessories The model probe and number shipped depends on the model see Probes in Table A 2 on page A 3 The TDS 680B TDS 684B and TDS 784C oscilloscopes come without probes but for general purpose measurements and to take advantage of the 1 GHz bandwidth of these oscilloscopes the P6245 Active Probe is recommended This manual lists the P6245 optional accessory probe in Appendix A Options and Accessories Passive Voltage Probes General Purpose High Input Resistance Probes Passive voltage probes measure voltage They employ passive circuit compo nents such as resistors capacitors and inductors There are three common classes of passive voltage probes m General purpose high input resistance m Low impedance Zo m High voltage High input resistance probes are considered typical oscilloscope probes The high input resistance of passive probes typically 10 MQ provides negligible DC loading and makes them a good choice for accurate DC amplitude measure ments TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual D 1 Appendix E Probe Selection However their 8 pF to 12 pF over 60 pF for 1X capacitive loading can distort timing and phase measurements Use high input resistance passive probes for measurements involving m Device characterization above 15 V thermal drift applications m Maximum amplitude sensitivity using 1X
121. Dashed Line Selected Cursor Solid Line Select the Cursor Function 20 0mv C M 500us Chif 25 6mv a i i rine Tanpri ENOR EES Fun tion Mode Units Units seconds Base CIC CIO IC S Figure 3 63 H Bars Cursor Menu and Readouts Paired cursors can only show voltage differences when they remain on screen If the paired cursors are moved off screen horizontally the word Edge will replace the voltage values in the cursor readout This procedure and those that follow detail the process for taking a cursor measurement To select the type of cursors you want do the following steps 1 To display the cursor menu press CURSOR See Figure 3 63 2 Press Function main gt H Bars V Bars Paired or Off side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 129 Measuring Waveforms Cursor Readout Paired Non selected Cursor Dashed Vertical Bar Selected Cursor Solid Vertical Bar Set Mode and Adjust the Cursors 3 130 Position of Vertical Bar Cursors Useful for Locating Cursors Outside the Display Cursor Function i l 3 10 0m M 200ps Chif 25 6mV p Function ime mpTitude Paired Units seconds OIOI Figure 3 64 Paired Cursor Menu and Readouts To select the cursor mode and adjust the cursors in either mode do the fol
122. DeskjetC Hardcopy menu 3 167 Differential active probes D 4 Differentiation of a derivative 3 210 waveform 3 210 Digitizing Glossary 4 Disk How to save a hardcopy to 3 171 Disk drive 3 160 Display 2 6 Hardcopy of 3 164 Options 3 38 3 62 Record View 3 71 System Glossary 4 Display T Trigger Point Display menu 3 41 DISPLAY button 3 39 3 44 Display menu 3 39 3 44 Color 3 44 Contrast 3 40 Cross Hair 3 42 Display 3 39 Display T Trigger Point 3 41 Dots 3 39 Dots style 3 186 Filter 3 42 Frame 3 42 Full 3 42 Graticule 3 42 Grid 3 42 Infinite Persistence 3 39 Intensified Samples 3 39 Intensity 3 40 Linear interpolation 3 42 NTSC 3 42 Overall 3 40 PAL 3 42 Readout 3 41 3 43 Settings 3 39 3 44 Sin x x interpolation 3 42 Style 3 39 Text Grat 3 40 Trigger Bar 3 41 Variable Persistence 3 39 Vectors 3 39 Waveform 3 40 XY 3 43 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index YT 3 43 Display Display menu 3 39 Display Status menu 3 179 Dots 3 39 Dots style Display menu 3 186 Dots Display menu 3 39 DPU411 II Hardcopy menu 3 167 DPU412 Hardcopy menu 3 167 Drives File Utilities menu 3 164 Dual Wfm Math More menu 3 190 Dual Window Zoom 3 52 Dual Zoom Zoom menu 3 54 Dual Zoom Offset Zoom menu 3 54 Duty cycle 2 23 Glossary 8 Glossary 9 E Edge trigger 3 65 3 72 Glos
123. Extended Acquisition is On To Run the File Utilities To run file utilities see the Managing the File System on page 3 160 Managing the File System The TDS Oscilloscope provides file utilities and a floppy disk drive and optional hard disk for saving hardcopies setups and waveforms This section describes how to manage delete rename etc these files using the file system Read the sections listed under To Find More Information on page 3 164 for information on saving hardcopies setups and waveforms To Access the File Utilities The File Utilities menu lets you delete rename copy print files create a new directory operate the confirm delete and overwrite lock and format disks To bring up the File Utilities menu 1 TDS 600B Press the SAVE RECALL SETUP button to bring up the Save Recall Setup menu or press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM pop up to bring up the Save Recall Waveform menu or press the SHIFT HARD COPY button to bring up the Hardcopy menu 2 TDS 500C and TDS700C Press the SAVE RECALL SETUP button to bring up the Save Recall Setup menu or press SAVE RECALL WAVE FORM gt Normal or Extended pop up to bring up the Save Recall Waveform menu or press the SHIFT HARDCOPY button to bring up the Hardcopy menu 3 160 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups 3 Press File Utilities in the main menu to bring up the File Utilities side menu See Figure 3 74 NOTE The amou
124. F Internat Utilities CIP ID OIC IC Oooo JO Figure 3 72 Save Waveform Menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 155 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Save an Acquisition Option 2M Only 3 156 NOTE Using this procedure to save an extended acquisition only saves the waveform In this case if the trigger position is shown at 0 or 100 the actual position may be outside the saved waveform 4 To store a waveform to disk press To File side Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Finally press Save To Selected File side to complete the operation NOTE Upon power on the oscilloscope creates the wild card file marked in shown left for storing waveforms Selecting this file in step 3 stores a waveform in a uniquely named sequentially numbered file For instance the oscilloscope saves the first waveform you save in the file TEKO0001 WFM the second in TEK00002 WFM and so on To save an acquisition do the following steps Select the channel that has the acquisition you want to save 2 To store a waveform internally press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Extended pop up gt Save Acq main 3 Press To File side Then use the general purpose knob and the SELECT button to select the hard drive hd0 and the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Finally press Save
125. Frequency A timing measurement that is the reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second Gated Measurements A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using the vertical cursors TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary GND General purpose knob The large front panel knob with an indentation You can use it to change the value of the assigned parameter Glitch positive trigger Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects positive spike widths less than the specified glitch time Glitch negative trigger Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects negative spike widths less than the specified glitch time Glitch either trigger Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects either positive or negative spike widths less than the specified glitch time GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple instruments in a network under the control of a controller Also known as IEEE 488 bus It transfers data with eight parallel data lines five control lines and three handshake lines Graticule A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes You can use it to visually measure waveform parameters Ground GND coupling Coupling option that disconnects th
126. IM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES B Table of Contents General Safety Summary cc ccc c cece cece ccs scscees xi Preface gm xiii R lated Man als vse ii iio ese eee ee ede see eda xiii Default Model ri raoe at pea ce eile pet dae aeaiee xiv Model References peii a ek ee bia ee a aa an e xiv Conventions osien A Ma a ea ee a aR xiv Getting Started Product Description sssssssssssssssossosessesesoesoo 1 1 Differences by Model erria SAA wea A dons ARAE a ORS 1 2 Product Specification zarpena na eaa AEAT R AA ASROR RES 1 3 Start UP Saeed ake eE EE E EE ete ere ee E E eel 1 5 Preparation isoen na e e a e ke en he A ele A ete a e e 1 5 Putting into Service 0 e a en a t E e a E en 1 6 Operating Basics OOVELVIOW sssr sisson en eaan ss Ea a TR a S EN 2 1 Operating Interface Maps ssesssssssosssessoesesoesoess 2 3 TUCO DAD sense aa g se sgvn 6 oer dso tice aia E E 9 E E E 8 2 9 Setting Up for the Examples 2 0 0 cee cece eee eee eee 2 9 Example 1 Displaying a Waveform 0 0 eee cee
127. Logic trigger 3 79 Measurement 3 116 3 117 Record view 2 6 Snapshot 3 123 Time base 2 6 Trigger 2 6 3 71 Trigger Level Bar 3 40 Trigger Point 3 40 Readout Cursor Paired 3 212 Readout cursor H Bars 3 196 3 212 3 217 Paired cursors 3 198 3 219 V Bars 3 198 3 212 3 218 Readout Display menu 3 41 3 43 Real time sampling 3 26 Real time sampling Glossary 10 Rear panel 2 5 Recall Setups 3 151 Recall Factory Setup Save Recall Setup menu 3 153 Recall Saved Setup Save Recall Setup menu 3 153 Recalling Acquisitions 3 154 Waveforms 3 154 Record Length Limit in Hi Res mode 3 21 Record length 3 21 3 22 Glossary 10 derivative math waveforms 3 211 integral math waveforms 3 215 Option 1M A 2 Option 2M A 2 Record Length Horizontal menu 3 21 Record lengths Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 Record View 2 6 3 14 3 18 3 71 Rectangular window 3 195 Ref Color menu 3 48 Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 File Save Recall Waveform menu 3 158 Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 Reference waveform status 3 158 Reference Indicator Channel 3 11 Reference levels 2 24 Defining for Measure 3 120 Reference Levels Measure menu 3 120 Reference memory Glossary 10 Reject Glitch Main Trigger menu 3 93 Remote communication 3 174 3 178 Remote operation Communicating with Remote Instruments 3 174 Connecting to the GPIB 3 176 GPIB interface requirements 3 174 GPIB Protocols 3 174 Inte
128. Manual V Table of Contents vi Figure 3 87 Initial Help Screen 0 ce cece cece rece eee 3 182 Figure 3 88 Comparing a Waveform to a Limit Template 3 184 Figure 3 89 Acquire Menu Create Limit Test Template 3 185 Figure 3 90 More Menu ccc cece cece cece eee eee eeee 3 189 Figure 3 91 Dual Waveform Math Main and Side Menus 3 190 Figure 3 92 System Response to an Impulse 0065 3 193 Figure 3 93 Define FFT Waveform Menu eeeeee0 3 194 Figure 3 94 FFT Math Waveform in Math 66 3 196 Figure 3 95 Cursor Measurement of an FFT Waveform 3 197 Figure 3 96 Waveform Record vs FFT Time Domain Record 3 199 Figure 3 97 FFT Time Domain Record vs FFT Frequency Domain Record 0 cc cee cece reece reer cece ee eeee 3 200 Figure 3 98 How Aliased Frequencies Appear in an FFT 3 204 Figure 3 99 Windowing the FFT Time Domain Record 3 207 Figure 3 100 FFT Windows and Bandpass Characteristics 3 210 Figure 3 101 Derivative Math Waveform eeeeee0e 3 212 Figure 3 102 Peak Peak Amplitude Measurement of a Derivative Wea velform ee eaea e ae ise EE E tae aca a OY a le ce ch aoe E EEE 3 213 Figure 3 103 Integral Math Waveform ceeeeeeee 3 217 Figure 3 104 H Bars Cursors Measure an Integral Math Waveform 3 218 Figure B 1 MCross Calculations ccececcscscceces B
129. S oscilloscopes display the sample rate in the acquisition readout at the top of the oscilloscope screen TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Offset Position and Scale Record Length The following topics contain information to help you display your FFT properly Adjust for a Non Clipped Display To properly display your FFT waveform scale the source waveform so it is not clipped m You should scale and position the source waveform so it is contained on screen Off screen waveforms may be clipped resulting in errors in the FFT waveform Alternately to get maximum vertical resolution you can display source waveforms with amplitudes up to two divisions greater than that of the screen If you do turn on Pk Pk in the measurement menu and monitor the source waveform for clipping m Use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform As long as the source waveform is not clipped its vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your FFT waveform except at DC DC correction is discussed below Adjust Offset and Position to Zero for DC Correction Normally the output of a standard FFT computation yields a DC value that is twice as large as it should be with respect to the other frequencies Also the selection of window type introduces errors in the DC value of an FFT The displayed output of the FFT on TDS oscilloscopes is corrected for the
130. Stop After menu to leave Single Acquisition Sequence operation Press Limit Test Condition Met side to acquire waveforms until waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test Then acquisition stops At that point you can also specify other actions for the oscilloscope to take using the selections available in the Limit Test Setup main menu NOTE For the oscilloscope to stop an acquisition when limit test conditions have been met limit testing must be turned ON using the Limit Test Setup main menu Setting up limit testing requires several more steps See Limit Testing on page 3 183 Preventing Aliasing Under certain conditions a waveform may be aliased on screen Read the following description about aliasing and the suggestions for preventing it About Aliasing When a waveform aliases it appears on screen with a frequency lower than the actual waveform being input or it appears unstable even though the light next to TRIG D is lighted Aliasing occurs because the oscilloscope cannot sample the signal fast enough to construct an accurate waveform record See Figure 3 18 Actual High Frequency Waveform _ Apparent Low frequency Waveform Due to Aliasing Sampled P oints Figure 3 18 Aliasing TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 37 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Methods to Check and Eliminate To quickly check for aliasing slowly increase the horizontal s
131. The Boolean logic function select from AND NAND OR and NOR m The condition for triggering whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean function becomes TRUE logic high or FALSE logic low and whether the TRUE condition is time qualified A state trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function cause the function to be TRUE or at your option FALSE at the time the clock input changes state When you use a state trigger you define m The precondition for each logic input channels 1 2 and 3 m The direction of the state change for the clock input channel 4 The Boolean logic function select from clocked AND NAND OR and NOR S S IS S m The condition for triggering whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean function becomes TRUE logic high or FALSE logic low A setup hold trigger occurs when a logic input changes state inside of the setup and hold times relative to the clock When you use setup hold triggering you define m The channel containing the logic input the data source and the channel containing the clock the clock source m The direction of the clock edge to use m The clocking level and data level that the oscilloscope uses to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred m The setup and hold times that together define a time range relative to the clock Pattern and State Classes Pattern and state triggers apply boolean
132. The Remove Measrmnt selection provides the same functions as in the Measure menu See Remove Measurements on page 3 118 Mask Testing Option 2C Only Selecting a Mask Setting Mask Options 3 136 The digitizing oscilloscope can perform mask testing You can select a standard mask or create and select a user mask NOTE To function properly masks force some oscilloscope modes and settings to new values To select a mask do the following steps 1 Press MEASURE Measure main gt Masks pop up 2 Repeatedly press Mask Type pop up until your mask type is selected see Table 3 12 on page 3 141 3 Press Standard Mask main and select a mask from the side menu see Table 3 12 on page 3 141 Set mask options to determine which waveform the masks are compared against to turn masks on or off to enable Autoset to a mask to enable offset adjustment to masks and to enable the digital waveform filter see Figure 3 66 To select the channel that is compared against the selected mask press MEA SURE Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Options main Then toggle Mask Source side to Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 To turn defined masks on or off press MEASURE Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Options main Then toggle Mask Display side ON or OFF TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Tek Run 25 0MS s Sample Mask Options Mask
133. To Selected File side to complete the operation NOTE Upon power on the oscilloscope creates the wild card file marked in left for storing acquisitions Selecting this file in step 3 stores a acquisition in a uniquely named sequentially numbered file For instance the oscilloscope saves the first acquisition you save in the file TEK0O0001 WF1 the second in TEK00002 WF1 and so on Saving or recalling an acquisition stops acquisitions in process TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups To Change Format To select the format that the oscilloscope uses to save waveforms to a disk TDS 600B Press save recall WAVEFORM gt Save Format main gt Internal MathCad or Spreadsheet side TDS 500C and TDS700C Press save recall WAVEFORM Normal or Extended pop up gt Save Format main gt Internal MathCad or Spreadsheet side MathCad and Spreadsheet are only available in the Normal waveform menu Internal creates files WFM or WF1 in the internal format of the oscilloscope MathCad creates files DAT in a format usable by MathCad Spreadsheet creates files CSV in a format usable by spreadsheets Excel Lotus 1 2 3 and Quattro Pro If you are writing a MathCad program note that the TDS MathCad file is an ASCII files the first four values of which contain header information m The first header value holds the TDS record length m The second heade
134. To select the waveform record length and the trigger position use the Horizontal Parameters menu You can also use this menu to change the horizontal position or scale instead of using the horizontal knobs You can select the delayed time base see Delayed Triggering on page 3 106 or choose the frames on the waveform that you want to see see Using FastFrame on page 3 59 3 20 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Trigger Position The trigger point marks time zero in a waveform or acquisition in Extended Acquisition mode record All record points before the trigger event make up the pretrigger portion of the record Every record point after the trigger event is part of the posttrigger portion All timing measurements in the record are made relative to the trigger event To define the trigger point position Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Trigger Position main gt Set to 10 Set to 50 or Set to 90 side or use the general purpose knob or the keypad to change the value Record Length The number of points that make up the waveform record is defined by the record length To set the waveform record length 1 Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Record Length main Select the record length desired from the side menu Press more to see additional choices m All TDS 500C TDS 600B and TDS 700C Oscilloscopes provide standard record lengths of 500 1000 2500 5000 and 15000 points m For in
135. Trigger sets delayed trigger coupling to match the main trigger coupling setting For descriptions of the DC and Noise Rej coupling types see To Specify Coupling on page 3 74 10 Press Slope main to select the slope that the delayed trigger will occur on Choose between the rising edge and falling edge slopes When using Delayed Triggerable mode to acquire waveforms two trigger bars are displayed One trigger bar indicates the level set by the main trigger system the other indicates the level set by the delayed trigger system TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 111 Triggering on Waveforms 11 Press Level main gt Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set to 50 side Level lets you enter the delayed trigger level using the general purpose knob or the keypad Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at 1 4 V Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at 1 3 V Set to 50 fixes the delayed trigger level to 50 of the peak to peak value of the delayed trigger source signal NOTE When you set the Vertical SCALE smaller than 200 mV the oscilloscope reduces the Set to TTL or Set to ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and ECL levels That happens because the trigger level range is fixed at 12 divisions from the center At 100 mV the next smaller setting after 200 mV the trigger range is 1 2 V which is smaller than the typical TTL 1 4 V or ECL 1 3 V level 3 112 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual
136. User Manual Tektronix TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Digitizing Oscilloscopes 070 9869 00 This document applies for firmware version 1 0 and above Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Printed in the U S A Tektronix Inc P O Box 1000 Wilsonville OR 97070 1000 TEKTRONIX TEK FastFrame FlexFormat and InstaVu are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three 3 years from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exch
137. a setup stored internally press SAVE RECALL SETUP gt Recall Saved Setup main gt Recall Setup 1 Recall Setup 2 side 2 To recall a setup stored on disk press From File side Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Only files with set extensions will be displayed Finally press Recall From Selected File side to complete the operation Recalling a setup will not change the menu that is currently displayed If you recall a setup that is labeled factory in the side menu you will recall the factory setup The conventional method for recalling the factory setup is described below To Recall the To reset your oscilloscope to the factory defaults Factory Setu y P Press SAVE RECALL SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side To Delete All Setups and Sometimes you might use the oscilloscope to acquire waveforms that are Waveforms Tek confidential Furthermore before returning the oscilloscope to general usage Secure you might want to remove all such waveforms and any setups used to acquire them Be sure you want to remove all waveforms and setups because once they are removed you cannot retrieve them To use Tek Secure to remove all reference setups and waveforms does not affect mass storage disks Press SHIFT UTILITY gt System main gt Config pop up gt Tek Secure Erase Memory main gt OK Erase Setup amp Ref Memory
138. a srapshot Olola olloloolo Figure 3 60 Snapshot Menu and Readout 3 124 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Consider the following rules when taking a snapshot Be sure to display the waveform properly before taking a snapshot Snapshot does not warn you if a waveform is improperly scaled clipped low signal amplitude low resolution etc To vary the source for taking a snapshot simply select another channel math or ref memory waveform and then execute snapshot again Note that a snapshot is taken on a single waveform acquisition or acquisi tion sequence The measurements in the snapshot display are not continu ously updated Be careful when taking automatic measurements on noisy signals You might measure the frequency of the noise and not the desired waveform Note that pushing any button in the main menu except for Snapshot or any front panel button that displays a new menu removes the snapshot from display Use High Low Setup page 3 120 Reference Levels page 3 120 and Gated Measurements page 3 118 with Snapshot exactly as you would when you display individual measurements from the Select Measrmnt menu Display Measurement Measurement statistics displays information about each measurement see Statistics TDS 500C and Figure 3 55 on page 3 117 As measurements are updated the disp
139. actor of 10 Automatic trigger mode A trigger mode that causes the oscilloscope to automatically acquire if triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period Autoset A function of the oscilloscope that automatically produces a stable waveform of usable size Autoset sets up front panel controls based on the characteristics of the active waveform A successful autoset will set the volts div time div and trigger level to produce a coherent and stable waveform display Average acquisition mode In this mode the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that is the averaged result of several acquisitions Averaging reduces the apparent noise The oscilloscope acquires data as in the sample mode and then averages it according to a specified number of averages Bandwidth The highest frequency signal the oscilloscope can acquire with no more than 3 dB x 707 attenuation of the original reference signal Burst width A timing measurement of the duration of a burst Channel One type of input used for signal acquisition The oscilloscope has four channels TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary Channel probe deskew A relative time delay for each channel This lets you align signals to compensate for the fact that signals may come in from cables of differing length Channel Reference Indicator The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around which the
140. ain record is user specified from the Horizontal menu The waveform record is not a DSP Math waveform FFT Time Domain Record that part of the waveform record input to the FFT This time domain record waveform becomes the FFT math waveform after it s transformed Its record length depends on the length of the waveform record defined above FFT Frequency Domain Record the FFT math waveform after digital signal processing converts data from the FFT time domain record into a frequency domain record Figure 3 96 compares the waveform record to the FFT time domain record Note the following relationships m For waveform records lt 10 K points in length the FFT uses all of the waveform record as input m For waveform records gt 10 K points the first 10 K points of the waveform record becomes the FFT time domain record m Each FFT time domain record starts at the beginning of the acquired waveform record m The zero phase reference point for a phase FFT math waveform is in the middle of the FFT time domain record regardless of the waveform record length FFT Time Domain Record gt Waveform Record Waveform Record lt 10 K Zero Phase Reference lt FFT Time Domain Record 10k Waveform Record gt 10 K Zero Phase Reference Figure 3 96 Waveform Record vs FFT Time Domain Record TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 199 Using Features for Advanced Applications
141. al Path Compensation page 3 142 and then continue with this procedure 5 Press the front panel button corresponding to the input channel on which you installed the probe 6 TDS 600B Press VERTICAL MENU gt Cal Probe main 7 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press VERTICAL MENU gt Probe Func tions main gt Cal Probe side STOP Your oscilloscope will detect the type of probe you have installed and display screen messages and menu choices for compensation of probe gain offset or both See Figure 3 69 The following steps will have you run probe gain offset or both depending on the probe the oscilloscope detects 8 Ifthe message on screen is Probe Offset Compensation rather than Probe Gain Compensation skip to step 16 9 Connect the probe tip to PROBE COMPENSATION SIGNAL connect the probe ground lead to PROBE COMPENSATION GND 10 Press OK Compensate Gain side D 11 Wait for gain compensation to complete one to three minutes When gain compensation completes the following actions occur m The clock icon will disappear m f offset compensation is required for the probe installed the Probe Offset Compensation message will replace the Probe Gain Compensa tion message TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 145 Measuring Waveforms Tek Run ear Sample Probe Cal Clear Probe Cal Probe Cal Status initialized Probe Gain Compensation 1 Connect prob
142. al color A value of 100 results in white 6 Choose Saturation from the side menu and use the general purpose knob or keypad to select the saturation you desire A value of 100 provides a pure color A value of 0 provides gray TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Tek Run eer Sample Change Colors Color Chi pete Palette erate ap ap Restore Settings k Math Reference Options lt Color Normal Colors Colors Colors Colors Pt tT 5 Zone Grat Text Scroll ScrTxt Histo Ena BG Ch1 Cch2 Ch3 Ch4 Math Ref Clsn Saturation a a Lightness 65 Reset to lamv Factory Color SS C AlS Figure 3 22 Display Menu Palette Colors Set Math Waveform Color To define math waveform colors 1 Choose to define math waveform colors by selecting the main menu Map Math item Select one of the three math waveforms by pressing Math in the side menu If you want to assign the selected math waveform to a specific color press Color and cycle through the choices If you want the selected math waveform to be the same color as the waveform it is based on select Color Matches Contents If the math waveform is based on dual waveforms the math waveform will use the color of the first constituent waveform To return to the factory defaults select Re
143. ampling or let it choose between real time or equivalent time sampling Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Repetitive Signal main gt ON or OFF side m ON Enable ET uses both the real time and the equivalent time sampling as appropriate see Table 3 4 OFF Real Time Only limits the oscilloscope to real time sampling If the oscilloscope cannot accurately get enough samples for a complete waveform it will interpolate NOTE The oscilloscope will use the interpolation method selected in the display menu to fill in the missing record points either linear or sin x x interpolation See Interpolation on page 3 28 for a discussion of interpolation The sampling speeds and the number of channels you choose affect the mode the oscilloscope uses to sample waveforms m The oscilloscope always real time samples at slower time base settings faster time settings force the oscilloscope to switch from real time sampling to equivalent time sampling or interpolation depending on whether ET is on or off m The oscilloscope extends the limit at which it must switch from real time sampling by using the digitizers of channels that are turned off to sample the channel or channels that are turned on TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Check Table 3 4 below to determine the time base setting s at which the switch from real time sampling RT to equivalent time sampling or interpola
144. an interior cleaning The collection of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat and breakdown Dirt acts as an insulating blanket preventing efficient heat dissipa tion Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that could cause an oscilloscope failure especially under high humidity conditions CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the plastics used in this oscilloscope Use only deionized water when cleaning the menu buttons or front panel buttons Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual E 1 Appendix E Cleaning E 2 Inspection Inspect the outside of the oscilloscope for damage wear and missing parts using Table E 1 as a guide Oscilloscopes that appear to have been dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct operation and performance Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the oscilloscope Table E 1 External inspection check list Item Inspect for Repair action Cabinet front panel Cracks scratches deformations Send in for service and cover damaged hardware or gaskets Front panel knobs Missing damaged or loose Send in for service knobs Carrying handle bail Correct operation Send in for se
145. and gives display settings for this mode If you select InstaVu acquisitions procedures for making Style Format and Readout display settings differ and some selections are not permitted See Using InstaVu Acquisition Mode on page 3 55 for setup differences and Incompatible Modes on page 3 58 3 38 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Change Display Settings To bring up the Display menu Press DISPLAY gt Settings main gt Display pop up The Display menu allows you to adjust the style intensity level graticule and format features described below The Color menu allows you to alter color settings for various display components such as waveforms and text To find more information on color see Customizing the Display Color on page 3 44 Select the Display Style TDS 600B only Press DISPLAY gt Style main gt Vectors Dots Intensified Samples Infinite Persistence or Variable Persistence side See Fig ure 3 19 TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only Press DISPLAY Mode main gt Normal pop up gt Style main gt Vectors Dots Intensified Samples Infinite Persistence or Variable Persistence side Vectors style displays vectors lines between the record points Dots style displays waveform record points as dots Intensified Samples style also displays waveform record points as dots However the points actually sampled are displayed in the color labeled
146. and holdoff refer to Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Communications Triggering The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on communication signals option 2C only Table 3 8 lists the available standards codes and bit rates This section describes how to use Comm triggering how to select the Source Code bit rate telecom Standard Pulse Form Level or Threshold and Mode and Holdoff NOTE To function properly Comm triggers force some oscilloscope modes and settings to new values Also selecting a mask from the MEASURE menu selects the Comm trigger settings for that mask However selecting a Comm trigger does not select a mask Table 3 8 Comm triggers Standard Name Bit Rate OC1 STMO 51 84 Mb s OC3 STM1 155 52 Mb s OC12 STM4 622 08 Mb s DSO Sql 64 kb s DSO Dbl 64 kb s DSO Data Contra 64 kb s DSO Timing 64 kb s El AMI 2 048 Mb s E2 AMI 8 44 Mb s E3 34 368 Mb s E4 139 26 Mb s E5 CEPT 565 Mb s STM1E 155 52 Mb s DS1 AMI 1 544 Mb s DS1A AMI 2 048 Mb s DS1C 3 152 Mb s DS2 6 312 Mb s DS3 44 736 Mb s DS4NA 139 26 Mb s TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 103 Triggering on Waveforms To Select Comm Triggering To Select a Source To Specify Code To Set Mode amp Holdoff 3 104 Table 3 8 Comm triggers cont
147. ange for the defective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment or c to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLA
148. anges the other main menu titles TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 8 E a Tutorial This section quickly makes you acquainted with some of the fundamental operations required to use the TDS Oscilloscope to take measurements Start this tutorial by doing Setting Up for the Examples on this page Setting Up for the Examples Perform the following tasks to connect input signals to the TDS Oscilloscope to reset it and to become acquainted with its display screen Once completed these tasks ready the oscilloscope for use in the examples that follow Connect the Input Signal Remove all probes and signal inputs from the input BNC connectors along the lower right of the front panel Then using an appropriate probe such as the P6245 connect from the CH 1 connector of the oscilloscope to the PROBE COMPENSATION connectors See Figure 2 1 NOTE See Appendix A Options and Accessories for optional probes you can order and use with this product TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 9 Tutorial _ 2 Figure 2 1 Connecting a Probe for the Examples P6245 shown Reset the Oscilloscope Do the following steps to reset the oscilloscope to a known factory default state before doing the examples You can reset the oscilloscope anytime you begin a
149. ass main gt Pattern pop up gt Trigger When main gt TRUE for less than or TRUE for more than side 2 Use the knob and keypad to set the time in the side menu When you select TRUE for less than and specify a time the input conditions you specify must drive the logic function high TRUE for less than the time you specify Conversely the TRUE for more than menu item requires the boolean function to be TRUE for longer than the time you specify TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 83 Triggering on Waveforms Time Logic Function is TRUE Logic Function AND Becomes TRUE Logic Function Becomes FALSE and Triggers Acquisition Time Logic Function Must be TRUE 3 84 Note the position of the trigger indicator in Figure 3 43 Triggering occurs at the point that the oscilloscope determines that the logic function you specify is TRUE within the time you specify The oscilloscope determines the trigger point in the following manner m It waits for the logic condition to become TRUE m It starts timing and waits for the logic function to become FALSE m It compares the times and if the time TRUE is longer for TRUE for more than or shorter for TRUE for less than then it triggers a waveform display at the point the logic condition became FALSE This time can be and usually is different from the time set for TRUE for more than or TRUE for less than In Figure 3 43 the delay between the vertical ba
150. at a time The trigger bar is only displayed if the trigger source is an active displayed waveform Also two trigger bars are displayed when delay triggerable acquisitions are displayed one for the main and one for the delayed time base The trigger bar is a visual indicator of the trigger level Tek Run 50 0kS s Readout Options Display T Trigger Point Trigger P oint Indicator Trigger Bar Style tong Trigger Bar Long 5 tyle th setantnbn btn SEERNE BEREE AEEA EEEE AE EEE x D isp l ay OF 3 i b R 4 S k ON Trigger Bar Short Style 50 0mv C MT ooms Chir 6amv Style Readout Filter Graticule Format Settings Intensity 7 i lt Display gt Vectors leriatace Sin x x Full VF ICDC O C O Figure 3 20 Trigger Point and Level Indicators TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 41 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Select Interpolation Filter Select the Graticule Type 3 42 Sometimes especially when using the hardcopy feature you may want to display the current date and time on screen To find more information displaying and setting date and time see Date Time Stamp the Hardcopy on page 3 168 4 Press Display Date Time side to turn it on or off Push Clear Menu to see the current date and time The display f
151. ath cnc 34 4 2 sdapons Aare T bad wit een BA Base Re Ss 3 188 Fast Fourier Transforms no riore a 0 cece cee eee nent n eee 3 191 Waveform Differentiation 2 0 0 cece ccc cette eens 3 210 Waveform Integration 00 eee cee teens 3 215 Appendix A Options and Accessories 0c cece eee eeceees A 1 Options a a ea bt we ne pe ai bade shat abies A 1 Standard Accessories 1 0 0 cece eee e nent enn ee neee A 3 Optional Accessories 1 0 0 ec eee eee tees A 4 Appendix B Algorithms ccc ccc ce cece cece ce eeeceecs B 1 Appendix C Packaging for Shipment eceeceeeees C 1 Appendix D Probe Selection ccc ccc ccccccsscsccecs D 1 Appendix E Inspection and Cleaning 0e cece eees E 1 Appendix F Programmer Disk sesssssssescsesseseseseseo F 1 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Rear Panel Controls Used in Start Up 1 7 Figure 1 2 ON STBY Button 0 cece cece c ce ere eeeens 1 8 Figure 2 1 Connecting a Probe for the Examples P6245 shown 2 10 Figure 2 2 SETUP Button Location cece eee eee 2 11 Figure 2 3 The Setup Menu cc cc ccc cccccccscscceces 2 11 Figure 2 4 Trigger Controls cece cece eee erences 2 12 Figure 2 5 The Display After Factory Initialization 2 13 Figure 2 6 The VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL Controls
152. ath waveform use cursors to measure Measurements its voltage over time 1 Be sure MORE is selected lighted in the channel selection buttons and that the integrated math waveform is selected in the More main menu 2 Press CURSOR Mode main gt Independent side gt Func tion main gt H Bars side 3 Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor solid to the top or to any amplitude level you choose 4 Press SELECT to select the other cursor 5 Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor to the bottom or to any amplitude level you choose 6 Read the integrated voltage over time between the cursors in volt seconds from the A readout Read the integrated voltage over time between the selected cursor and the reference indicator of the math waveform from the readout See Figure 3 104 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 217 Using Features for Advanced Applications Be D Tek Run 5 00MS s Sample 4s Cursor 3yVs Function Integral Math Waveform ae fer aa Pe Ry een A Source Waveform 5 a M 10 045 Chis 520m v Es Figure 3 104 H Bars Cursors Measure an Integral Math Waveform 7 Press Function main gt V Bars side Use the general purpose knob to align one of the two vertical cursors to a point of interest along the horizon tal axis of
153. ation in dB side External Attenuation Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the external attenuation multiplier External Attenuation Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the external attenuation in dB To set the probe attenuation to its default value press VERTICAL MENU gt Probe Functions main gt Set to Unity External Attenuation side Attaching a probe also sets the probe attenuation to its default value Check the Record View to determine the size and location of the waveform record and the location of the trigger relative to the display See Figure 3 7 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Check the Time Base readout at the lower right of the display to see the time division settings and the time base main or delayed being referred to See Figure 3 7 Also see Figure 3 5 on page 3 15 Since all live waveforms use the same time base the oscilloscope only displays one time base and time division setting for all the active channels Tek Stopped S16 50ns amp Time Base Record View Readout Main Only Intensified eee Delayed Only Delayed Runs 16 50n5 After Main oop ae oe Delayed chi 200m Triggerable see Delayed Trig Menu Time Base position Lens Horiz FastFrame Extd Acq Main 50 300 Pos Set up Time Base Readout
154. ave the value of the nearest known sample When samples are out of range the measurement will give a warning to that effect for example CLIPPING if the measurement could change by extending the measurement range slightly The algorithms assume the samples recover from an overdrive condition instantaneously For example if MidRef is set directly then MidRef would not change even if samples were out of range However if MidRef was chosen using the choice from the Set Levels in Units selection of the Measure menu then MidRef could give a CLIPPING warning NOTE When measurements are displayed using Snapshot out of range warnings are NOT available However if you question the validity of any measurement in the snapshot display you can select and display the measurement individually and then check for a warning message TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 17 Appendix B Algorithms B 18 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual _ a Appendix C Packaging for Shipment If you ship the TDS Oscilloscope pack it in the original shipping carton and packing material If the original packing material is not available package the instrument as follows 1 Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with inside dimensions at least 15 cm 6 in taller wider and deeper than the oscilloscope The shipping carton must be constructed of cardboard with 170 kg 375 pound test str
155. aveform 1 Be sure MORE is selected in the channel selection buttons and that the differentiated math waveform is selected in the More main menu TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Select Measrmnt main Select up to four measurements in the side menu See Figure 3 102 To Take Cursor You can also use cursors to measure derivative waveforms Use the same Measurements procedure as is found under To Take Cursor Measurements on page 3 217 When using that procedure note that the amplitude measurements on a derivative waveform will be in volts per second rather than in volt seconds as is indicated for the integral waveform measured in the procedure 3 212 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Tek Run Se Average Select Measurement ser ren ied S02kKV s Pk Pk 1 Amplitude Positive Overshoot Negative Overshoot 1 200mva q M10 0u C 32mv more 5 of 8 REE 100kv s 10 0us ia n noian ii k Remove Gating Statistics Level Setu Measure EEC j Snapshot lt Measure gt MGlMiten Measrmnt OFF OFF Histogram LOIDID CO la II 10 1 1 1a 1 Figure 3 102 Peak Peak Amplitude Measurement of a Derivative Waveform Offset Position and Scale The settings you make for off
156. ayed waveforms To select the interpolation method press DISPLAY gt Setting main gt Display pop up gt Filter main gt Sin x x or Linear side If the source waveform record length is 500 points the FFT will use 2X Zoom to increase the 250 point FFT frequency domain record to 500 points Therefore FFT math waveforms of 500 point waveforms are always zoomed 2X or more with interpolation Waveforms with other record lengths can be zoomed or not and can have minimum Zooms of 1X or less Sin x x interpolation may distort the magnitude and phase displays of the FFT depending on which window was used You can easily check the effects of the interpolation by switching between sin x x and linear interpolation and observing the difference in measurement results on the display If significant differences occur use linear interpolation Undersampling Aliasing Aliasing occurs when the oscilloscope acquires a source waveform with frequency components outside of the frequency range for the current sample rate In the FFT waveform the actual higher frequency components are under sampled and therefore they appear as lower frequency aliases that fold back around the Nyquist point See Figure 3 98 The greatest frequency that can be input into any sampler without aliasing is 4 the sample frequency Since source waveforms often have a fundamental frequency that does not alias but have harmonic frequencies that do you should have
157. bits 0 5 X LOG Nd 3 extra bits Bits of Resolution Resolution Enhancement 3 bits 8 bits 11 bits Hi Res mode only works with real time noninterpolated sampling If you set the time base so fast that it requires real time interpolation or equivalent time sampling the mode automatically becomes Sample even though the menu selection will not change Table 3 3 Additional resolution bits Time base speed Bits of resolution 100 ns and faster 8 bits 200 ns to 500 ns 9 bits 1 us to 2 us 10 bits 5 us to 10 us 11 bits 20 us to 50 us 12 bits 100 us to 200 us 13 bits 500 us 14 bits 1 ms and slower 15 bits 3 32 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Checking the To determine the acquisition sampling rate the acquisition state running or Acquisition Readout stopped and the acquisition mode check the Acquisition readout at the top of the display See Figure 3 16 The state Run shows the sample rate and acquisition mode The state Stop shows the number of acquisitions acquired since the last stop or major change Run 100K Sample Acquisition R eadout Acquisition Mode Sample Peak Detect TFL Hi Res wt lh Envelope 70 200mva LOM 500us Chis 248mVv z H Average 5 i 16 Mode jtepetitivejstop After _ i E Test create
158. by repeatedly pressing the main menu button underneath the pop up Positive duty cycle A timing measurement of the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Positive overshoot Amplitude voltage measurement Max High Amplitude UNG PositiveOvershoot TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary 9 Glossary Glossary 10 Positive width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points rising edge MidRef default 50 and falling edge MidRef default 50 on a positive pulse Posttrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired after the trigger event Pretrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired before the trigger event Probe An oscilloscope input device Quantizing The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled such as a voltage to a digital value Probe compensation Adjustment that improves low frequency response of a probe Pulse trigger A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the oscilloscope finds a pulse of the specified polarity with a width between or optionally outside the user specified lower and upper time limits Real time sampling A sampling mode where the oscilloscope samples fast enough to completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event Use real time sampling to capture single shot or
159. cale time per division setting If the shape of the displayed waveform changes drastically or becomes stable at a faster time base setting your waveform was probably aliased To avoid aliasing be sure to sample the input signal at a rate more than twice as fast as the highest frequency component For example a signal with frequency components of 500 MHz would need to be sampled at a rate faster than 1 Gigasamples second to represent it accurately and to avoid aliasing The following tips may help you eliminate aliasing on a signal m Try adjusting the horizontal scale m Try pressing the AUTOSET button m Try switching the acquisition mode in the acquisition menu to Envelope or Peak Detect Envelope searches for samples with the highest and lowest values over multiple acquisitions Peak Detect mode does the same but in a single acquisition Either can detect faster signal components over time m Try pressing the InstaVu acquisition button TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only InstaVu mode results in waveform displays similar to those obtained using an analog oscilloscope due to its fast waveform capture rate Customizing the Display The TDS Oscilloscope can display waveform records and other display elements in different ways This section describes how to adjust the oscilloscope display style intensity level graticule and format NOTE TDS 500C and 700C models only This section assumes you are using Normal acquisitions mode
160. ce Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Mathi Math Math3 Refi None None None None None None Measure Gate Hi Low Waveforms OFF Histogram 90 50 10 50 more 1of2 Format layout Port Palette interieaf Portrait File Hardcopy Status Banner IDC O O O Figure 3 85 Status Menu System 3 180 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Determining Status and Accessing Help Displaying the Banner To display the banner lists firmware version options copyright and patents Press SHIFT STATUS gt Banner main See Figure 3 86 ir Tek Run epee Sample Tektronix 7 TDS 6846 Digitizing Oscilloscope F v4 0e Options 13 1F 2F c Copyright Tektronix Inc 1991 1995 All rights reserved Oloo DIC IC OC e Figure 3 86 Banner Display Displaying Help To use the on line help system Press HELP to provide on screen information on any front panel button knob or menu item See Figure 3 87 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 181 Determining Status and Accessing Help 3 182 Help Mode is on Push HELP to exit Press any button or turn any Knob for information about that control Changing a control while in help mode will not affect the digitizing oscilloscope settings Press HELP again to exit the
161. ces that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A m WARNING Protective Ground CAUTION Double High Voltage Earth Terminal Refer to Manual Insulated TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Preface Related Manuals This is the User Manual for the TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Digitizing Oscilloscopes The chapter Getting Started briefly describes the TDS Oscilloscope prepares you to install it and tells you how to put it into service The chapter Operating Basics covers basic principles of the operation of the oscilloscope The operating interface illustrations and the tutorial examples rapidly help you understand how your oscilloscope operates The chapter Reference teaches you how to perform specific tasks See page 3 1 for a complete list of operating tasks covered in that chapter The Appendices provide an options listing an accessories listing and other useful information The following documents are
162. cilloscope triggers 1 Note that for state class triggers the definition must b input changes state e met at the time the clock 2 The definitions given here are correct for the Goes TRUE setting in the Trigger When menu If that menu is set to Goes False swap the definition for AND with that for NAND and for OR with NOR for both pattern and state classes 3 The logic inputs are channels 1 2 3 and 4 when using pattern logic triggers For State Logic Triggers channel 4 becomes the clock inp channels as logic inputs ut leaving the remaining Setup and Hold Class Setup hold triggering uses the setup and hold times to define a setup hold violation zone relative to the clock Data that changes state within this zone triggers the oscilloscope Figure 3 40 shows how the setup and hold times you choose positions this zone relative to the clock 3 78 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Setup hold triggering uses the setup hold violation zone to detect when data is unstable too near the time it is clocked Each time trigger holdoff ends the oscilloscope monitors the data and clock sources When a clock edge occurs the oscilloscope checks the data stream it is processing from the data source for transitions occurring within the setup hold violation zone If any occur the oscilloscope triggers with the trigger point located at the clock edge Positive settings for both setup a
163. ct Measrmnt main gt Delay side gt Edges main 5 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Select Measrmnt main gt Delay side gt Edges main A side menu of delay edges and directions will appear Choose from one of the combinations displayed on the side menu using the following information m The selection you choose defines which edges you want the delayed measurement to be made between m The upper waveform on each icon represents the from waveform and the lower one represents the to waveform m The direction arrows on the choices let you specify a forward search on both waveforms or a forward search on the from waveform and a backwards search on the to waveform The latter choice is useful for isolating a specific pair of edges out of a stream 6 To take the measurement you just specified press Delay To main gt OK Create Measurement side To exit the Measure Delay menu rather than creating a delay measurement press CLEAR MENU which returns you to the Measure menu Take a Snapshot of Sometimes you may want to see all of the automated measurements on screen at Measurements the same time To do so use Snapshot Snapshot executes all of the single waveform measurements available on the selected waveform once and displays the results The measurements are not continuously updated All of the measurements listed in Table 3 10 on page 3 114 except for Delay and Phase are displayed De
164. cts a positive pulse edge that after first crossing the lower threshold then crosses the upper threshold The pulse must travel between the two levels ata rate faster or slower than user specifies the user specified slew rate for triggering to occur Slew negative Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a negative pulse edge that after first crossing the upper threshold then crosses the lower threshold The pulse must travel between the two levels ata rate faster or slower than user specifies the user specified slew rate for triggering to occur ae Slew either Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a positive or negative pulse edge that first crosses one threshold and then crosses the other threshold The pulse must travel between the two levels ata rate faster or slower than user specifies the user specified slew rate for triggering to occur _ Timeout stays high Triggering occurs if the signal stays higher than the trigger wD level for longer than the timeout value 1 Timeout stays low Triggering occurs if the signal stays lower than the trigger level for longer than the timeout value i i Timeout either Triggering occurs if the signal stays higher or stays lower os than the trigger level for the timeout value To Trigger on a Glitch When you select the pulse class Glitch the oscilloscope will trigger on a pulse narrower or wider in width than some specified time To set up for gli
165. d store any new template you create in a different destination from that just stored TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 185 Using Features for Advanced Applications To Select a Limit Test Source To Specify the Limit Test Response 3 186 To view the template you have created press the MORE button Then press the button corresponding to the destination reference memory you have used The waveform appears on the display NOTE To view the waveform data as well as the template envelope it might be useful to select the Dots display style See Select the Display Style on page 3 39 Now specify the channel that will acquire the waveforms to be compared against the template you have created 1 Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Limit Test Sources main gt Compare Ch1 to Compare Ch2 to Compare Ch3 to Compare Ch4 to Compare Math1 to Compare Math2 to or Compare Math3 to side 2 Once you have selected one of the four channels or a math waveform as a waveform source from the side menu press the same side menu button to select one of the reference memories in which you have stored a template Valid selections are any of the four reference waveforms Ref1 through Ref4 or None Choosing None turns limit testing off for the specified channel or math waveform NOTE Specify the same reference memory you chose as the template destination if you want to use the template you just created If you have cr
166. d direction the trigger slope You will likely use edge triggering for most of your measurements This subsection describes how use edge trigger ing how to select edge type source coupling slope and level It also details how to select trigger mode auto or normal for all trigger types To quickly check if edge triggers are selected check the Trigger readout When edge triggers are selected the trigger readout displays the trigger source as well as the trigger slope and level See Figure 3 38 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Main Trigger Slope Rising Edge Main Trigger Main Time Base Time Di ain Time Base Time Div Source Ch 1 Main Trigger Level Main Time Base m 2o omv CF M 500us Chif EA II 1 19 1 1 TYPE Source lt Edge gt Chi Coupling BC Figure 3 38 Edge Trigger Readouts To Select Edge Triggering Use the edge trigger menu to select edge triggering and to perform the proce dures for source coupling slope trigger level mode and holdoff that follow To bring up the Edge Trigger menu press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up See Figure 3 39 Tek Run 100kS s Sample Edge Source ch2 Logic 7 Pulse omy M 500s Chif 248mV more comm 1of2 video 3 I
167. d to fill the record The situation just described occurs if you set the Horizontal SCALE knob to a time base setting that is faster than 10 ns TDS 600B The setting varies with the number of channels for TDS 500C and TDS 700C models see Table 3 4 on page 3 35 The oscilloscope then interpolates to create the intervening points in the waveform record There are two options for interpolation linear or sin x x TDS 500C and TDS 700C models can also equivalent time sample to acquire more samples see Equivalent Time Sampling on page 3 27 Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve That is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine waves Actually it is appropriate for general use although it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times NOTE When using either type of interpolation you may want to set the display Style so that the real samples are displayed intensified relative to the interpolated samples The instructions under Select the Display Style on page 3 39 explain how to turn
168. dcopy Preview palette can temporarily degrade display quality You can select the Hardcopy Preview palette when using certain color hardcopy Jormats The default colors in the this palette comprise a white background and fully saturated primary colors which generally produce the best result To change the color of the current palette select a color and vary these attributes Hue which is the wavelength of light reflected from the surface It varies continuously along the color spectrum as produced by a rainbow Lightness which is the amount of light reflected from the surface It varies from black to the nominal color to white Saturation which is the intensity of color Completely desaturated color is gray Completely saturated color of any hue is that color at its most intense level 1 Select the main menu Change Colors item See Figure 3 22 2 Select one of the colors by pressing repeatedly Color in the side menu 3 If you want to use the factory default for this color press the side menu Reset to Factory Color 4 Choose Hue from the side menu and use the general purpose knob or keypad to select the desired hue Values range from 0 to 359 Sample values are 0 blue 60 magenta 120 red 180 yellow 240 green and 300 cyan 5 Choose Lightness from the side menu and use the general purpose knob or keypad to select the lightness you desire A value of 0 results in black A value of 50 provides the nomin
169. de to switch between setting the time and the number of events Hint You can go directly to the Delayed Trigger menu See step 6 By selecting one of Triggerable After Time Events or Events Time the oscilloscope automatically switches to Delayed Triggerable in the Horizontal menu You will still need to display the Horizontal menu if you want to leave Delayed Triggerable The Source menu lets you select which input will be the delayed trigger source TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Tek Run 50 0MS s Sample Delay by Time 16ns Delayed Edge Delay i set Triggerable after Time ss Irene Events Saat PA Events Time Time a 200m Cch2 gt soom M 200us Chis 304mvV Events D1 00us Chi 304mv 2 Delay by Source Coupling Slope Level Time ch DC f 304mV MIP ICIC C O Figure 3 53 Delayed Trigger Menu 8 Press Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 or DC Aux side NOTE Selecting DC Aux as source in BOTH the main and delayed triggering menus forces main and delayed trigger levels to adjust in tandem As long as their source remains DC Aux adjusting the trigger level for either system adjusts it for both systems 9 Press Coupling main gt Main Trigger DC or Noise Rej side to define how the input signal will be coupled to the delayed trigger Main
170. deletes both the directories and all their contents To rename a file or directory turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the file or directory to delete For example to rename Then press the side menu Rename button See Figure 3 75 The labeling menu should appear Turn the general purpose knob or use the main menu arrow keys to select each letter Press Enter Char from the main menu to enter each letter When you have entered the name press the side menu OK Accept item A N Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample Enter Label cece Name f i OK BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWRY20123456789 2_ amp Accept Enter Char EE Delete Clear DIPICI IC C O O Figure 3 75 File System Labeling Menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups To Copy To copy a file or directory turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the file to copy Then press the side menu Copy button The file menu will reappear with the names of directories to copy to Select a disk and directory and press the side menu button labelled Copy lt name gt to Selected Directory To copy all files select the entry The oscilloscope copies all directories recursively That means it copies both the directories and all their contents To Print To print a file turn the ge
171. der Signal Path in the main menu See Figure 3 68 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Tek Run 500kKS 5 Sample Signal Path ompensatio Signal Path Compensation SPC corrects for DC inaccuracies caused by temperature variations and or long term drift SPC can be run any time after the oscilloscope is peared p and should be run whenever the oscilloscope s ambient temperature has changed by more than 5 C or once a week if vertical settings of 5mV div or less are used Input signals OK with AC components Disconnect or otherwis remove these signals prior to running SPC Compensate SPC will take up to 5 minutes to run ae Signal Paths igna age Frequency Path Reference Response Trigger Filters Pass initialized initialized initialized Pass Oooo oj Figure 3 68 Performing a Signal Path Compensation Channel Probe Deskew The TDS Oscilloscopes allow you to adjust a relative time delay for each channel This feature lets you align the signals to compensate for the fact that signals may come in from cables of differing lengths The oscilloscope applies deskew values after it completes each acquisition therefore the deskew values do not affect logic triggering Also deskew has no affect on XY display format To set a channel probe deskew do the following steps m Press VERTICAL
172. des an edge trigger no pulse or logic triggers When using the delayed time base you can also delay the acquisition of a waveform for a user specified time or a user specified number of delayed trigger events or both after a main trigger event See Delayed Triggering on page 3 106 to learn how to use delay Triggering from the Front Panel To set MAIN LEVEL 3 68 The trigger buttons and knob let you quickly adjust the trigger level or force a trigger See Figure 3 35 The trigger readout and status screen lets you quickly determine the state of the trigger system You use the following trigger controls and readouts for all trigger types except where noted To manually change the trigger level when edge triggering or certain threshold levels when logic or pulse triggering turn the MAIN LEVEL knob It adjusts the trigger level or threshold level instantaneously no matter what menu if any is displayed TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms 44 TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL fh DELAYED TRIG TRIGGER MENU Trigger Status Lights i SET LEVEL TO 50 J SINGLE TRIG FORCE TRIG J Figure 3 35 TRIGGER Controls and Status Lights To Set to 50 To quickly obtain an edge trigger or a glitch or width pulse trigger press SET LEVEL TO 50 The oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the halfway point between the peaks of the trigger signal Set Level to 50 has no effect when trigge
173. displayed To explore assigning controls to different channels do the following steps 1 Press CH 1 Observe that now the side menu title shows Ch1 See Figure 2 13 and that the light above CH 1 is lighted The highlighted menu item in the side menu has changed from the 50 Q channel 2 setting to the 1 MQ impedance setting of channel 1 2 Press CH 2 gt Q side to toggle the selection to 1 MQ That returns the coupling impedance of channel 2 to its initial state 2 20 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial Tek Run ee Sample 20 0mv Ch2 100mV M 5004s Chi 20 8mv HEA 50 BRI Bandwidth Hne Scale position offset peskew Probe Full ef ny samdiv av as Functions C EE C Figure 2 13 The Menus After Changing Channels JCh Coupli 3 fT eamin Side Menu Title Remove a Waveform Pressing the WAVEFORM OFF button removes the waveform for the currently selected channel If the waveform you want to remove is not already selected select that channel using the channel CH button 1 Press WAVEFORM OFF under the vertical SCALE knob Since the CH 2 light was on when you pressed the WAVEFORM OFF button the channel 2 waveform was removed The channel CH lights now indicate channel 1 Channel 1 has become the selected channel When you remove the last waveform all the CH l
174. do the following steps 1 Connect the waveform to the desired channel input and select that channel 2 Adjust the vertical and horizontal scales and trigger the display or press AUTOSET 3 Press MORE gt Math1 Math2 or Math3 main gt Change Math waveform definition side gt Single Wfm Math main 4 Press Set Single Source to side Repeatedly press the same button until the channel source selected in step 1 appears in the menu label 5 Press Set Function to side Repeatedly press the same button until intg appears in the menu label 6 Press OK Create Math Waveform side to turn on the integral math waveform You should now have your integral math waveform on screen See Fig ure 3 103 Use the Vertical SCALE and POSITION knobs to size and position your waveform as you require TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Tek Run 5 00MS s Sample Math Integral Math Waveform J Change Math waveform definition No Extended Processing Average 2 Source Waveform 1_ __ chi soomvaQ 3 M 10 0ps Chi 520mV Oloo DUE 5 00uvs _ _ 10 05 i Bania ee Mathi Math2 Matha diff ch FFr ch Ege e Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 Zlo Figure 3 103 Integral Math Waveform To Take Cursor Once you have displayed your integrated m
175. e pop up gt Polarity main gt Positive Negative or Either side Positive monitors the slew rate of the positive going edges of pulses The edge must first cross the lower threshold and then cross the upper threshold TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 97 Triggering on Waveforms Negative monitors the slew rate of the negative going edges of pulses The edge must first cross the upper threshold and then cross the lower threshold Either monitors positive and negative going edges of pulses The edge may first cross either threshold and then cross the other Set the Slew Rate The threshold levels and the delta time setting determine the slew rate setting To set these parameters 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Slew Rate pop up gt Thresholds main 2 Press Set to TTL or Set to ECL side to set the upper and lower thresholds to levels appropriate for those to logic families OR 3 Press the upper threshold button and in turn lower threshold button side Use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the values for the high and low thresholds Hint To use the Trigger Bar feature to set the threshold levels on the pulse edge press DISPLAY Readout Options main gt Trigger Bar Style side until Long appears in that menu item The threshold settings determine the voltage component of slew rate Volts Se cond To finish specifying the sl
176. e oscilloscope displays one data point for every acquisition interval Active cursor The cursor that moves when you turn the general purpose knob It is represented in the display by a solid line The readout on the display shows the absolute value of the active cursor Aliasing A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high frequencies or fast transitions A condition that occurs when a oscilloscope digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input signal The waveform displayed on the oscilloscope may have a lower frequency than the actual input signal Amplitude The High waveform value less the Low waveform value TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary UU Glossary 2 AND A logic Boolean function in which the output is true when and only when all the inputs are true On the oscilloscope that is a trigger logic pattern and state function Area Measurement of the waveform area taken over the entire waveform or the gated region Expressed in volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Attenuation The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an attenuating device such as a probe or attenuator That is the ratio of the input measure to the output measure For example a 10X probe will attenuate or reduce the input voltage of a signal by a f
177. e software in the GPIB PC directory type cd GPIB PC 2 Run the IBIC program that came with your GPIB board Type IBIC 3 Type IBFIND DEV1 where DEV1 is the name for the oscilloscope you defined using the IBCONF EXE program that came with the GPIB board TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups NOTE If you defined another name use it instead of DEV1 Also remember that the device address of the oscilloscope as set with the IBCONF EXE program should match the address set in the oscilloscope Utility menu typically use 7 4 Type IBWRT HARDCOPY START NOTE Be sure the oscilloscope Utility menu is set to Talk Listen and not Hardcopy Talk Only or you will get an error message at this step Setting the oscilloscope Utility menu is described under Set Communication Parameters on page 3 166 5 Type IBRDF lt Filename gt where lt Filename gt is a valid DOS file name with which you want to label your hardcopy file It should be lt 8 characters long and up to a 3 character extension For example you could type ibrdf screenl 6 Exit the IBIC program by typing EXIT 7 Copy the data from your file to your hardcopy device Type COPY lt Filename gt lt Output port gt lt B gt where lt Filename gt is the name you defined in step 5 and lt Output port gt is the PC output port your hardcopy device is connected to such as LPT1 or LPT2
178. e 2 12 Although there can be more than one channel displayed the vertical menu and buttons only adjust the selected channel Each menu item in the Vertical menu displays a side menu Right now the Coupling item in the main menu is highlighted which means that the side menu shows the coupling choices At the top of the side menu the menu title shows the channel affected by the menu choices That channel always matches the lighted channel button 7 Press Q side to toggle the selection to 50 Q That changes the input coupling of channel 2 from 1 MQ to 50 Q The channel readout for channel 2 near the bottom of the graticule now shows an Q indicator probes with a level 2 interface automatically select 50 Q but they do not display Q in the readout TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 19 Tutorial Tek Run eller Sample ch2 Coupling lt _ Side Menu Title Impedance Ch2 Reference Indicator 1 ch 20 0mva 100mV M 500ps Chis 20 8mv HEE 50 LEN Bandwidth neS Position Offset Deskew Probe DC full div 2 90 div ov as Functions I 19191 91 91 Oooo o Figure 2 12 The Vertical Main Menu and Coupling Side Menu Assign Controls to Pressing a channel CH button sets the vertical controls to that channel It also Another Channel adds the channel to the display if that waveform is not already
179. e ends of the record These discontinuities cause energy from each discrete frequency to leak over on to adjacent frequencies The result is amplitude error when measuring those frequencies The rectangular window does not modify the waveform record points it generally gives the best frequency resolution because it results in the most narrow lobe width in the FFT output record If the time domain records you measured always had an integer number of cycles you would only need this window Hamming Hanning and Blackman Harris are all somewhat bell shaped widows that taper the waveform record at the record ends The Hanning and Blackman Harris windows taper the data at the end of the record to zero therefore they are generally better choices to eliminate leakage Care should be taken when using bell shaped windows to be sure that the most interesting parts of the signal in the time domain record are positioned in the center region of the window so that the tapering does not cause severe errors TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 209 Using Features for Advanced Applications al th Rectangular Window Hamming Window ra Hanning Window Blackman Harris Window Figure 3 100 FFT Windows and Bandpass Characteristics Waveform Differentiation The Advanced DSP Math capabilities of the TDS Oscilloscope include waveform differentiation This capability allows you to display a derivative math waveform tha
180. e input signal from the vertical system Hardcopy An electronic copy of the display in a format useable by a printer or plotter Hi Res acquisition mode TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only An acquisition mode in which the oscilloscope averages all samples taken during an acquisition interval to create a record point That average results in a higher resolution lower band width waveform That mode only works with real time non interpolated sampling TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary 5 Glossary TU High The value used as 100 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure ments May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the maximum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found above the mid point See Appendix B Algorithms for details Holdoff trigger A specified amount of time after a trigger signal that elapses before the trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal Trigger holdoff helps ensure a stable display a Horizontal bar cursors The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the voltage parameters of a waveform The oscilloscope displays the value of the active moveable cursor with respect to ground and the voltage value between the bars Interpolation The
181. e line m Do not use the 15 K length nor if your oscilloscope model is so equipped and of the record lengths 30 K 75 K or 130 K to impulse test using FFTs These record lengths do not allow easy alignment of the zero reference point for phase measurements m Trigger on the input impulse Adjust Phase Suppression Your source waveform record may have a noise component with phase angles that randomly vary from pi to pi This noise could make the phase display unusable In such a case use phase suppression to control the noise TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 205 Using Features for Advanced Applications FFT Windows 3 206 You specify the phase suppression level in dB with respect to 1 Vrms If the magnitude of the frequency is greater than this threshold then its phase angle will be displayed However if it is less than this threshold then the phase angle will be set to zero and be displayed as zero degrees or radians The waveform reference indicator at the left side of the graticule indicates the level where phase is zero for phase FFTs It is easier to determine the level of phase suppression you need if you first create a frequency FFT math waveform of the source and then create a phase FFT waveform of the same source Do the following steps to use a cursor measurement to determine the suppression level 1 Do steps 1 through 7 of To Create an FFT that begins on page 3 193 Select dBV RMS side fo
182. e to front panel signal outputs labeled Probe Compensation SIGNAL and GND If you are calibrating a current probe connect the calibration adapter to the front panel and the probe to the adapter 2 Press Compensate Gain to proceed OK Press Clear Menu to exit Compensate Gain 100mY M 500s Chi OIOIG CI oO OCC IC OC Figure 3 69 Probe Cal Menu and Gain Compensation Display m If gain compensation did not complete successfully you may get a Probe is not connected message examine the probe connections to the digitizing oscilloscope be sure the probe tip is properly installed in its retractor etc and repeat step 10 m If gain compensation did not complete successfully you may get the message Compensation Error This error implies that the probe gain 2 error and or offset 50 mV is too great to be compensated You can substitute another probe and continue Have your probe checked by service personnel 12 If the Probe Offset Compensation message is displayed continue with step 16 otherwise continue with step 13 13 If the Compensation Error message is displayed continue with step 14 otherwise continue with step 19 14 Press SHIFT UTILITY gt System main gt Diag Err pop up gt Error Log main If there are too many error messages to be seen on screen rotate the general purpose knob clockwise to scroll to the las
183. e top part of the display has an icon indicating where the trigger occurs in the waveform record You select in the Horizontal menu what percentage of the waveform record will contain pretrigger information Displaying pretrigger information can be valuable when troubleshooting For example if you are trying to find the cause of an unwanted glitch in your test circuit it might trigger on the glitch and make the pretrigger period large enough to capture data before the glitch By analyzing what happened before the glitch you may uncover clues about its source TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 67 Triggering on Waveforms Slope and Level ee a Delayed Trigger System The slope control determines whether the oscilloscope finds the trigger point on the rising or the falling edge of a signal See Figure 3 34 You set trigger slope by first selecting Slope in the Main Trigger menu and then selecting between the rising or falling slope icons in the side menu that appears The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs See Figure 3 34 The oscilloscope lets you set the main trigger level with the trigger MAIN LEVEL knob Positive Going Edge Negative Going Edge Trigger level can be adjusted vertically X i kg Trigger slope can be positive or negative Figure 3 34 Slope and Level Controls Help Define the Trigger The oscilloscope also has a delayed trigger system that provi
184. eated more than one template you can compare one channel to one template and the other channel to another template Now specify the action to take if waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test template and turn on limit testing 1 Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Limit Test Setup main to bring up a side menu of possible actions TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications 2 Ensure that the side button corresponding to the desired action reads ON m If you want to send a hardcopy command when waveform data exceeds the limits set toggle Hardcopy if Condition Met side to ON You can set the hardcopy system to send the hardcopy to the file system Do not forget to set up the hardcopy system See Hardcopy on page 3 164 for details m If you want the bell to ring when waveform data exceeds the limits set toggle Ring Bell if Condition Met side to ON m If you want the oscilloscope to stop when waveform data exceeds the limits set toggle Stop After Limit Test Condition Met side to ON NOTE The button labeled Stop After Limit Test Condition Met corresponds to the Limit Test Condition Met menu item in the Stop After main menu You can turn this button on in the Limit Test Setup menu but you cannot turn it off To turn it off press Stop After and specify one of the other choices in the Stop After side menu 3 Ensure that Limit Test side reads ON If it reads OFF
185. econds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative Timing measurement The duration of a burst Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Table 3 10 Measurement definitions cont Cycle RMS Definition Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Delay Timing measurement The time between the MidR ef crossings of two different traces or the gated region of the traces Fall Time Timing measurement Time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a High Ref value default 90 to a Low Ref value default 10 of its final value Frequency Timing measurement for the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second High The value used as 100 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise tine measurements Calculated using either the min max or the histogram method The min max method uses the maximum value found The histogram method uses the most common value found above the mid point Measured over the entire waveform or gated
186. ect H Bars V Bars or Paired H Bars The value after A shows the voltage difference between the cursors The value after shows the voltage of the selected cursor relative to ground See Figure 3 63 With the video trigger option you can also display the voltage in IRE units V Bars The value after A shows the time or frequency difference between the cursors The value after shows the time frequency of the selected cursor relative to the trigger point With the video trigger option you can also display the line number TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only In FastFrame mode the shows the time position of the selected cursor relative to the trigger point of the frame that the selected cursor is in The A shows the time difference between the two cursors only if both cursors are in the same frame TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Paired The value after one A shows the voltage difference between the two Xs the other A shows the time or frequency difference between the two long vertical bars The value after shows the voltage at the X of the selected cursor relative to ground See Figure 3 64 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only In FastFrame mode the A shows the time difference between the two cursors only if both cursors are in the same frame a gt Tek Run 100kKS 5 Average cursor Cursor Readout H Bars Non selected Cursor Function
187. ed Only 3 108 Delayed Runs After Main 3 22 3 108 Delayed Scale 3 22 Delayed Triggerable 3 22 3 110 Extended acquisition length 3 22 FastFrame 3 60 FastFrame Setup 3 60 Fit to screen 3 22 Frame Count 3 60 Frame Length 3 60 Frame 3 60 Horiz Pos 3 22 Horiz Scale 3 22 Intensified 3 108 3 110 Main Scale 3 22 Record Length 3 21 Set to 10 3 22 Set to 50 3 22 Set to 90 3 22 Time Base 3 108 Trigger Position 3 21 HORIZONTAL MENU button 3 68 3 108 Horizontal POSITION knob 3 19 3 51 Horizontal Readouts 3 18 Horizontal SCALE knob 3 19 3 51 HPGL 3 165 HPGL Hardcopy menu 3 167 Hue Color menu 3 46 T O Status menu 3 179 TO Utility menu 3 166 Icons File Utilities menu 3 153 3 156 3 162 3 164 Independent Cursor menu 3 130 Infinite Persistence Display menu 3 39 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Installation 1 6 InstaVu 3 55 Glossary 6 InstaVu mode How to use 3 56 Modes incompatible with 3 58 Vs Normal DSO mode illustrated 3 23 3 57 Waveform capture rate 3 55 Integral math waveform 3 215 applications 3 215 automated measurements of 3 219 derivation of 3 215 magnifying 3 214 3 220 procedure for displaying 3 216 procedure for measuring 3 217 record length of 3 215 Integration Waveform 3 215 Intensified Samples Display menu 3 39 Intensified Horizontal menu 3 108 3 110 Intensity Glo
188. eform Save Recall Waveform menu 3 155 Save Recall Acquisition menu 3 156 3 159 Save Recall SETUP button 2 10 3 11 3 152 3 160 Save Recall Setup menu 3 152 factory status 3 152 File Utilities 3 154 Recall Factory Setup 3 153 Recall Saved Setup 3 153 Save Current Setup 3 152 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index user status 3 152 Save Recall WAVEFORM button 3 155 3 160 Save Recall Waveform menu 3 155 active status 3 155 Autosave 3 159 Delete Refs 3 157 empty status 3 155 File Utilities 3 160 Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 File 3 158 Save Acq 3 156 Save Format 3 157 Save Waveform 3 155 Saving Acquisitions 3 154 Waveforms 3 154 Saving and recalling acquisitions 3 154 Saving and recalling setups 2 28 3 151 Saving and recalling waveforms 3 154 Saving Waveforms and Setups 3 151 Scale vertical 3 201 3 213 3 219 seconds Cursor menu 3 131 Security bracket 2 5 SELECT button 3 130 Glossary 11 Select Measrmnt Measure menu 3 117 3 122 3 135 Selected waveform Glossary 11 Self test 1 8 Serial number 2 5 Service Assurance A 7 Set 1st Source to More menu 3 190 Set 2nd Source to More menu 3 190 Set Function to More menu 3 189 SET LEVEL TO 50 button 3 69 Set Levels in units Measure menu 3 121 Set operator to More menu 3 190 Set Single Source to More menu 3 189 3 190 Set Thresholds Main Trigger menu 3 82 3 85 Set to 10 Horizonta
189. eforms Trigger Readout To quickly determine the settings of some key trigger parame ters check the Trigger readout at the bottom of the display See Figure 3 36 The readouts differ for edge logic and pulse triggers Main Trigger Slope Rising Edge Main Trigger Source Ch 1 Main Time Base Time Div Main Trigger Main Time Base Level U 6 GaS Figure 3 36 Example Trigger Readouts Edge Trigger Selected Record View To determine where the trigger point is located in the waveform record and with respect to the display check the record view at the top of the display See Figure 3 37 Trigger Position and Level Indicators To see the trigger point and level on the waveform display check the graphic indicators Trigger Position and Trigger Bar Figure 3 37 shows the trigger point indicator and trigger level bar Both the trigger point indicator and level bar are displayed from the Display menu See Set Display Readout Options on page 3 40 for more information The trigger point indicator shows position It can be positioned horizontally off screen especially with long record length settings The trigger level bar shows only the trigger level It remains on screen regardless of the horizontal position as long as the channel providing the trigger source is displayed Trigger Status Screen To see a more comprehensive status listing of the settings for the main and dela
190. el selection buttons and that the FFT math waveform is selected in the More main menu Press CURSOR Mode main gt Independent side gt Func tion main gt H Bars side Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor solid line to the top or to any amplitude on the waveform you choose Press SELECT to select the other cursor Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor to the bottom or to any amplitude on the waveform you choose Read the amplitude between the two cursors from the A readout Read the amplitude of the selected cursor relative to either 1 Vrms 0 dB ground 0 volts or the zero phase level 0 degrees or 0 radians from the readout The waveform reference indicator at the left side of the graticule indicates the level where phase is zero for phase FFTs TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Figure 3 95 shows the cursor measurement of a frequency magnitude on an FFT The readout reads 0 dB because it is aligned with the 1 Vgms level The A readout reads 24 4 dB indicating the magnitude of the frequency it is measuring is 24 4 dB relative to 1 Vrms The source waveform is turned off in the display The cursor units will be in dB or volts for FFTs measuring magnitude and in degrees or radians for those FFTs measuring phase The cursor unit depends on the selection made for Set FFT Vert Scale to side See step 7 on
191. emplate limits to center screen m If you are comparing each waveform to its own template the position of each waveform template will track that of its waveform m If you are comparing two or more waveforms to a common template that template will track the position of the failed waveform If more than one waveform fails during the same acquisition the template will track the position of the waveform in the highest numbered channel For example CH 2 is higher than CH 1 The TDS Oscilloscope provides a means for you to mathematically manipulate your waveforms For example you might have a waveform clouded by background noise You can obtain a cleaner waveform by subtracting the background noise from your original waveform This section describes the invert add subtract divide and multiply waveform math features See Fast Fourier Transforms on page 3 191 Waveform Differ entiation on page 3 210 and Waveform Integration on page 3 215 for informa tion on Advanced DSP Math features TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications To Use Single Wfm Math To perform waveform math use the More menu Figure 3 90 The More menu allows you to display define and manipulate three math waveforms the following steps explain how to create a math waveform based on a single source waveform 1 Press MORE gt Math Math2 or Math3 main gt Change Math waveform definition side gt Single Wfm
192. en two points in a circuit under test Differential probes let you simultaneously measure two points and to display the difference between the two voltages Active differential probes are stand alone products designed to be used with 50 Q inputs The same characteristics that apply to active probes apply to active differential probes In some small geometry or dense circuitry applications such as surface mounted devices SMD a hand held probe is too big to be practical You can instead use fixtured or probe card mounted active probes or buffered amplifiers to precisely connect your instrument to your device under test These probes have the same electrical characteristics as high speed active probes but use a smaller mechanical design Current probes enable you to directly observe and measure current waveforms which can be very different from voltage signals Tektronix current probes are unique in that they can measure from DC to 1 GHz Two types of current probes are available one that measures AC current only and AC DC probes that utilize the Hall effect to accurately measure the AC and DC components of a signal AC only current probes use a transformer to convert AC current flux into a voltage signal to the oscilloscope and have a frequency response from a few hundred hertz up to 1 GHz AC DC current probes include Hall effect semiconductor devices and provide frequency response from DC to 50 MHz TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C
193. endix B Algorithms on page B 1 Taking Cursor Measurements The TDS Oscilloscope provides cursors that measure the difference either in time or voltage between two locations in a waveform record This section describes cursors how to select their type and mode how to display them and how to use them to take measurements Cursor measurements are fast and easy to take Cursors are made up of two markers that you position with the general purpose knob You move one cursor independently or both cursors in tandem depending on the cursor mode As you position the cursors readouts on the display report and update measurement information 3 126 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Cursor Types There are three cursor types horizontal bar vertical bar and paired see Figure 3 61 YV x Horizontal Bar Cursors Vertical Bar Cursors Paired Cursors Figure 3 61 Cursor Types Horizontal bar cursors measure vertical parameters typically volts Vertical bar cursors measure horizontal parameters typically time or frequency Paired cursors measure both vertical parameters typically volts and horizontal parameters typically time simultaneously Look at Figure 3 61 Note that each of the two paired cursors has a long vertical bar paired with an X The Xs measures vertical parameters typically volts the long vertical bars measure horizontal parameters t
194. ength If you are shipping the oscilloscope to a Tektronix field office for repair attach a tag to the oscilloscope showing the instrument owner and address the name of the person to contact about the instrument the instrument type and the serial number Wrap the oscilloscope with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent material to protect the finish Cushion the oscilloscope in the shipping carton by tightly packing dunnage or urethane foam on all sides between the carton and the oscilloscope Allow 7 5 cm 3 in on all sides top and bottom Seal the shipping carton with shipping tape or an industrial stapler NOTE Do not ship the oscilloscope with a disk inside the disk drive When the disk is inside the drive the disk release button sticks out This makes the button more prone to damage than otherwise TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual C 1 Appendix C Packaging for Shipment C 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual a nr Appendix D Probe Selection The TDS Oscilloscope can use a variety of Tektronix probes for taking different kinds of measurements To help you decide what type of probe you need this section introduces the five major types of probes passive active current optical and time to voltage probes See Appendix A Options and Accessories for a list of the optional probes available see your Tektronix Products Catalog for more information about a given probe NOTE With some T
195. ensation Affects Signals 4 If you need to change the input impedance press Coupling main Then toggle the side menu selection Q to get the correct impedance TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 5 TDS 500C and 700C models only Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Mode main gt Hi Res side 6 TDS 600B models only Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Mode main gt Average side Use the keypad to set Averages to 5 7 Adjust the probe until you see a square wave with a perfectly flat top on the display Figure 3 2 shows where the adjustment is located Figure 3 2 P6139A Probe Adjustment Input Impedance To ensure proper coupling of your input signals to the oscilloscope consider the Considerations following points when you use 50 Q coupling with any channel m The oscilloscope does not accurately display frequencies under 200 kHz if AC coupling is selected m The oscilloscope reduces the maximum volts division setting for the channel to 1 V from 10 V to 10 V from 100 V with a X10 probe attached since input amplitudes appropriate for the higher settings would overload the 50 Q input TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 7 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Find More Information m The oscilloscope switches to 50 Q and disables AC coupling and switches coupling to DC if AC is selected if you connect an active probe such as the P6245 probe Such p
196. enu 3 17 Function Cursor menu 3 129 3 130 Fuse 1 6 2 5 G Gated Measurements 3 118 Glossary 4 Gating Measure menu 3 119 General purpose high input resistance probes D 1 General purpose knob 2 7 2 25 Glossary 5 Glitch trigger 3 89 3 90 Glossary 5 How to set up 3 91 Glitch Main Trigger menu 3 93 Goes FALSE Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 Goes TRUE Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 GPIB 2 5 3 174 3 178 Glossary 5 Connecting to 3 176 Interconnect cabling 3 175 Interface requirements 3 174 Procedures for using 3 176 Protocols 3 174 Selecting and configuring the port 3 176 Typical configuration 3 175 GPIB Programming F 1 GPIB Hardcopy menu 3 167 GPIB Utility menu 3 177 Graticule 3 42 Glossary 5S Graticule measurements 3 132 Graticule Display menu 3 42 Grid Display menu 3 42 Ground coupling Glossary 5 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 buttons 3 51 H H Bars Cursor menu 3 129 3 130 H Limit Acquire menu 3 185 Hamming window 3 195 Hanning window 3 195 Hard Disk Option HD A 1 Hardcopy 3 164 Glossary 5 How to print controller 3 172 How to print no controller 3 169 How to save to disk 3 171 How to set up for 3 166 Index 6 Printing a hardcopy 3 164 Spool 3 170 Hardcopy Talk Only Utility menu 3 166 HARDCOPY button 3 160 3 167 3 177 Hardcopy if Condition Met Acquire menu 3 187 Hardcopy menu BMP Color 3 167 BMP Mono 3 167 Clear Spool 3
197. er Stop After on page 3 35 for further discussion of single sequence acquisitions Single sequence triggering is not available in InstaVu mode see Incompatible Modes on page 3 58 To Check Trigger Status To ascertain the state and setup of the triggering circuit use the trigger status lights readout and screen Trigger Status Lights To quickly determine trigger status check the three status lights TRIG D READY and ARM in the Trigger control area See Fig ure 3 35 m When TRIG D is lighted it means the oscilloscope has recognized a valid trigger and is filling the posttrigger portion of the waveform m When READY is lighted it means the oscilloscope can accept a valid trigger event and the oscilloscope is waiting for that event to occur m When ARM is lighted it means the trigger circuitry is filling the pretrigger portion of the waveform record m When both TRIG D and READY are lighted it means the oscilloscope has recognized a valid main trigger and is waiting for a delayed trigger When the oscilloscope recognizes a delayed trigger it will fill in the posttrigger portion of the delayed waveform m When ARM TRIG D and READY are all off the digitizer is stopped m When ARM TRIG D and READY are all lighted TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only FastFrame or InstaVu modes are in effect No trigger status monitoring is taking place 3 70 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Wav
198. erential probe FET DC to 400 MHz P6247 Active high bandwidth differential probe FET DC to 1 GHz P6101B 1X 15 MHz Passive probe P6156 10X 3 5 GHz Passive low capacitance low impedance Zo probe Provides 100X when ordered as P6156 Option 25 P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive probe P6217 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 4 GHz DC offset P6204 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 1 GHz DC offset P6563A Passive SMD probe 20X 500 MHz TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual A 5 Appendix A Options and Accessories A 6 P5100 High Voltage Passive probe 2 5 kV DC to 250 MHz P5205 High Voltage differential probe 1 3 kV differential DC to 100 MHz ADA 400A differential preamp switchable gain AM 503S DC AC 50 MHz Current measurement system AC DC Supplied with A6302 Current Probe AM503S Option 05 DC AC 100 MHz Current measurement system Supplied with A6312 Current Probe AM 503S Option 03 DC AC 100 A Current measurement system AC DC Supplied with A6303 Current Probe TCP 202 Current Probe DC to 50 Mhz 15 A DC P6021 AC Current probe 120 Hz to 60 MHz P6022 AC Current probe 935 kHz to 120 MHz CT 1 Current probe designed for permanent or semi permanent in circuit installation 25 kHz to 1 GHz 50 Q input CT 2 Current probe designed for permanent or semi permanent in circuit installation 1 2 kHz to 200 MHz 50 Q input CT 4 Current Transformer f
199. es Supported operators are and NOTE If you select for multiply in step 4 the cursor feature will measure amplitude in the units volts squared VV rather than in volts V a Tek Run 100kS 5 Sample Change Math Definition Set ist Source to chi i i p Set A T iia EE a g wei sod operator to oe Set 2nd Source to Ch2 Select the type of Math function to define from the bottom row of bezel buttons Define the new function using the side buttons When you are satisfied with the selections press Create Math Wim Press CLEAR MENU to return to the More menu Chi without creating a Math waveform OK Create ingle WfimiDT EUAS iii PET Math Math Oooo o SSES Figure 3 91 Dual Waveform Math Main and Side Menus 5 Press OK Create Math Wfm side to perform the function TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications To Average a Math You can also select whether or not you wish to average a certain math waveform Waveform to do so perform the following steps 1 Fast Fourier Transforms Press MORE gt Math1 Math2 or Math3 main to select the math waveform to be averaged Press Average side and enter a value with the general purpose knob or the keypad Any math operations you select for the waveform are performed on
200. escribes how to use the following two features m Status which displays a snapshot of system display trigger waveform and I O settings Help which displays a screen of brief information about each oscilloscope control when that control is operated To display the status of the internal systems perform the following steps 1 Press SHIFT STATUS gt Status main 2 Select a status snapshot from the side menu System displays information about the Horizontal Zoom Acquisition Measure and Hardcopy systems See Figure 3 85 This display also tells you the firmware version Display provides parameter information about the display and color systems Trigger displays parameter information about the triggers Waveforms displays information about waveforms including live math and reference waveforms T O displays information about the I O port s Histo Masks displays information about histograms and masks TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 179 Determining Status and Accessing Help P Tek Run TOOKS S Sample Firmware Version eee version FV 3 8e Status x SA Tris R Pos Snapshot Main 50Cus Main 50 500 10 divs 50 0 Dlyd 5 ys Runs After t6ns System OFF 250 2 zoom Status Vert Horiz lock Dual Zoom DZ Offset OFF 2 8 20 All OFF 5 00ms Display Acquire Mode Repet Stop Sampie On R S button 500 imit Test St Rell OFF OFF OFF Trigger 0 Limit Sour
201. ess save recall SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side D Note that a clock icon appears on screen The oscilloscope displays this icon when performing operations that take longer than several seconds 4 Press SET LEVEL TO 50 see Figure 2 4 to be sure the oscilloscope triggers on the input signal A TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL p TRIG D READY DELAYED TRIG arm TRIGGER MENU SET LEVEL TO 50 SET LEVEL TO 50 Button gt __ Figure 2 4 Trigger Controls Examine the Display Read the following information to become familiar with the oscilloscope display Elements before doing the examples Figure 2 5 shows the display that results from the oscilloscope reset There are several important points to observe m The trigger level bar shows that the waveform is triggered at a level near 50 of its amplitude from step 4 m The trigger position indicator shows that the trigger position of the waveform is located at the horizontal center of the graticule m The channel reference indicator shows the vertical position of channel 1 with no input signal This indicator points to the ground level for the channel when its vertical offset is set to 0 V in the vertical menu when vertical offset is not set to O V it points to the vertical offset level 2 12 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial m The trigger readout shows that the oscilloscope is tri
202. ete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific points in time Digitizing is composed of two steps sampling and quantizing Display system The part of the oscilloscope that shows waveforms measurements menu items status and other parameters Edge Trigger Triggering occurs when the oscilloscope detects the source passing through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope Envelope acquisition mode A mode in which the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform that shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions Equivalent time sampling ET TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only A sampling mode in which the oscilloscope acquires signals over many repetitions of the event These oscilloscopes use a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling which uses an internal clock that runs asynchro nously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The oscillo scope takes samples continuously independent of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger Although the samples are taken sequentially in time they are random with respect to the trigger Extinction Ratio The ratio of High optical power to Low optical power Fall time A measurement of the time it takes for the trailing edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef value typically 90 to a LowRef value typically 10 of its amplitude
203. ew rate set the time component by doing the following steps 4 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Slew Rate pop up gt Trigger When main gt Delta Time side 5 Use the general purpose knob or keypad to set the delta time value for slew rate NOTE The menu item Slew Rate in the side menu is not a button label rather it is a readout of the slew rate setting This readout varies as you vary the Delta Time setting this side menu and as you vary either of the threshold settings from the Thresholds menu You adjust those parameters to adjust slew rate you can t adjust slew rate directly 3 98 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Set to Trig When The oscilloscope compares the pulse edge of the trigger source against the slew rate setting read out in the Trigger When menu To select whether to trigger on edges with slew rates faster than or slower than that indicated in readout do the following step Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Slew Rate pop up gt Trigger When main gt Trigger if Faster Than or Trigger if Slower Than side See Figure 3 48 NOTE If you select Trigger if Faster Than and the oscilloscope does not trigger it may be because the pulse edge is too fast rather than too slow To check the edge speed switch to edge triggering Then trigger on the pulse edge and determ
204. f Faster Than Main Trigger menu 3 99 Trigger if Slower Than Main Trigger menu 3 99 Trigger Level Bar Readout 3 40 3 61 Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob 2 15 3 68 TRIGGER MENU button 3 72 3 73 3 81 3 85 3 86 3 91 3 93 3 97 Trigger Point Readout 3 40 3 61 Trigger Position Horizontal menu 3 21 Trigger Status Lights 3 70 Trigger When Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 3 98 Trigger delayed How to set up 3 108 Trigger edge How to set up 3 73 Trigger glitch How to set up 3 91 Trigger runt How to set up 3 93 3 112 Trigger slew rate How to set up 3 97 3 112 Trigger Status menu 3 179 Trigger telecom How to set up 3 104 Trigger timeout How to set up 3 101 3 112 Trigger width How to set up 3 96 3 112 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index Triggering on Waveforms 3 63 Triggering Auto mode Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 True for less than Main Trigger menu 3 83 True for more than Main Trigger menu 3 83 Type Logic Main Trigger menu Logic 3 81 3 85 3 86 Pulse 3 97 Type Pulse Main Trigger menu 3 91 Type Main Trigger menu 3 72 3 73 3 96 3 101 Pulse 3 93 U Undershoot Glossary 8 user Saved setup status 3 152 UTILITY button 3 142 3 166 3 176 Utility Menu OK Erase Ref amp Panel Memory 3 153 Tek Secure Erase Memory 3 153 Utility menu 3 166 Configure 3 166 3 177 GPIB 3 177 Hardcopy 3 177 Hardcopy Talk O
205. figures the port for controller based system operation Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to define the address Hardcopy Talk Only configures the port for the hardcopy output without controller supervision Once so configured the oscilloscope will send the hardcopy data to any listeners on the bus when the HARDCOPY button is pressed Pressing HARDCOPY with the port configured any other way causes an error and the oscilloscope responds with a message saying the selected hardcopy port is currently unavailable Off Bus disconnects the oscilloscope from the bus Tek Run 100kS 5 Sample GPIB Address 1 GPIB Configuration E Talk Listen Address aieanen GPIB Configuration Menu Hardcopy Talk Only Off Bus Oloo 200mv C M 500s Chif 248mv Configure System Port ithe lt t O gt lt cpie gt gc ems een eee ee ee ee es Figure 3 84 Utility Menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 177 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Find More Information See Printing a Hardcopy on page 3 164 See the TDS Programmer Manual disk 3 178 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual a ame iS Sn a Determining Status and Accessing Help Displaying Status The TDS Oscilloscope can display the status of its internal systems It also provides an on line help system This section d
206. finitions of the logic functions for both pattern and state triggers Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Pattern pop up gt Define Logic main gt AND OR NAND or NOR side Set Trigger When To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met Goes TRUE or when the logic condition is not met Goes FALSE do the following step Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Pattern pop up gt Trigger When main gt Goes TRUE or Goes FALSE side The side menu items TRUE for less than and TRUE for greater than are used to time qualify a pattern trigger See the procedure Define a Time Qualified Pattern Trigger that follows for instructions To Set Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to To Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see the descriptions Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 To Define a Time Qualified You can also time qualify a pattern logic trigger That is you specify a time that Pattern Trigger the boolean logic function AND NAND OR or NOR must be TRUE logic high To specify the time limit as well as the type of time qualification greater or less than the time limit specified for a pattern trigger do the following steps 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Cl
207. for each displayed channel the selected channel is in inverse video See Figure 3 6 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Acquisition View t gt a p Record View HH eF E Channel Reference Icon Original P osition Positioned Vertically Positioned Horizontally Original Scale Scaled Vertically Scaled Horizontally Figure 3 5 Scaling and Positioning To Change Vertical Scale The TDS Oscilloscope permits you to change vertical scale and position quickly and Position from the front panel using dedicated control knobs To change the vertical scale and position 1 Turn the vertical SCALE knob Note only the scale of the selected wave form changes As you turn the vertical SCALE knob clockwise the value decreases resulting in higher resolution because you see a smaller part of the wave form As you turn it counterclockwise the scale increases allowing you to see more of the waveform but with lower resolution 2 Turn the vertical POSITION knob Again note that only the selected waveform changes position TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 15 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 3
208. form Drawn Acquisition Intervals Mode Record Points on CRT Interval 1 2 3 4 Interval 1 2 3 4 Uses first sample in interval Use for fastest acquisition rate This is the default mode CID C OC amp X UN y A Uses highest and lowest samples in two intervals Use to reveal aliasing and for glitch detection Provides the benefits of enveloping with the speed of a single acquisition K IN Pi e eee Fa E e a s s o t Hi Res e Calculates average of all samples in interval TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Only Use to reduce apparent noise Provides the benefits of averaging with the speed of a single acquisition AU Su Multiple Waveform Acquisitions Acquisition Three Acquisitions from One Source Mode I CO ASS oj Waveform Drawn on CRT Acquisition 1 2 3 Sgt aries ga Envelope AS Finds highest and Uses Peak Detect Mode for Each Acquisition lowest record points over ian 2 many acquisitions Use to reveal variations in the signal across time
209. fset Position and Scale When creating integrated math waveforms from live channel waveforms consider the following topics Note the following requirements for obtaining a good display m You should scale and position the source waveform so it is contained on screen Off screen waveforms may be clipped which will result in errors in the integral waveform m You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your integral waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so it is clipped m When using the vertical scale knob to scale the source waveform note that it also scales your integral waveform DC Offset The source waveforms that you connect to the oscilloscope often have a DC offset component The oscilloscope integrates this offset along with the time varying portions of your waveform Even a few divisions of offset in the source waveform may be enough to ensure that the integral waveform saturates clips especially with long record lengths TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 219 Using Features for Advanced Applications 3 220 Using Zoom You may be able to avoid saturating your integral waveform if you choose a shorter record length Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Record Length main Reducing the sample rate use the HORIZONTAL SCALE knob with the source channel selected might also prevent clipping Yo
210. g 3 17 Trigger 3 67 Coupling Waveforms 3 5 Coupling Delayed Trigger menu 3 111 Coupling Main Trigger menu 3 74 Coupling Vertical menu 3 17 Create Directory File Utilities menu 3 163 Create Limit Test Template Acquire menu 3 184 Create Measrmnt Measure Delay menu 3 123 Cross Hair Display menu 3 42 Current probes D 4 Cursor Horizontal bar 3 127 Measurements 3 126 modes 3 127 Paired 3 127 readout 3 128 Setting adjustment response speed 3 131 Vertical bar 3 127 CURSOR button 3 129 Cursor menu 3 129 3 196 3 217 1 seconds Hz 3 131 Amplitude Units 3 131 Base 3 131 Function 3 129 3 130 H Bars 3 129 3 130 Independent 3 130 IRE NTSC 3 131 seconds 3 131 Time Units 3 131 Tracking 3 130 Video Line Number 3 131 Cursor readout H Bars 3 196 3 212 3 217 Paired 3 212 Paired cursors 3 198 3 219 V Bars 3 198 3 212 3 218 Cursors 3 126 Glossary 3 How to use 3 129 with derivative waveforms 3 212 with FFT waveforms 3 196 with integral waveforms 3 217 Cycle area 3 114 Glossary 3 Cycle mean 3 114 Glossary 3 Cycle RMS 3 115 Glossary 3 Index 3 Index D Data Source Main Trigger menu 3 86 Date Time On hardcopies 3 168 To set 3 169 DC coupling Glossary 3 DC offset 3 201 for DC correction of FFTs 3 201 with math waveforms 3 201 3 219 DC Main Trigger menu 3 74 Default Model s xiv Define Inputs Main Tri
211. g the general purpose knob or the keypad Low lets you enter the low threshold using the general purpose knob or the keypad Level lets you enter the trigger level using the general purpose knob or the keypad Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at 1 4 V Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at 1 3 V Set to 50 fixes the trigger level to approximately 50 of the peak to peak value of the trigger source signal When AMI is selected this selection measures the peak to peak level and sets the upper threshold to 75 and the lower threshold to 25 If you select a DSO mask the trigger level is set correctly do not press the front panel button SET LEVEL TO 50 The TDS Oscilloscope provides a main time base and a delayed time base The delayed time base like the main time base requires a trigger signal and an input source dedicated to that signal You can only use delay with respect to the main edge trigger and certain classes of main pulse triggers This section describes how to delay the acquisition of waveforms TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Delayed Triggerable After Time Delayed Triggerable After Events Delayed Triggerable After Events Time TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual There are two different ways to delay the acquisition of waveforms delayed runs after main and delayed triggerable Only delayed triggerable uses the delayed trigger system Delayed runs af
212. gger menu 3 72 Low 3 115 Glossary 7 Low impedance Zo probes D 2 Low Ref Measure menu 3 121 Lubrication E 2 Main menu Glossary 7 Main menu buttons 2 3 Glossary 7 Main Scale Horizontal menu 3 22 Main Trigger Menu Falling edge 3 76 Rising edge 3 76 Main Trigger menu 3 72 3 73 3 81 3 85 3 86 3 91 3 93 3 97 AC 3 74 Accept Glitch 3 93 AND 3 83 3 85 Auto 3 75 Ch1 Ch2 3 74 3 82 3 85 3 86 3 92 3 93 3 94 3 96 3 97 3 101 Class 3 96 3 101 Class Glitch 3 91 Clock Source 3 86 Coupling 3 74 Data Source 3 86 DC 3 74 Define Inputs 3 82 3 85 3 87 Define Logic 3 83 3 85 Delta Time 3 98 Edge 3 72 3 73 Either 3 92 3 94 3 97 Falling edge 3 85 3 86 Index 8 Glitch 3 93 Goes FALSE 3 83 3 85 Goes TRUE 3 83 3 85 HF Rej 3 74 Level 3 76 3 93 3 97 3 102 LF Rej 3 74 Mode amp Holdoff 3 75 NAND 3 83 3 85 Negative 3 92 3 94 3 97 Noise Rej 3 74 NOR 3 83 3 85 Normal 3 75 OR 3 83 3 85 Polarity 3 94 3 97 Polarity and Width 3 92 Positive 3 92 3 94 3 97 Pulse 3 72 3 93 3 96 3 101 Reject Glitch 3 93 Rising edge 3 85 3 86 Runt 3 93 Set Thresholds 3 82 3 85 Set to 50 3 69 3 76 3 93 3 102 Set to ECL 3 76 3 93 3 98 3 102 Set to TTL 3 76 3 93 3 98 3 102 Slope 3 75 Source 3 74 3 92 3 94 3 96 3 97 3 101 State 3 85 3 86 Telecom 3 104 Thresh
213. gger menu 3 82 3 85 3 87 Define Logic Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 Delay by Events Delayed Trigger menu 3 110 Delay by Time Delayed Trigger menu 3 110 Delay by Delayed Trigger menu 3 110 Delay measurement 3 122 Glossary 3 Delay time Glossary 3 Delay To Measure Delay menu 3 122 Delayed Only Horizontal menu 3 108 Delayed Runs After Main 3 68 Delayed Runs After Main Horizontal menu 3 22 3 108 Delayed Scale Horizontal menu 3 22 Delayed time base Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 DELAYED TRIG button 3 68 3 108 Delayed trigger 3 68 3 107 3 112 How to set up 3 108 Delayed Trigger menu 3 108 3 112 Chi Ch2 3 111 Coupling 3 111 Delay by 3 110 Delay by Events 3 110 Delay by Time 3 110 Falling edge 3 111 Level 3 112 Rising edge 3 111 Set to 50 3 112 Set to ECL 3 112 Set to TTL 3 112 Slope 3 111 Source 3 111 DELAYED TRIGGER OUTPUT BNC 2 5 Delayed Triggerable 3 68 Delayed Triggerable Horizontal menu 3 22 3 110 Delete Refs Save Recall Waveform menu 3 157 Delete File Utilities menu 3 162 Delta Time Main Trigger menu 3 98 Derivative math waveform 3 211 applications 3 210 derivation of 3 211 procedure for displaying 3 211 Index 4 procedure for measuring 3 212 record length of 3 211 Desk Top Publishing 3 166 Hardcopy 3 151 Deskew 3 143 Glossary 3 Deskew Vertical menu 3 143 Deskjet 3 165 Deskjet Hardcopy menu 3 167
214. ggering on channel 1 Ch1 on a rising edge and that the trigger level is about 200 300 mV m The time base readout shows that the main time base is set to a horizontal scale of 500 us div m The channel readout indicates that channel 1 Ch1 is displayed with DC coupling In AC coupling appears after the volts div readout The oscilloscope always displays channel at reset Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample Recall Factory Trigger Level Bar Trigger P osition Indicator Channel Reference Indicator OIOI Trigger Readout ee er ee ae era Time Base Readout gts selb eda ewe gee O PEE Channel Readout lee EN Ma N 3 cr i N a N OK 1 00 O M 500s Chi 220mV i i i Confirm i Factory Init e pee H PIE ere EEE A Saved Current Factory Utilities Setup Setup Setu DIGIC O IC G Figure 2 5 The Display After Factory Initialization Right now the channel time base and trigger readouts appear in the graticule area because a menu is displayed You can press the CLEAR MENU button at any time to remove any menus and to move the readouts below the graticule Example 1 Displaying a Waveform The TDS Oscilloscope provides front panel knobs for you to adjust a waveform or it can automatically set up its controls to display a waveform Do the following tasks to learn how to adjust a waveform a
215. grams display the voltage of Mean 1 StdDev Mean 2 StdDev Mean 3 StdDev Measurement Readouts Display Histogram Measurements the highest nonzero bin minus the voltage of the lowest nonzero bin Horizontal histograms isplay the time of the rightmost nonzero bin minus the time of the leftmost nonzero bin he percentage of points in the histogram which are within 1 standard deviation of the istogram mean Qa istogram mean he percentage of points in the histogram which are within 3 standard deviations of the istogram mean 7 h The percentage of points in the histogram which are within 2 standard deviations of the h 7 h Histogram measurements are displayed in the same location as other measure ments See Figure 3 55 on page 3 117 To display histogram measurements you first need to obtain a stable display of your waveform Pressing AUTOSET may help Once you have a stable display press MEASURE to bring up the Measure menu See Figure 3 56 1 Turn on histogram counting by pressing MEASURE gt Histogram pop up gt Histogram Options main gt Histogram Mode side gt Vertical or Horizontal side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 135 Measuring Waveforms Remove Measurements 2 Press MEASURE gt Histogram pop up gt Histogram Measrmnt main 3 Select a measurement from the side menu see Table 3 11 on page 3 135
216. gt lt Slew gt Faster Holdoff LOIOID Ola OIMICIC ClO Figure 3 48 Main Trigger Menu Slew Rate Class m The Trigger When side menu displays the readout Slew Rate that indicates the slew rate setting The slew rate setting is not the slew rate of the pulse instead it is the slew rate against which the oscilloscope compares the slew rate of pulse see above You set the slew rate setting indirectly by setting the ratio of delta voltage to delta time as Upper Threshold Setting Lower Threshold Setting Blew RATE Sue Delta Time Setting Substituting the threshold and delta time settings for the setup in Fig ure 3 48 Slew Rate Setting 29 L oS V 160 mV ns m The trigger bar indicators long horizontal bars point to the upper and lower thresholds The pair cursors which are aligned to threshold levels read out a delta voltage of approximately 4 V and a delta time of 200 ns between the threshold levels Therefore the slew rate of the pulse edge triggered on is dv _ 4 Volts dt 200 ns Slew Rate Measured 20 mV ns 3 100 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms m The Trigger When side menu indicates the oscilloscope will trigger on pulses with slew rates slower than the slew rate setting Since the pulse edge slews at 20 mV ns which is faster than the slew rate setting of 16 mV ns the oscilloscope trigge
217. h 4 Ax2 Ref 1 and Ref 2 Ref1 Ref 2 Ref 3 and Ref 4 Ref3 Ref 4 3 43 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Since selecting YT or XY affects only the display the horizontal and vertical scale and position knobs and menus control the same parameters regardless of the mode selected Specifically in XY mode the horizontal scale will continue to control the time base and the horizontal position will continue to control which portion of the waveforms are displayed XY format is a dot only display although it can have persistence The Vector style selection has no effect when you select XY format You cannot display Math waveforms in XY format They will disappear from the display when you select XY NOTE Use of XY at higher room temperatures or with higher intensity display formats such as the white fields in the Hardcopy palette can temporarily degrade display quality Customizing the Display Color Change the Display Color 3 44 The TDS Oscilloscope can display information in different colors This section describes how to use the Color menu to choose the colors in which the various display objects appear To bring up the Color menu 1 Press DISPLAY to show the Display menu 2 Press Settings in the main menu until you select Color from the pop up menu See Figure 3 21 The Color menu allows you to alter color settings for various display compo nents such as waveforms and text The Display menu allows yo
218. he communication filter press SHIFT gt UTILITY System main gt Cal pop up Then read the calibration status from the Comm Filter menu If the status is not Pass refer the oscilloscope to service personnel for repair or adjustment The oscilloscope determines the status at power up To manually align the waveform to a mask press MEASURE gt Mea sure main gt Masks pop up gt Time Base Position main gt Time Base Position side and adjust the general purpose knob or the key pad To reset the time base position to 0 s press MEASURE Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Time Base Position main gt Set to 0 s side After selecting a mask setting mask options and adjusting the time base position you can enable mask counting and see counting results To enable mask counting press MEASURE gt Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Counting main gt Count Masks side If mask counting is enabled read the results in the side menus Waveform Count displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to mask counting Total Hits displays the total of all hits in all masks Mask n Hits displays the number of hits for mask n To zero the counts for all masks press MEASURE gt Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Counting main gt Reset Mask Counting side You may create or edit user masks If you edit a standard mask the edited copy of the mask becomes a user mask To edit a
219. he display In other words successive acquisitions will not be triggered at the same point on the waveform therefore the waveform will appear to roll across the screen Of course if valid triggers occur the display will become stable on screen Since auto mode will force a trigger in the absence of one auto mode is useful in observing signals where you are only concerned with monitoring amplitude level Although the unsynced waveform may roll across the display it will not freeze as it would in normal trigger mode Monitoring of a power supply output is an example of such an application When the oscilloscope recognizes a trigger event it disables the trigger system until acquisition is complete In addition the trigger system remains disabled during the holdoff period that follows each acquisition You can set holdoff time to help ensure a stable display For example the trigger signal can be a complex waveform with many possible trigger points on it Though the waveform is repetitive a simple trigger might get you a series of patterns on the screen instead of the same pattern each time A digital pulse train is a good example of a complex waveform See Fig ure 3 33 Each pulse looks like any other so many possible trigger points exist Not all of these will result in the same display The holdoff period allows the oscilloscope to trigger on the correct edge resulting in a stable display Holdoff is settable from 250 ns
220. he waveform and the record view when the selected channel reference or math waveform is a FastFrame waveform In Equivalent Time the oscilloscope ignores FastFrame mode Because FastFrame introduces additional processing time into the operation cycle of acquire process and display its best to use Single Sequence Acquisition see Acquire menu Stop After menu With Single Sequence selected you will see the current acquisition sequence otherwise the display lags the current sequence by one sequence You can also see the current sequence by pressing the RUN STOP button to stop the acquisition TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 61 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 3 62 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual a ery Triggering on Waveforms Triggering Concepts To use the TDS Oscilloscope to measure or monitor waveforms you need to know how to trigger a stable display of those waveforms Toward that end this section first covers the following topics m Trigger Concepts which details some basic principles of triggering and describes triggering elements type source coupling holdoff mode and so on m Triggering from the Front Panel which describes how to use the front panel triggering controls each of which is common to most if not all the trigger types the oscilloscope provides Once these basics are covered this section describes how to trigger using the various trigger types provided by the Ma
221. her zoom is on or off you can press Reset main gt Reset Live Factors or Reset All Factors side to return the zoomed derivative waveform to no magnification The Advanced DSP Math capabilities of the TDS Oscilloscope include waveform integration This capability allows you to display an integral math waveform that is an integrated version of the acquired waveform This section describes how to setup the oscilloscope to display and measure integral math waveforms Integral waveforms find use in the following applications m Measuring of power and energy such as in switching power supplies m Characterizing mechanical transducers as when integrating the output of an accelerometer to obtain velocity The integral math waveform derived from the sampled waveform is computed based on the following equation n y n scale gt i l Where x i is the source waveform y n is a point in the integral math waveform scale is the output scale factor T is the time between samples Since the resultant math waveform is an integral waveform its vertical scale is in volt seconds its horizontal scale is in seconds The source signal is integrated over its entire record length therefore the math waveform record length equals that of the source waveform TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 215 Using Features for Advanced Applications To Create a Integral Math 3 216 Waveform To obtain an integral math waveform
222. high impedance m Large voltage range between 15 and 500 V m Qualitative or go no go measurements Low Impedance Zp Low impedance probes measure frequency more accurately than general purpose Probes probes but they make less accurate amplitude measurements They offer a higher bandwidth to cost ratio These probes must be terminated in a 50 Q scope input Input capacitance is much lower than high Z passive probes typically 1 pF but input resistance is also lower 500 to 5000 Q typically Although that DC loading degrades amplitude accuracy the lower input capacitance reduces high frequency loading to the circuit under test That makes Zo probes ideal for timing and phase measurements when amplitude accuracy is not a major concern Zo probes are useful for measurements up to 40 V High Voltage Probes High voltage probes have attenuation factors in the 100X to 1000X range The considerations that apply to other passive probes apply to high voltage probes with a few exceptions Since the voltage range on high voltage probes varies from 1 kV to 20 kV DC peak AC the probe head design is mechanically much larger than for a passive probe High voltage probes have the added advantage of lower input capacitance typically 2 3 pF D 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix E Probe Selection Active Voltage Probes Figure D 1 Typical High Voltage Probes Active voltage probes sometimes called FET
223. i Low Setup main gt Histogram or Min Max side If you select Min Max you may also want to check and or revise reference levels using this side menu TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Level Setup main gt Histogram or Min Max side If you select Min Max you may also want to check and or revise reference levels using this side menu Histogram sets the values statistically It selects the most common value either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing etc histogram is the best setting for examining pulses Min max uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses Once you define the reference levels the oscilloscope will use them for all measurements requiring those levels To set the reference levels do the following steps 1 TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Reference Levels main gt Set Levels side 2 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Level Setup main gt Set Levels side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Then choose whether the References are set in relative to High 100 and Low 0 or
224. ied glitch time Glitch negative Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects negative spike Y widths less than the specified glitch time wrm Glitch either Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects positive or negative widths less than the specified glitch time ia Runt positive Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a positive pulse that crosses one threshold going positive but fails to cross a econd threshold before recrossing the first going negative tft Runt negative Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a negative TN going pulse that crosses one threshold going negative but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first going positive wn fga Runt either Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope detects a positive or SI negative going pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first Width positive Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope finds a positive pulse with a width between or optionally outside the user speci fied lower and upper time limits Width negative Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope finds a negative pulse with a width between or optionally outside the user speci fied lower and upper time limits TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Table 3 7 Pulse trigger definitions cont Name Definition Slew positive Triggering occurs if the oscilloscope dete
225. ights are turned off 2 Press WAVEFORM OFF again to remove the channel waveform TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 21 Tutorial Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements Display Measurements Automatically 2 22 The TDS Oscilloscope can measure many waveform parameters automatically and read out the results on screen Do the following tasks to discover how to set up the oscilloscope to measure waveforms automatically For information on additional measurement features see Display Measurement Statistics on page 3 125 Displaying Histograms on page 3 133 and Mask Testing on page 3 136 To use the automated measurement system you must have a stable display of your signal Also the waveform must have all the segments necessary for the measurement you want For example a rise time measurement requires at least one rising edge and a frequency measurement needs at least one complete cycle To take automated measurements do the following steps 1 If you are not continuing from the previous example follow the instructions on page 2 9 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples 2 Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side 3 Press AUTOSET 4 TDS 600B Press MEASURE to display the Measure main menu 5 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up to display the Measure main menu See Figure 2 14 6 If itis not already selected
226. ignal at a cost of slower display response Average operates on repetitive waveforms only and averaging does affect the frequency response of the source waveform For TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only after the FFT is set up and dis played you can to turn on Hi Res mode to reduce the effect of noise in the signal Hi Res operates on both repetitive and nonrepetitive waveforms however it does affect the frequency response of the source waveform Peak Detect and Envelope Add Distortion Peak Detect and Envelope mode can add significant distortion to the FFT results and are not recommended for use with FFTs Once you have your waveform displayed optimally you may magnify or reduce it vertically and horizontally to inspect any feature you desire Just be sure the FFT waveform is the selected waveform Press MORE then select the FFT waveform in the More main menu Then use the Vertical and Horizontal SCALE knobs to adjust the math waveform size If you wish to see the zoom factor 2X 5X etc you need to turn Zoom on press ZOOM gt On side The vertical and horizontal zoom factors appear on screen TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Whether Zoom is on or off you can press Reset main gt Reset Live Factors or Reset All Factors side to return the zoomed FFT waveform to no magnifi cation Zoom always uses either sin x x or linear interpolation when expanding displ
227. igure 3 49 Main Trigger Menu Comm Type 3 105 Figure 3 50 Delayed Runs After Main cece eens 3 107 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 51 Delayed Triggerable ccceccecscceces 3 107 Figure 3 52 How the Delayed Triggers Work 00 3 109 Figure 3 53 Delayed Trigger Menu cecececececes 3 111 Figure 3 54 Histogram Graticule Cursor and Automated Measurement soeces rarere overdo aceup aleve eai ee acer dang ove Savarese 3 113 Figure 3 55 Measurement Readouts with Statistics 3 117 Figure 3 56 Measure Menu cece cece cece cere ceees 3 118 Figure 3 57 Measure Menu Gating cece eee eeee 3 119 Figure 3 58 Measure Menu Reference Levels 3 121 Figure 3 59 Measure Delay Menu Delay To 3 122 Figure 3 60 Snapshot Menu and Readout 0eeeee0 3 124 Figure 3 61 Cursor Types ccccecscccccccccescscceces 3 127 Figure 3 62 Cursor Modes ce cece cc cec ec eceeeceees 3 128 Figure 3 63 H Bars Cursor Menu and Readouts 3 129 Figure 3 64 Paired Cursor Menu and Readouts 3 130 Figure 3 65 Histogram Menu and Vertical Histogram 3 133 Figure 3 66 Mask menu cece cece cece cece cece cece 3 137 Figure 3 67 Creating a User Mask 0 cece cece ce eees 3 140 Figure 3 68
228. ilter types are sin x x interpolation and linear interpolation To switch between interpolation filters Press DISPLAY gt Filter main gt Sin x x Interpolation or Linear Inter polation side NOTE When the horizontal scale is set to the faster rates 10 ns div for the TDS 600B see Table 3 4 on page 3 35 for rates specific to the TDS 500C and TDS 700C models or when using the ZOOM feature to expand waveforms horizontally interpolation occurs The filter type linear or sin x Xx depends on which is set in the Display menu Otherwise interpolation is not used See Interpolation on page 3 28 for a discussion of interpolation To change the graticule Press DISPLAY Graticule main gt Full Grid Cross Hair Frame NTSC or PAL side Full provides a grid cross hairs and a frame Grid displays a frame and a grid Cross Hair provides cross hairs and a frame Frame displays just a frame NTSC provides a grid useful for measuring NTSC class waveforms PAL provides a grid useful for measuring PAL class waveforms TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Select the Format Lou IO TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual NOTE Selecting either NTSC or PAL graticules automatically changes the vertical scale position settings coupling and sets to zero any vertical offset of any channel displayed These settings are not restored after swi
229. in the waveform record All points in the record are located in time with respect to that point The oscillo scope continuously acquires and retains enough sample points to fill the pretrigger portion of the waveform record that part of the waveform that is displayed before or to the left of the triggering event on screen When a trigger event occurs the oscilloscope starts acquiring samples to build the posttrigger portion of the waveform record displayed after or to the right of the trigger event Once a trigger is recognized the digitizing oscilloscope will not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete You can derive your trigger from the following sources Input channels provide the most commonly used trigger source You can select any one of the four input channels The channel you select as a trigger source will function whether it is displayed or not AC Line Voltage is the trigger source most often used when you are looking at signals related to the power line frequency Examples include devices such as lighting equipment and power supplies Because the oscilloscope generates the trigger you do not have to input a signal to create the trigger Auxiliary Trigger is the trigger source most often used in doing digital design and repair For example you might want to trigger with an external clock or with a signal from another part of the circuit To use the auxiliary trigger connect the external triggering signal
230. in trigger system edge logic and pulse m To use the general purpose trigger type edge see Triggering on a Waveform Edge on page 3 72 m To logic trigger based on an input pattern state or setup hold violation see Triggering Based on Logic on page 3 76 m To pulse trigger based on various pulse types glitch runt or their parame ters width slew rate see Triggering on Pulses on page 3 89 m To trigger on communication signals optional on TDS 500C and 700C only see Communications Triggering on page 3 103 This section concludes with details about and instructions for using the Delayed time base and Delayed trigger system to delay the acquisition of a waveform relative to a trigger event See Delayed Triggering on page 3 106 Triggers determine when the oscilloscope stops acquiring and displays a waveform They help create meaningful waveforms from unstable jumbles or blank screens See Figure 3 32 The oscilloscope has five types of triggers edge logic pulse and with option 2C comm and with option 05 video TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 63 Triggering on Waveforms The Trigger Event Trigger Sources ACO 3 64 Triggered Waveform Untriggered Waveforms Figure 3 32 Triggered Versus Untriggered Displays The trigger event establishes the time zero point
231. ine the time the edge takes to travel between the levels set in the slew rate Thresholds menu The oscilloscope cannot slew rate trigger on pulse edges that traverse between threshold levels in 600 ps or less Also to reliably slew rate trigger a pulse must have a width of 7 5 ns or more A pulse of less width may trigger on the wrong slope or not trigger at all Switch to edge triggering and check the pulse width if you can t slew rate trigger as expected To understand what happens when you slew rate trigger study Figure 3 48 as you consider the following points m The main menu shows the oscilloscope is set to trigger based on the slew rate of a pulse input to the trigger source Ch 1 It is set to monitor the positive polarity pulse edges of the trigger source and to trigger on any edge with a slew rate faster than the slew rate setting TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 99 Triggering on Waveforms Tek Run S00MS 5 Average Delta Time 250 0ns iL Slew Rate Trigger When Cursors Measure Slew Rate Components of Pulse Edge dv and dt ai Trigger Bar at Upper Threshold ee ae r A i RT Trig if Slower Than Trigger Point at Second Crossing Ne ae z A Slew Rate ta a GLOSS Trigger Bar at Lower Threshold 1 00 YQ oons Slew Ch1 EENEN E a ea _ hype Class acung polarity when amp lt Pulse
232. ing Waveforms To Set the InstaVu Style To change the InstaVu display style do the following steps 1 2 Press DISPLAY Mode main gt InstaVu pop up gt Style main Select between Vectors and Dots in the side menu Dots display is the factory default setting Select between Infinite Persistence and Variable Persistence in the side menu Variable Persistence is the factory default setting Use the general purpose knob or keypad to adjust the persistence time decay rate if you have selected Variable Persistence To Set the InstaVu To change the InstaVu readout options do the following steps Readout Options Press DISPLAY Mode main gt InstaVu pop up gt Readout Options main Toggle Display T Trigger Point Trigger Bar Style and Display Date Time in the side menu to the settings desired Incompatible Modes Several modes features are unavailable when InstaVu mode is selected 3 58 FastFrame Limit Testing Extended Acquisition XY display and Zoom modes Envelope Average Hi Res and Single Acquisition Sequence acquisition modes and Autosave mode Intensified time base Record lengths longer than 500 samples Interpolation equivalent time sampling is used instead Vectors when in equivalent time mode waveforms are displayed as Dots instead To determine under what conditions the oscilloscope normally interpolates or uses equivalent time see Selecting Repetitive Sampling on page 3
233. interpolation methods see Interpolation on page 3 28 To differentiate between the real and interpolated samples set the display style to Intensified Samples See Select the Display Style on page 3 39 To quickly determine the zoom factor of a zoomed waveform select it and check the Zoom readout It shows the selected waveform by number along with the horizontal and vertical expansion factors The Zoom readout appears at the top of the display when zoom is on See Figure 3 25 on page 3 52 Dual window preview mode does not display the Zoom readout TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Zoom a Waveform To use Zoom select a waveform turn Zoom on and magnify that waveform using the vertical and horizontal scale knobs 1 Press any of waveform selection buttons CH 1 through CH 4 on the right side of the display Or press MORE and select a math or reference waveform from the More menu 2 Press ZOOM Press ZOOM Mode main gt ON side The ZOOM front panel button should light up Toggle Dual Zoom to OFF in the side menu 3 Adjust the vertical zoom factor for the selected waveform using the vertical SCALE knob Adjust the vertical position of the zoomed waveform using the vertical POSITION knob 4 Adjust the horizontal zoom factor using the horizontal SCALE knob Adjust the horizontal position of the zoomed waveform using the horizontal POSITION knob Depending on the
234. io cecesescnsice sieve artcalig eave oiatdn 9 srne ab ee Sree eee ds 3 57 Figure 3 30 Fast Frame ccc cece cece cece cece ce eeeees 3 59 Figure 3 31 Horizontal Menu FastFrame Setup 3 60 Figure 3 32 Triggered Versus Untriggered Displays 3 64 Figure 3 33 Trigger Holdoff Time Ensures Valid Triggering 3 67 Figure 3 34 Slope and Level Controls Help Define the Trigger 3 68 Figure 3 35 TRIGGER Controls and Status Lights 3 69 Figure 3 36 Example Trigger Readouts Edge Trigger Selected 3 71 Figure 3 37 Record View Trigger Position and Trigger Level Bar Readout izcse sec sc ae 6 erer trotte ennet oases a oe S 3 72 Figure 3 38 Edge Trigger Readouts c ccc cc eceeceees 3 73 Figure 3 39 Main Trigger Menu Edge Type 3 73 Figure 3 40 Violation Zones for Setup Hold Triggering 3 80 Figure 3 41 Logic Trigger Readouts State Class Selected 3 81 Figure 3 42 Logic Trigger Menu 0 cece cece eee eeee 3 82 Figure 3 43 Logic Trigger Menu Time Qualified TRUE 3 84 Figure 3 44 Triggering on a Setup Hold Time Violation 3 88 Figure 3 45 Pulse Trigger Readouts cccccecseceees 3 90 Figure 3 46 Main Trigger Menu Glitch Class 3 92 Figure 3 47 Main Trigger Menu Runt Class 3 95 Figure 3 48 Main Trigger Menu Slew Rate Class 3 100 F
235. is for measurements up to 500 volts TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 1 5 Start Up ZN Input Coupling Putting into Service Installation 16 CAUTION Using the P6243 or P6245 Active Probe to measure signals greater than 40 volts may damage the probe Be sure to choose the proper input coupling and impedance for the probe or other cabling you use to couple signals to your oscilloscope You should read Input Impedance Considerations on page 3 7 for information needed to ensure proper coupling of your input signals To learn how to install access the front panel power on do a self test and power off the oscilloscope do the following procedures To properly install and power on the oscilloscope do the following steps 1 Be sure you have the appropriate operating environment Specifications for temperature relative humidity altitude vibrations and emissions are included in the TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Technical Reference Performance Verification and Specifications manual Tektronix part number 070 9874 xx 2 Leave space for cooling Do this by verifying that the air intake and exhaust holes on the sides of the cabinet where the fan operates are free of any airflow obstructions Leave at least 5 1 cm 2 inches free on each side WARNING To avoid electrical shock be sure that the power cord is disconnected before checking the fuse 3 Check the fuse to be sure it is the
236. is the maximum valid pulse width the trigger source will look for The Lower Limit is the minimum valid pulse width The oscilloscope will always force the Lower Limit to be less than or equal to the Upper Limit Set the Level Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Width pop up gt Level main gt Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set to 50 side Set the Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 To Trigger Based When you select the pulse class Slew Rate the oscilloscope will trigger on a on Slew Rate pulse edge that traverses between an upper and lower threshold faster or slower than a slew rate you specify To set up for slew rate triggering do the following procedures Select Slew Rate Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up Class main gt Slew Rate pop up See Figure 3 48 on page 3 100 Select the Source Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side The source selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes Select Polarity To specify the direction of the pulse edge press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Slew Rat
237. isition mode 3 202 aliasing 3 203 automated measurements of 3 198 DC correction 3 201 derivation of 3 192 displaying phase 3 194 frequency range 3 200 frequency resolution 3 200 interpolation mode 3 202 3 203 magnifying 3 202 phase display setup considerations 3 204 phase suppression 3 195 3 205 procedure for displaying 3 193 procedure for measuring 3 196 record length 3 200 reducing noise 3 202 undersampling 3 203 zero phase reference 3 204 FFT time domain record defined 3 199 File System 3 160 File Utilities menu 3 160 Confirm Delete 3 163 Copy 3 163 Create Directory 3 163 Delete 3 162 Drives 3 164 File Utilities 3 161 Format 3 164 Icons 3 153 3 156 3 162 3 164 Overwrite Lock 3 164 Print 3 163 Rename 3 162 File Utilities File Utilities menu 3 161 File Utilities Save Recall Setup menu 3 154 File Utilities Save Recall Waveform menu 3 160 Filter Display menu 3 42 Fine Scale Vertical menu 3 18 Firmware version 3 179 Fit to screen Horizontal menu 3 22 Fixtured active probes D 4 FORCE TRIG button 3 69 Format File Utilities menu 3 164 Format Hardcopy menu 3 167 Frame Count Horizontal menu 3 60 Index 5 Index Frame Length Horizontal menu 3 60 Frame Display menu 3 42 Frame Horizontal menu 3 60 Frequency 2 22 3 115 Glossary 4 Front Cover removal 1 7 Front panel 2 4 Full Display menu 3 42 Full Vertical m
238. ithin specification have your probe checked by service personnel NOTE Probe Cal is not recommended with the P6139A passive probe This probe typically has little gain and offset error and therefore the improvement in performance after a Probe Cal is not worth the time needed to do the Probe Cal Probe Cal makes significant performance improvements when performed with active probes or older passive probes To run a probe cal follow the instructions regarding prerequisites below and then do the steps that follow m If you are installing an active probe such as the P6243 or P6245 there are no prerequisites to performing this procedure Start at step 1 m If you are compensating for a passive probe with this procedure you must first compensate the low frequency response of the probe First do steps 1 and 2 below and then compensate the probe by following the instructions that came with your probe Or see To Compensate Passive Probes on page 3 6 Then continue with step 3 of this procedure 1 Install the probe on the input channel on which it is to be used TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms 2 Power on the digitizing oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 3 Press SHIFT UTILITY System main gt Cal pop up 4 Look at the status label under Signal Path in the main menu If the status does not read Pass perform a signal path compensation Sign
239. itude accuracy but degraded for resolving frequencies Blackman Harris Best window for measuring the amplitude of frequencies but worst at resolving frequencies The topic Selecting a Window on page 3 207 provides in depth information on choosing the right window for your application 9 If you did not select Phase deg or Phase rad in step 7 skip to step 12 Phase suppression is only used to reduce noise in phase FFTs 10 If you need to reduce the effect of noise in your phase FFT press Suppress phase at amplitudes lt side 11 Use the general purpose knob to adjust the phase suppression level FFT magnitudes below this level will have their phase set to zero The topic Adjust Phase Suppression on page 3 205 provides additional information on phase suppression 12 Press OK Create Math Wfm side to display the FFT of the waveform you input in step 1 See Figure 3 94 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 195 Using Features for Advanced Applications Measurements of an FFT 3 196 Tek Run 50 0MS s Sample Ollo thi a0 va ps cht A s00mv 29 Mar 1994 12 08 57 Math 20 0 dB 2 50MHz Dlo aS Figure 3 94 FFT Math Waveform in Math1 To Take Cursor Once you have displayed an FFT math waveform use cursors to measure its 1 frequency amplitude or phase angle Be sure MORE is selected in the chann
240. l menu 3 22 Set to 50 Delayed Trigger menu 3 112 Set to 50 Horizontal menu 3 22 Set to 50 Main Trigger menu 3 69 3 76 3 93 3 102 Set to 50 Telecom Trigger menu 3 106 Set to 90 Horizontal menu 3 22 Set to ECL Delayed Trigger menu 3 112 Set to ECL Main Trigger menu 3 76 3 93 3 98 3 102 Set to ECL Telecom Trigger menu 3 106 Set to TTL Delayed Trigger menu 3 112 Set to TTL Main Trigger menu 3 76 3 93 3 98 3 102 Set to TTL Telecom Trigger menu 3 106 Set to Zero Vertical menu 3 18 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Set Hold Trigger 3 78 Setting Up for the Examples 2 9 Settings Display menu 3 39 3 44 Setup menu 2 10 3 11 Setup Hold trigger Maximum hold time NOTE 3 79 Negative setup or hold times 3 79 Positive setup or hold times 3 79 Trigger point location 3 79 Setup Hold trigger 3 77 How to setup 3 86 3 112 Setups Save and recall 3 151 Shipping C 1 Side menu Glossary 12 Side menu buttons 2 3 Glossary 12 SIGNAL OUTPUT BNC 2 5 Signal Path Compensation 1 5 3 142 Sin x x interpolation 3 28 3 42 Glossary 6 Sin x x interpolation Display menu 3 42 Single Acquisition Sequence Acquire menu 3 36 SINGLE TRIG button 3 37 3 70 Single Wfm Math More menu 3 189 Single Shot sampling 3 26 Slew rate setting How derived 3 100 Slew Rate Trigger 3 91 Slew rate trigger 3 89 Glossary 11 Glossary 12 600 ps limitation 3
241. lags negative Phase is not available in the Snapshot display TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms Positive Duty Cycle Positive Overshoot Positive Width Rise Time e Timing measurement The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage PositiveWidth is defined in Positive Width following If Period 0 or undefined then return an error _ PositiveWidth PositiveDutyCycle eg 7 ee 100 Amplitude voltage measurement Max High Amplitude mse PositiveOvershoot Note that this value should never be negative Timing measurement The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse If MCross1Polarity then PositiveWidth MCross2 MCross1 else PositiveWidth MCross3 MCross2 Timing measurement Time taken for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a LowRef value default 10 to a HighRef value default 90 Figure B 3 shows a rising edge with the two crossings necessary to calculate a Rise Time measurement 1 Searching from Start to End find the first sample in the measurement zone less than LowRef 2 From this sample continue the search to find the first positive crossing of Lowkef The time of this crossing is the low rise time or TLR Use linear interpolation if necessary TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Man
242. lay and Phase are dual waveform measurements and are not available with Snapshot The readout area for a snapshot of measurements is a pop up display that covers about 80 of the graticule area when displayed See Figure 3 60 You can display a snapshot on any channel or ref memory but only one snapshot can be displayed at a time TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 123 Measuring Waveforms To use Snapshot obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured pressing AUTOSET may help Then do the following steps 1 TDS 600B Press MEASURE SNAPSHOT main 2 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt SNAPSHOT main 3 Press either SNAPSHOT main or AGAIN side to take another snapshot NOTE The Snapshot display tells you the channel that the snapshot is being made on 4 Push Remove Measrmnt Tek Run eg Sample Snapshot le oe Snapshot on M Period 1 010ms Freq 990 16 Hz Snapshot Display Width 480ps Width 530ps ta Brstwd 4 050ms Rise Sus Fall Sus Duty 47 6 Duty 52 4 Over 1 6 Over 1 6 High 528mYV Low 24m Max 536mV Min 16mV Ampl 504m Pk Pk 520m Mean 262 4mvV CycMean 261 2mvV RMS 363 6mv CycRMS 362 8mvV nv K Area 1 30880mYs CycArea 263 84uYS 4 ey SK Li e Remove Gating Statistics lave Setu Measure Measrmnt h Snapshot lt Measure gt for Ch Measrmnt OFF OFF er
243. layed value TDS 700C Only can change Measurement statistics displays either the mean and standard deviation or the minimum and maximum values of measurements The number of measurements accumulated is also displayed NOTE Statistics are not displayed for Phase Delay and histogram measurements TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 125 Measuring Waveforms To display measurement statistics obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured Then do the following steps 1 Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Statistics main gt Statistics Min Max or Statistics Mean StdDev side Statistics Min Max Displays the minimum and maximum statistics for measurements Statistics Mean StdDev Displays the mean and standard deviation statistics for measurements 2 To set the number of measurements included in the measurement statistics press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Statistics main gt Statistics Weights side Then enter the number of measurements to include in the measurement statistics using the general purpose or the keypad 3 To turn off measurement statistics press MEASURE Measure pop up gt Statistics main gt Statistics Off side To Find More Information To perform a tutorial that shows you how to take automatic measurements see Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements on page 2 22 To learn how the oscilloscope calculates each automatic measurement see App
244. ld violation zone that the setup and hold times form by entering negative values See Figure 3 40 on page 3 80 To Set Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to To Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see the descriptions Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Triggering on Pulses The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on glitch or runt pulses or it can trigger based on the width slew rate or timeout period of a pulse These capabilities make the oscilloscope suitable for such tasks as unattended monitoring for and capturing of a power supply glitch or GO NO GO slew rate testing of operational amplifiers This subsection describes how to use each of the five classes of pulse triggers glitch runt width and slew rate and timeout triggering A glitch trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse narrower or wider in width than some specified time It can trigger on glitches of either polarity Or you can set the glitch trigger to reject glitches of either polarity A runt trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a short pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first You can set the oscilloscope to detect positive or negative runt pulses A width trigger
245. levels of waveform compression The compression may remove signal attributes required by some measurements Remove Measurements The Remove Measrmnt selection provides explicit choices for removing measurements from the display according to their readout position To remove measurements do the following steps 1 TDS 600B Press MEASURE Remove Measrmnt main 2 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Remove Measrmnt main 3 Select the measurement to remove from the side menu If you want to remove all the measurements at one time press All Measurements side Gate Measurements The gating feature lets you limit measurements to a specified portion of the waveform When gating is Off the oscilloscope makes measurements over the entire waveform record 3 118 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms When gating is activated vertical cursors are displayed Use these cursors to define the section of the waveform you want the oscilloscope to measure This section is called the gated region Do the following steps to gate a measurement 1 TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Gating main gt Gate with V Bar Cursors side See Figure 3 57 2 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Gating main gt Gate with V Bar Cursors side See Figure 3 57 a E Tek Run 100kS 5 Sample AL 2 72ms 980ps l i Gate with
246. ll display a clipping error message if turned on see To Take Automated Measurements on page 3 212 If your derivative waveform is clipped try either of the following methods to eliminate clipping Reduce the size of the source waveform on screen Select the source channel and use the vertical SCALE knob m Expand the waveform horizontally on screen Select the source channel and increase the horizontal scale using the horizontal SCALE knob For instance if you display the source waveform illustrated in Figure 3 101 on page 3 212 so its rising and falling edges are displayed over more horizontal divisions the amplitude of the corresponding derivative pulse will decrease Whichever method you use be sure Zoom is off and the zoom factors are reset see Using Zoom below Using Zoom Once you have your waveform optimally displayed you can also magnify or contract it vertically and horizontally to inspect any feature Just be sure the differentiated waveform is the selected waveform Press MORE then select the differentiated waveform in the More main menu Then use the Vertical and Horizontal SCALE knob to adjust the math waveform size If you wish to see the zoom factor 2X 5X etc you need to turn zoom on press ZOOM gt ON side The vertical and horizontal zoom factors appear on screen 3 214 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Waveform Integration Whet
247. ll if Condition Met 3 187 RUN STOP 3 36 Sample 3 33 Single Acquisition Sequence 3 36 Stop After 3 35 3 187 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Stop After Limit Test Condition Met 3 187 Template Source 3 184 V Limit 3 185 ACQUIRE MENU button 3 33 3 184 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 3 5 Acquisition 3 25 Glossary 1 Interval Glossary 1 Mode envelope 3 30 Modes Readout 3 33 Acquisition length Option 2M A 2 Acquisition mode Choosing an 3 25 Acquisition modes How to select 3 33 Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 Active cursor Glossary 1 Active voltage probes D 3 active Saved waveform status 3 155 Advanced applications Features for 3 183 Advanced DSP Math Option 2F A 3 Algorithms B 1 Aliasing 3 37 3 203 Glossary 1 AML Telecom Trigger menu 3 104 Amplitude 3 114 Glossary 1 Amplitude Units Cursor menu 3 131 AND Glossary 2 AND Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 Applications derivative math waveforms 3 210 FFT math waveforms 3 191 integral math waveforms 3 215 Area 3 114 Glossary 2 Attenuation Glossary 2 External 3 18 Auto Main Trigger menu 3 75 Automated Measurements Snapshot of 2 27 Automated measurements 2 22 3 114 of derivative math waveforms 3 212 of FFT math waveforms 3 198 of integral math waveforms 3 219 Automatic trigger mode 3 66 Glossary 2 Autosave Save Recall Waveform menu 3 159 Autoset 2 15 3 8 Glossary
248. lloscope Option applies only to TDS 520C TDS 620B and TDS 724C models 2F Advanced DSP math Add advanced DSP math features such as FFT integration and differentiation Option applies only to TDS 520C and TDS 540C models 3I and 3P Color printer Tektronix P haser 140 360 dpi inkjet color printer Order option 3I for 220V use or option 3P for 110 V use 4D Four probes Delete the four standard probes shipped with the model Option applies only to TDS 540C TDS 644B and TDS 754C models B2 Printed programmer Provides a printed programmer manual A Windows Help version of this manual is included manua in the User Manual L1 Manuals in French Provides Language versions of User Manual according to option number chosen L3 Manuals in German L5 Manuals in J apanese L9 Manuals in Korean Standard Accessories TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual The oscilloscope comes standard with the accessories listed in Table A 2 Table A 2 Standard Accessories Accessory Part Number User Manual 070 9869 XX Reference 020 2204 XX Technical Reference Performance Verification and Specifications 070 9874 XX A 3 Appendix A Options and Accessories Table A 2 Standard Accessories Cont Accessory Part Number Probes TDS 754C Four P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive probes TDS 724C Two P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive probes TDS 644B Four P6243 probes TDS 620B Two P6139A probes TDS 540C Four P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive pr
249. logic functions to the logic inputs Table 3 6 defines these four logic functions For pattern triggering the oscilloscope waits until the end of trigger holdoff and then samples the inputs from all the channels The oscilloscope then triggers if the conditions defined in Table 3 6 are met Goes TRUE or Goes FALSE must be set in the Trigger When menu The other settings in that menu are described in To Define a Time Qualified Pattern Trigger on page 3 83 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 77 Triggering on Waveforms For state triggering the oscilloscope waits until the end of trigger holdoff and then waits until the edge of channel 4 transitions in t he specified direction At that point the oscilloscope samples the inputs from the other channels and triggers if the conditions defined in Table 3 6 are met Table 3 6 Pattern and State Logic If allth NAND tT a for the e preconditions selected for the AND Clocked AND 3 logic inputs3 are TRUE then the oscilloscope triggers Clocked NAND If not all of the preconditions selected ogic inputs are TRUE then the oscilloscope triggers 7 the log OR a gt b Clocked OR if any of the preconditions selected for c inputs are TRUE then the oscilloscope triggers 7 the log NOR a gt Clocked NOR If none of the preconditions selected for ic inputs are TRUE then the os
250. loscope that is a trigger logic pattern and state function TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary Oscilloscope An instrument for making a graph of two factors These are typically voltage versus time Peak Detect acquisition mode A mode in which the oscilloscope saves the minimum and maximum samples over two adjacent acquisition intervals For many glitch free signals that mode is indistinguishable from the sample mode Peak detect mode works with real time non interpolation sampling only Peak to Peak Amplitude voltage measurement of the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude Period A timing measurement of the time covered by one complete signal cycle It is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds Phase A timing measurement between two waveforms of the amount one leads or lags the other in time Phase is expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one complete cycle of one of the waveforms Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the other Pixel A visible point on the display The oscilloscope display is 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels high Pop up Menu A sub menu of a main menu Pop up menus temporarily occupy part of the waveform display area and are used to present additional choices associated with the main menu selection You can cycle through the options in a pop up menu
251. lower graticule shows the two zoomed portions enclosed in two boxes on the unzoomed waveform Adjusting offset moves the right box relative to the left box which remains stationary The associated zoomed waveform in the upper graticule moves to track the offset changes You can also adjust the waveform relative to the zoom boxes by selecting the lower graticule and adjusting the vertical and horizontal control knobs See Using Dual Window Mode on page 3 52 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Selected Graticule Tek Run cue Sample oe Time 412 6nS al Zoomed Waveform Edges Zoom Boxes Unzoomed Waveform 250mv Dual Zoom ON E s00mve F gt M Toons Chi v ISe e a Bae DZ Offset 412 625 one Bich ae PIO spain RE ng i aig thee SE ee Mode rock Graticule Reset Upper eum Gum Gem Gm Gm Gm eu OIOI Figure 3 27 Dual Zoom Shown Dual Window Preview Mode Using InstaVu Acquisition Mode Waveform Capture Rate The TDS 500C and 700C Oscilloscopes can use InstaVu acquisition mode to reduce the dead time between waveform updates that normally occur when digitizing storage oscilloscopes DSOs acquire waveforms InstaVu mode can capture and display transient deviations such as glitches or runt pulses
252. lowing steps 1 Press CURSOR Mode main Independent or Track side Independent makes each cursor positionable without regard to the position of the other cursor Track makes both cursors positionable in tandem that is both cursors move in unison and maintain a fixed horizontal or vertical distance between each other 2 Adjust the cursors according to the mode you have selected m To adjust either cursor in independent mode use the general purpose knob to move the selected active cursor A solid line indicates the adjustable cursor and a dashed line the fixed cursor Press Select to toggle selection between the two cursors TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms m To adjust both cursors in tracking mode use the general purpose knob to move both cursors To adjust the distance between cursors in tracking mode press SELECT to temporarily suspend cursor tracking Then use the general purpose knob to adjust the distance of the solid cursor relative to the dashed cursor Press SELECT again to resume tracking Select Cursor Speed To change the cursors speed press SHIFT before turning the general purpose knob The cursor moves faster when the SHIFT button is lighted and the display reads Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner Select Time Units You can choose to display vertical bar cursor results in units of time or fre quency If you have Option 5 Video you can also display the res
253. ltage level of two waveform records point by point It is useful for studying phase relationships between two waveforms pts YT format The conventional oscilloscope display format It shows the voltage of a waveform record on the vertical axis as it varies over time on the horizontal axis TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary 13 Glossary Glossary 14 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index Numbers 1 seconds Hz Cursor menu 3 131 2 2 channel operation xiv 1 1 1 2 Glossary 1 20 MHz Vertical menu 3 17 250 MHz Vertical menu 3 17 A AC coupling Glossary 1 AC line voltage trigger input 3 64 AC Main Trigger menu 3 74 Accept Glitch Main Trigger menu 3 93 Accessories A 1 Optional A 4 A 8 Probes A 5 Software A 7 Standard A 3 A 7 Accuracy Glossary 1 Acquire menu 3 33 Average 3 33 Average mode 3 184 Compare Ch1 to 3 186 Compare Ch2 to 3 186 Compare Ch3 to 3 186 Compare Ch4 to 3 186 Compare Math1 to 3 186 Compare Math2 to 3 186 Compare Math3 to 3 186 Create Limit Test Template 3 184 Envelope 3 33 H Limit 3 185 Hardcopy if Condition Met 3 187 Hi Res 3 33 Limit Test 3 187 Limit Test Condition Met 3 187 Limit Test Setup 3 186 3 187 Limit Test Sources 3 186 Limit Testing 3 184 OFF Real Time Only 3 34 OK Store Template 3 185 ON Enable ET 3 34 Peak Detect 3 33 Repetitive Signal 3 34 Ring Be
254. m Factory Init side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 31 Tutorial 2 32 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual D Overview This chapter describes in detail how to perform the operating tasks you must do to measure test process or save and document your waveforms It leads with three sections on the fundamental tasks of acquiring stably displaying and taking measurements on waveforms m Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms m Triggering on Waveforms m Measuring Waveforms Once you have acquired and measured waveforms you may want to save and restore them or the control setups used to acquire and measure them Or you may want to save the display screen complete with waveform and setup information to include them with the documents you produce with your desk top publishing system You may even want to digitally process them add multiply or divide them integrate differentiate or take an FFT of them The following two topics cover these tasks m Saving Waveforms and Setups m Using Features for Advanced Applications When performing any operation task you might want to display a comprehen sive listing of its current control settings on screen Or you may find it handy to display operating information about front panel controls and menus instead of looking them up in this manual The following topic tells you how to do both m Determining Status and Accessing Help The topics just listed contain
255. m Counting Display a Histogram Setting Histogram Box Size 3 134 Vertical displays a vertical histogram that shows how your vertical units vary in the histogram box A vertical histogram is displayed starting at the left edge of the graticule The size of the max bin is controlled by the Histogram Size side menu Horizontal displays a horizontal histogram that shows how time varies in the histogram box A horizontal histogram is displayed at the top of the graticule The size of the max bin is controlled by the Histogram Size side menu To reset the count in all histogram bins to zero press MEASURE gt Histogram pop up gt Histogram Options main gt Reset Histogram Counting side To display a histogram press MEASURE gt Histogram pop up gt Histo gram Options main gt Histogram Display side gt Off Log or Linear side m Ifyou select Off you turn off histogram displays Histogram counting and measurements can continue The histogram box is not turned off m If you select Log you display the log of the count in each bin Log scaling provides better visual detail for bins with low count m If you select Linear you display the count in each bin To select which waveform is compared against the histogram box press MEASURE gt Histogram pop up gt Histogram Options main gt Histogram Source side gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side To set the size of the histogram display press MEASURE
256. mask do the following steps 1 To start with a standard mask do Selecting a Mask on page 3 136 2 To select a mask to edit or create press MEASURE Measure main gt Masks pop up gt Mask Type main gt Edit pop up gt User Mask Editing main Then select the mask from the side menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms 6 7 You create or edit a mask by moving a cross hair cursor on the display and adding or deleting points as required To move the cursor turn the general purpose knob To change the cursor direction press SELECT To add a point to the mask move the cursor to the location and press Add Point side To delete a point from the mask move the cursor to the point and press Delete Point side To delete all points from the mask press Delete All Points side When you are finished editing the mask press OK End Edit side Masks are created by connecting the points independent of the order they are entered Points are connected by sorting the points in left to right order and grouping them across a diagonal from the left most point to the right most point If two points share the same horizontal position along either the left or right edge of the mask then the diagonal runs from the top left most point to the bottom right most point Points below the diagonal form the bottom boundary of the mask points above it form the top boundary When creating masks re
257. me The TDS 600B Oscilloscopes use only real time sampling the TDS 500C and TDS 700C Oscilloscopes use both real and equivalent time sampling In real time sampling the oscilloscope digitizes all the points it acquires after one trigger event see Figure 3 13 Always use real time sampling to capture single shot or transient events Record Points oe a re Sampling Rate JUUUUULUUUUL Figure 3 13 Real Time Sampling 3 26 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Equivalent Time Sampling A TDS 500C or TDS 700C model oscilloscope the TDS 600B models use only real time sampling uses equivalent time sampling to extend its sample rate over its real time maximum sampling rate but only under two conditions m You must have turned equivalent time on in the Acquisition menu m You must have set the oscilloscope to a sampling rate that is too fast to allow it to get enough samples with which to create a waveform record using real time sampling If both conditions are the case the oscilloscope takes a few samples with each trigger event and eventually obtains enough samples to construct a waveform record In short the oscilloscope makes multiple acquisitions of a repetitive waveform to obtain the sample density required for a waveform record See Figure 3 14 By doing so the oscilloscope lets you accurately acquire signals with frequencies much higher than its maximum real time bandwidth wo
258. member the following operating characteristics and refer to Figure 3 67 m Locate one point along the left edge or right edge of the mask further left or further right than any other point m Points are connected left to right TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 139 Measuring Waveforms Top bottom These points form dividing line the top of the mask not displayed a Left mostpoint These points form the bottom of the mask Figure 3 67 Creating a User Mask m To create a mask with a concave side create several masks to cover the same area m Masks are saved with setups so you can save sets of masks by defining them and then storing the instrument setup Displayed masks are overwrit ten when you recall a stored setup select a standard mask or initialize the digitizing oscilloscope 3 140 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Table 3 12 Standard masks SONET SDH None OCI STM0 51 84 Mb s OC3 STM1 155 52 Mb s OC12 STM4 622 08 Mb s ITU T DS 0 Sgl Single 64 4 kb s DS 0 Dbl Double 64 kb s DS 0 Data Data Contra 64 kb s DS 0 Tmg Timing 64 kb s 71 102 Fibre channel DS1 FC133 1 544 Mb s Optical 132 8 Mb s DS1A FC266 2 048 Mb s Optical 265 6 Mb s DS1C FC531 3 152 Mb s Optical 531 2 Mb s DS2 FC1063 6 312 Mb s Optical 1 0625 Gb s Video None Afsc NTSC D2 143 18 Mb s 4 2 2 D1 270 Mb s Miscellaneous
259. methods for recognizing and dealing with aliases m Be aware that a source waveform with fast edge transition times creates many high frequency harmonics These harmonics typically decrease in amplitude as their frequency increases m Sample the source signal at rates that are at least 2X that of the highest frequency component having significant amplitude TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 203 Using Features for Advanced Applications Considerations for Phase Displays 3 204 m Filter the input to bandwidth limit it to frequencies below that of the Nyquist frequency m Recognize and ignore the aliased frequencies If you think you have aliased frequencies in your FFT select the source channel and adjust the horizontal scale to increase the sample rate Since you increase the Nyquist frequency as you increase the sample rate the alias signals should appear at their proper frequency Nyquist Frequency Point Amplitude RSE Frequency Aliased Frequencies Actual Frequencies ed Figure 3 98 How Aliased Frequencies Appear in an FFT When you set up an FFT math waveform to display the phase angle of the frequencies contained in a waveform you should take into account the reference point the phase is measured against You may also need to use phase suppression to reduce noise in your FFTs Establish a Zero Phase Reference Point The phase of each frequency is measured with respect to the zero phase
260. minimum holdoff available to 12 seconds maximum holdoff available To see how to set holdoff see To Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 You can also set a default holdoff The default hold is the general purpose holdoff for most triggering signals and varies with the horizontal scale It is equal to 5 divisions times the current time division settings TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Trigger Level Acquisition Acquisition Interval Interval Indicates Trigger P oints Trigger Coupling Trigger Position JUUL JUL JL yY W yY Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Triggers are not recognized during holdoff time Figure 3 33 Trigger Holdoff Time Ensures Valid Triggering Trigger coupling determines what part of the signal is passed to the trigger circuit All trigger types except edge triggering use only DC coupling edge triggering can use all available coupling types AC DC Low Frequency Rejection High Frequency Rejection and Noise Rejection See To Specify Coupling on page 3 74 for a description of each coupling mode The adjustable feature trigger position defines where on the waveform record the trigger occurs It lets you properly align and measure data within records The part of the record that occurs before the trigger is the pretrigger portion The part that occurs after the trigger is the posttrigger portion To help you visualize the trigger position setting th
261. mode See Figure 3 28 To turn InstaVu off press InstaVu Alternatively press DISPLAY gt Mode main and then press Mode again to toggle to Normal mode a Tek Run eka Sample BEN alia 10 005 s Instavu Style Infinite Persistence variable 5 CO M Toons Chit 790mv EEr d Normal gt Graticule Readout Full Options Intensity Figure 3 28 InstaVu Display TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Normal DSO Mode Ist Acquired Next Acquired Next Acquired Waveform Waveform Waveform Record Record Record ieo a TT E Ld L N J N J k Y yY Dead Time Dead Time Dead Time Waveform Memory Waveform Memory Waveform Memory Display Updated Display Updated Display InstaVu Mode Ist Set of Acquired Next Set of Acquired Next Set of Acquired Waveform Records Waveform Records Waveform Records 3 Waveform Waveform Waveform Memory Memory Memory BitMap Bit Map BitMap Variable Persistence Updated Variable Updated Variable Display Persistence Display Persistence Display Figure 3 29 Normal DSO Acquisition and Display Mode Versus InstaVu Mode TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 57 Acquiring and Display
262. mum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 115 Measuring Waveforms Table 3 10 Measurement definitions cont Name GAO Phase Definition Timing measurement The amount one waveform leads or lags another in time Expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one waveform cycle Period Timing measurement Time it takes for the first complete signal cycle to happen in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of frequency Measured in seconds Positive Duty Cycle Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Pa _ PositiveWidth o PositiveDutyCycle end x 100 Positive Overshoot Voltage measurement over the entire waveform or gated region PositiveOvershoot Mas RON x 100 Amplitude Positive Width Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region The distance time between MidR ef default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse oa Rise time Timing measurement Time taken for the leading edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to rise from a Low Ref value default 10 to a High Ref value default 90 of its final value rye RMS Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the entire waveform or gated region Extinction Ratio Optical
263. munication Signal Opt 2C Opt 2C Analyzer Std Feature 520C No of channels 2 21 Storage Hard Disk Opt HD Opt HD Storage Floppy Disk 0 includes RS 232 and Opt 13 Std Centronics 1 Two plus Two channel operation allows two of four channels to be displayed simultaneously Channels not displayed can be used to couple a triggering signal to the oscilloscope 2 This TDS model can be purchased with Option 1M or Option 2M which add longer record length settings up to 2 Mb channel See Option 1M and Option 2M on page A 2 3 Advanced digital signal processing provides FFTs integrals and derivatives of waveforms See Option 2F on page A 4 Sid denotes a standard product feature as opposed to a feature included as part of an option 5 GPIB I O included with all models 1 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Product Description Product Specification The product specification is found in the technical reference TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Technical Reference Performance Verification and Specifications that is shipped as a standard accessory with the TDS Oscillo scope TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 1 3 Product Description 1 4 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual S Start Up Before you use the TDS Oscilloscope ensure that it is properly installed and powered on Preparation To ensure maximum accuracy for your most critical measurements you should know abo
264. n existing file of the same name An important reason to allow overwriting is to let you write files using a target file name that contains wild card characters This means the oscilloscope creates sequential files whose names are similar except for the sequential numbers that go in the real name in the place of the question marks To select the floppy disk or the optional hard disk turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the line marked with both the name of the drive to select fd0 or hd0 and the disk drive icon as shown to the left of this page Then press SELECT To format a 720 Kbyte or 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk or the optional hard disk turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the line marked with both the name of the drive to format fd0 or hd0 and the disk drive icon as shown to the left of this page Then press the side menu Format button See Saving and Recalling Setups on page 3 151 See Saving and Recalling Waveforms and Acquisitions on page 3 154 See Printing a Hardcopy on page 3 164 The TDS Oscilloscope can provide you with hardcopies of its display To obtain a hardcopy you need to know how to configure the communication and hardcopy parameters of the oscilloscope how to connect it to one of the many hardcopy devices it supports and how to print the hardcopy This subsection describes how to do these tasks and how to save a hardcopy to a disk TDS 500C TDS 6
265. n Setup When you select the logic class Setup Hold the oscilloscope uses one channel as Hold Time Violations a data channel the factory default setting is Ch1 another channel as a clock channel default is Ch2 and triggers if the data transitions within the setup or hold time of the clock Pages 3 77 and 3 78 describe how setup hold triggers work To use setup and hold triggering do the following procedures Select Setup Hold Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Setup Hold pop up Define the Data Source To select the channel that is to contain the data signal 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Setup Hold pop up gt Data Source main 2 Press any one of Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side Do not select the same channel for both the data and clock sources Define the Clock Source and Edge To select the channel that is to contain the clock signal and the edge to use to clock 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Setup Hold pop up Clock Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side 2 Press any one of Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side Do not select the same channel that you selected for the clock source 3 Press Clock Edge side to toggle between the rising and falling edges 3 86 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Set the Data a
266. nd Clock Levels To set the transition levels that the clock and data must cross to be recognized by the oscilloscope 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Setup Hold pop up gt Levels main gt Clock Level or Data Level side 2 Turn the general purpose knob or use the keypad to set values for the clock level and for the data level you select If you prefer you can set both clock levels to a value appropriate to either of two logic families To do so 3 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Setup Hold pop up Levels main gt Set Both to TTL or Set Both to ECL side The oscilloscope uses the clock level you set to determine when a clock edge rising or falling depending on which you select occurs The oscilloscope uses the point the clock crosses the clock level as the reference point from which it measures setup and hold time settings Set the Setup and Hold Times To set the setup time and the hold time relative to the clock 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Setup Hold pop up gt Set Hold Times main gt Setup Time or Hold Time side See Figure 3 44 2 Turn the general purpose knob or use the keypad to set values for the setup and for the hold times NOTE See Setup Hold Time Violation Trigger Minimum Clock Pulse Widths specification in the Performance Verification a
267. nd HPGL are compatible with various desktop publishing packages Such compatibility means you can paste files created from the oscilloscope directly into a document on any of those desktop publishing systems EPS Mono and Color formats are compatible with Tektronix Phaser Color Printers HPGL is compatible with the Tektronix HC100 Plotter and Epson is compatible with the Tektronix HC200 Printer Before you make a hardcopy you need to set up communications and hardcopy parameters Do the following procedures to set up for making hardcopies Set Communications Parameters To set up the communication parameters for a printer attached directly to the oscilloscope GPIB RS 232 or Centronics port Press SHIFT UTILITY gt System main gt I O pop up gt Confi gure main gt Hardcopy Talk Only side See Figure 3 76 he Tek Run 2 50MS s Sample RS232 Baud Rate 9600 RS 232 HW Setup Baud Rate Stop Bits Parity None Hard Flagging val ON LOJOJOlC O mi peta domy M40 ous chi 7smv 3 1d GPIB 4 30 0 Port Configure Hardware Software lt RS232 gt Hardcopy Setup DIGIC IC O O CO Figure 3 76 Utility Menu System I O TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups Set Hardcopy Parameters To specify the hardcopy format layout and type of port using the hardcopy me
268. nd Specifications manual for valid setup and hold times Positive setup time always leads the clock edge positive hold time always follows the clocking edge Setup time always leads the hold time by at least 2 ns Ts Ty 22 ns Attempting to set either time to reduce the 2 ns limit adjusts the other time to maintain the limit TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 87 Triggering on Waveforms Cursors measure the setup hold violation zone which equals setup time hold time 30 ns Data Ch1 transition occurs within 10 ns after the clock violating hold time limit The oscilloscope recognizes the violation and triggers at the clock edge 3 88 Tek Run 5 00GS 5 Average Hold Time 30 0ns Setup Hold Times a oe Setup Time ae 10 08 i C122 Diy Hold Time eel fas pls sh 10 54ns 4 StHId 1 00 OOGO Ch2 00 yon M 10 0ns Type Class source source Hold Levels lt fLogic gt lt Sthid gt Cch2 Times Holdoff Figure 3 44 Triggering on a Setup Hold Time Violation In most cases you will enter positive values for both setup and hold time Positive values set the oscilloscope to trigger if the data source is still settling inside the setup time before the clock or if it switches inside the hold time after the clock You can skew this setup ho
269. nd hold times the most common application locate the setup hold violation zone so it spans the clocking edge See the top waveform in Figure 3 40 The oscilloscope detects and triggers on data that does not become stable long enough before the clock setup time violation or that does not stay stable long enough after the clock hold time violation Negative settings for setup or hold times skew the setup hold violation zone to locate it before or after the clocking edge See the bottom and center waveforms of Figure 3 40 The oscilloscope can then detect and trigger on violations of a time range that occurs before or one that occurs after the clock NOTE Keep hold time to at least 2 ns less than the clock period or the oscillo scope cannot trigger To Check Logic To quickly check if logic triggers are selected and if so what class check the Trigger Status Trigger readout When logic triggers are selected the trigger readout displays the selected logic trigger class Pattern State or StlHld Setup Hold See Figure 3 41 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 79 Triggering on Waveforms Setup Hold Ts Setup Time Violation gt Ty Hold Time Zone Setup Hold Violation Zone Ts Ty aes Ts Ty mustbe 2ns e gt Clock Level Clock Signal Setup Hold lt Violation gt T Zone e Ty o gt Clock Level Clock Signal Setup Hold
270. nd how to autoset the TDS Oscilloscope TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 13 Tutorial Adjust the Waveform The display shows the probe compensation signal It is a 1 kHz square wave of Display approximately 0 5 V amplitude Figure 2 6 shows the main VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL sections of the front panel Each has SCALE and POSITION knobs Do the following steps to adjust the size and placement of the waveform using the front panel knobs 1 Turn the vertical SCALE knob clockwise Observe the change in the displayed waveform and the channel readout at the bottom of the display EE VERTICAL A HORIZONTAL O O VERTICAL zoom HORIZONTAL A SCALE lt SCALE gt 7z WAVEFORM OFF Figure 2 6 The VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL Controls 2 Turn the vertical POSITION knob first one direction and then the other Observe the change in the displayed waveform Then return the waveform to the center of the graticule 3 Turn the horizontal SCALE knob one click clockwise Observe the time base readout at the bottom of the display The time base should be set to 200 us div now and you should see two complete waveform cycles on the display 2 14 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial Autoset the Oscilloscope When you first connect a signal to a channel and display it the signal displayed may not be scaled and triggered correctly Use the autoset function and you should quickly get a meaningful display
271. nd zoomed view is offset in time from the first zoomed view Also zoom must be enabled side menu set to On or Preview to see the Dual Zoom displays To set the offset in time of the second zoomed waveform from the first press ZOOM gt Mode main gt Dual Zoom Offset side Then turn the general purpose knob or use the keypad to set the offset Dual Zoom offset is always positive The oscilloscope sets the offset as close to the requested value as possible An offset request of 0 0 insures that the zoom boxes are butted up against each other regardless of the zoom factor The horizontal zoom and scale factors determine the minimum offset time available Both zoom boxes always enclose equal amounts of time with the second box always offset from the first by a time equal to one box Doubling the zoom factor halves the time enclosed by either box and therefore halves the minimum offset time The oscilloscope retains any value input that is less than the minimum time available as a request if you enter that value using the keypad Increasing the zoom factor or decreasing the horizontal scale to a setting that allows the requested value sets offset time to that value You cannot set offset to less than the minimum offset time available when using the general purpose knob NOTE To make setting up Dual Zoom easier turn on Preview in the side menu In this dual window mode the zoomed display appears in the top graticule while the
272. neral purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the name of the file to print Then press the side menu Print button The Print to side menu should appear Select the port to print to from GPIB RS 232 or Centronics Then the oscilloscope will send the file in its raw form out the port The device printer receiving the file must be capable or printing the particular file format To Create a Directory To create a new directory press the side menu Create Directory button The labeling menu should appear Turn the general purpose knob or use the main menu arrow keys to select each letter Press Enter Char from the main menu to enter each letter When you have entered the name press the side menu OK Accept item See Figure 3 75 To Set Confirm Delete To turn on or off the confirm delete message toggle the side menu Confirm Delete button When the confirm delete option is OFF the oscilloscope can immediately delete files or directories When the confirm option is ON the oscilloscope warns you before it deletes files and gives you a chance to reconsider TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 163 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Set Overwrite Lock To Select a Drive k To Format k To Find More Information Printing a Hardcopy 3 164 To turn on or off the file overwrite lock toggle the side menu Overwrite Lock button When overwrite lock is on the oscilloscope will not permit you to write over a
273. ng made on that waveform 3 To select a math waveform you have created or a reference waveform you have stored press MORE and select the waveform from the More menu Press WAVEFORM OFF while the MORE button is lit to remove the display of the waveform selected in the More menu Waveform Priority When you turn off a waveform the oscilloscope automatically selects the next highest priority waveform Figure 3 4 shows the order of priority 1 CH1 1 MATH1 2 CH2 2 MATH2 3 CH3 or AX1 3 MATH3 4 CH4 or AX2 4 REF1 5 REF2 6 REF3 7 REF4 Figure 3 4 Waveform Selection Priority Note Figure 3 4 shows two orders of priority due to the following rules If you are turning off more than one waveform and you start by turning off a channel waveform all channels will be turned off before going to the MORE waveforms If you start by turning off the MORE waveforms all the MORE waveforms will be turned off before going to the channel waveforms If you turn off a channel that is a trigger source it continues to be the trigger source even though the waveform is not displayed TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 13 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Find More Information To read about selecting reference waveforms see Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 154 To read about selecting and creating math waveforms see Waveform Math on page 3 188 Scaling and Positioning Waveforms To Check Position To
274. nly 3 166 T O 3 166 Off Bus 3 177 Port 3 177 System 3 166 Talk Listen Address 3 177 V V Limit Acquire menu 3 185 Variable Persistence Display menu 3 39 Vectors 3 39 Vectors display Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 Vectors Display menu 3 39 Vertical Bar cursors 3 127 Glossary 13 Offset 3 18 Position 3 15 3 16 Readout 3 14 Scale 3 15 SCALE knob 2 14 3 15 System 2 14 Vertical deskew 3 143 Glossary 3 Vertical menu 20 MHz 3 17 250 MHz 3 17 Bandwidth 3 17 Cal Probe 3 143 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Coupling 3 17 Deskew 3 143 External Attenuation 3 18 Fine Scale 3 18 Full 3 17 Offset 3 18 Position 3 18 Set to Zero 3 18 VERTICAL MENU button 2 19 Vertical position for DC correction of FFTs 3 201 Vertical POSITION knob 3 15 3 51 Vertical Readout 3 14 Vertical SCALE knob 3 15 3 51 VGA Output 2 5 Video Line Number Cursor menu 3 131 Video Trigger Option 5 A 1 Video trigger 3 65 View Palette Color menu 3 45 W Waveform Glossary 13 Acquiring and Displaying of 3 5 Autoset on 3 8 Coupling to the oscilloscope 3 5 Interval Glossary 13 Math 3 188 Priority for turning off 3 13 Save Formats 3 157 Saving 3 151 Triggering on 3 63 Waveform clipping See Clipping Waveform Count 3 135 Waveform differentiation 3 210 Waveform FFTs 3 191 Waveform integration 3 215 Waveform memory 3 15
275. nob Setting and Readout Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample General Purpose 20 0mvo M 3004S chi fF 20 8mv ener Remove Gating Statistics E ETid Measure Measrmnt jc H Snapshot lt measure gt for Chi Measrmnt OFF OFE Histogram High Ref 90 resolution Level yo High Ref i C C Co CT D Figure 2 16 General Purpose Knob Indicators Knob Icon Highlighted Menu Item with Boxed Readout Value The Numeric Keypad Any time the general purpose knob is set to adjust a numeric parameter you can enter the value as a number using the keypad instead of using the knob Always end the entry of a number by pressing ENTER The numeric keypad also provides multipliers for engineering exponents such as m for milli M for mega and u for micro To enter these multiplier values press the SHIFT button and then press the multiplier TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial ea 1 Press Low Ref side 2 On the numeric keypad press the 2 the 0 and the ENTER buttons which sets the low measurement reference to 20 Observe that the rise time value has changed 3 Press Remove Measrmnt main gt All Measurements side That returns the display to its original state Displaying a Snapshot of You have seen how to display up to four individual automated meas
276. nt of free space on the active disk is shown in the upper right corner of the display The oscilloscope shows the amount in Kbytes or in Mbytes if the free space is I Mbyte or more To convert the amount to bytes you simply multiply the Kbytes amount times 1024 Thus the 690 Kbytes shown in Figure 3 74 690 Kbytes x 1024 bytes Kbyte 706 560 bytes Tek Run 1 00MS s Sample 0 fd0 DIR oH eca Saved Setup Use to choose Directory fdo TEKOO002 SET TEKOOO00 IMG TEKO0001 IMG TEKOO003 IMG ave Current Setup cal Factory Setup B Press SELECT to change b E0 Free S88KB 96 12 10 96 12 10 97 04 01 97 04 01 97 04 01 File Utilities 10 09 00 Delete Rename more 1of2 File utilities C Figure 3 74 File Utilities TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 161 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Delete EA To Rename 3 162 To delete a file or directory turn the general purpose knob until it scrolls the cursor over the line marked with both the name of the file or directory to delete and the file icon or directory icon as shown to the left of this page Then press the side menu Delete button To delete all files in the file list set the cursor to the selection The oscilloscope deletes directories recursively That means it
277. nting a copy of the oscilloscope display screen or for saving it to disk hardcopies can be incorporated into documents using desk top publishing software m File Utilities for managing copying organizing into directories and so on the setups waveforms and display screens that you save to disk This section ends with details on how to connect your oscilloscope into a system environment so that it can communicate with remote instruments NOTE TDS oscilloscopes do not come equipped with a hard disk drive unless you order Option HD or 2M See Options on page A 1 Saving and Recalling Setups The TDS Oscilloscope can store up to ten instrument setups in internal memory that you may later recall This section describes how you save and recall a setup and how you can recall the factory default setup Save a setup when you want to reuse it later For example after changing the setting during the course of an experiment you may want to quickly return to your original setup Save setups are retained even when you turn the oscilloscope off or unplug it TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 151 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Save a Setup To save the current setup of the oscilloscope 1 Press SAVE RECALL SETUP Save Current Setup main STOP Before doing step 2 that follows note that if you choose a setup location labeled user you will overwrite the user setup previously stored there You can store setup
278. ntrol setup Autoset adjusts controls in these categories Acquisition Display Horizontal Trigger and Vertical TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms To Autoset the Do the following steps to automatically set up the oscilloscope Oscilloscope 1 Press the channel selection button such as CH 1 corresponding to your input channel to make it active 2 Press AUTOSET If you use Autoset when one or more channels are displayed the oscilloscope selects the lowest numbered channel for horizontal scaling and triggering Vertically all channels in use are individually scaled If you use Autoset when no channels are displayed the oscilloscope will turn on channel one CH 1 and scale it NOTE Autoset may change vertical position in order to position the waveform appropriately It always sets vertical offset to O V If a standard mask is active Autoset adjusts the selected trace to match the mask if possible Vertical scale and offset horizontal scale trigger position full bandwidth average and trigger parameters are set as required for the standard If a calibrated optical probe is attached to Chl and an OC or FC standard is selected Ch 1 is selected and other channels are turned off List of Autoset Defaults Table 3 1 lists the autoset defaults Table 3 1 Autoset defaults Control Changed by autoset to Selected channel Numerically lowest of the displayed channels
279. nts on a waveform record Graticule measurements provide you with quick visual estimates For example you might look at a waveform amplitude and say it is a little more than 100 mV This section briefly describes how to take graticule measurements Measure Waveform To measure the amplitude of a waveform do the following steps Amplitude 1 Press the channel selection button of the channel you wish to measure Note the vertical scale factor for the channel in the channel readout on screen 2 Count the graticule divisions between two features to be measured and multiply by the vertical scale factor For example if you count five major vertical graticule divisions between the minimum and maximum values of a waveform at a scale factor of 100 mV di vision then you can easily calculate your peak to peak voltage as 5 divisions x 100 mV division 500 mV NOTE When you select the NTSC graticule the volts per division of all selected channels is set to 143 mV div 152 mV div for PAL where the divisions are those of the conventional graticule not the divisions of the video graticules For NTSC the actual grid lines represent 10 IRE and for PAL the lines are 100 mV apart 3 132 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms Measure Waveform Time To measure the time of a waveform repeat the process just described but count the horizontal divisions and multiply by the horizontal scale factor For
280. nu do the following steps 1 Press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU to bring up the Hardcopy menu 2 Press Format main gt Thinkjet Deskjet DeskjetC Laserjet Epson DPU 411 DPU 412 PCX PCX Color TIFF BMP Mono BMP Color RLE Color EPS Mono Img EPS Color Img EPS Mono Pit EPS Color Pit Interleaf or HPGL side Press more side to page through all of these format choices NOTE Some formats such as DeskJetC require up to several minutes to process and print the screen When using these formats be careful not to inadvertently abort the print by pressing the Hardcopy button for a second print before the oscilloscope has finished processing and transmitting the first one 3 Press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU gt Layout main gt Landscape or Portrait side See Figure 3 77 Landscape Format Portrait Format Figure 3 77 Hardcopy Formats 4 Press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU gt Palette main gt Hardcopy or Current side to specify a hardcopy palette Current uses the current palette settings to create the hardcopy while Hardcopy sets the hardcopy palette to an optimal setting for hardcopy devices 5 Press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU gt Port main to specify the output channel to send your hardcopy through The choices are GPIB RS 232 Centronics and File The menu item File chooses the disk drive as the destination for hardcopies See To Save to a Disk on page 3 171 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User
281. o set up the oscilloscope to let it do the work of taking measurements for you Because automatic measurements use the waveform record points they are generally more accurate and quicker than cursor and graticule measurements The oscilloscope will continuously update and display these measurements Automatic measurements are taken over the entire waveform record or if you specify gated measurements see page 3 118 over the region specified by the vertical cursors Automated measurements are not taken just on the displayed portions of waveforms The oscilloscope can also display almost all of the measurements at once see Take a Snapshot of Measurements on page 3 123 The TDS Oscilloscope provides you with automatic measurements Table 3 10 lists brief definitions of the automated measurements in the oscilloscope for more details see Appendix B Algorithms page B 1 Table 3 10 Measurement definitions Name tt Amplitude Area Cycle Area J Burst Width ve Cycle Mean 3 114 Definition Voltage measurement The high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude High Low Voltage over time measurement The area over the entire waveform or gated region in volt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative Voltage over time measurement The area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region in volt s
282. o the disk provides a convenient way to store hardcopies You can print hardcopies stored on disk at a site remote from where the hardcopies were captured Or you might load stored hardcopies from disk into your desktop publishing software that runs on a PC compatible computer TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 171 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Print Using a Controller 3 172 To make your hardcopies use the procedures that follow Connect to a Hardcopy Device To connect a controller with two ports between the oscilloscope and the hardcopy device connect from the oscilloscope GPIB connector rear panel to the controller GPIB port and from the controller RS 232 or Centronics port to the hardcopy device See Figure 3 80 Use the GPIB port to remotely request and receive a hardcopy from the oscilloscope Use the RS 232 or the Centronics port on the controller to print output Digitizing Oscilloscope PC Compatible Centronics or GPIB Cable RS 232 Cable Figure 3 80 Connecting the Oscilloscope and Hardcopy Device Via a PC Print If your controller is PC compatible and it uses the Tektronix GURU or S3FG210 National Instruments GPIB PCII IIA GPIB package do the following steps to print a hardcopy 1 Use the MS DOS cd command to move to the directory that holds the software that came with your GPIB board For example if you installed th
283. obes TDS 520C Two P6139A 10X 500 MHz Passive probes TDS 680B TDS 684B TDS 784C No probes standard P6139A P6139A P6243 P6139A P6139A P6139A Optional Accessories A 4 Front Cover Accessory Pouch TDS 644B TDS 684B TDS 700C U S Power Cord 200 3696 01 016 1268 00 161 0230 01 You can also order the optional accessories listed in Table A 3 Table A 3 Optional Accessories Accessory Part Number Service Manual 070 9875 XX Oscilloscope Cart K420 Rack Mount Kit for field conversion 016 1236 00 Accessory Pouch TDS 500C TDS 620B TDS 680B 016 1268 00 Soft Sided Carrying Case 016 0909 01 Transit Case 016 1135 00 GPIB Cable 1 meter 012 0991 01 GPIB Cable 2 meter 012 0991 00 Centronics Cable 012 1214 00 RS 232 Cable 012 1298 00 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix A Options and Accessories Accessory Probes The following optional accessory probes are recommended for use with your oscilloscope P6701B Optical to Electrical Analog Converter 500 to 950 nm DC to 1 GHz 1 V mW P6703B Optical to E lectrical Analog Converter 1100 to 1700 nm DC to 1 GHz 1 V mW P6723 Optical Logic Probe 1310 to 1550 nm 20 to 650 Mb s 8 to 28 dBm AFTDS Differential Signal Adapter AMT75 75 Q to 50 Q Adapter P6243 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 1 0 GHz P6245 Active high speed digital voltage probe FET DC to 1 5 GHz P6246 Active high bandwidth diff
284. ods of sampling are real time sampling and equivalent time sampling Setup Hold trigger A mode in which the oscilloscope triggers when a data source changes state within the setup or hold time relative to a clock source Positive setup times precede the clock edge positive hold times follow the clock edge The clock edge may be the rising or falling edge Select button A button that changes which of the two cursors is active Selected waveform The waveform on which all measurements are performed and which is affected by vertical position and scale adjustments The light over one of the channel selector buttons indicates the current selected waveform TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary 11 Glossary Glossary 12 Side menu Menu that appears to the right of the display These selections expand on main menu selections Side menu buttons Bezel buttons to the right of the side menu display They allow you to select items in the side menu Slew Rate trigger A mode in which the oscilloscope triggers based on how fast a pulse edge traverses slews between an upper and lower threshold The edge of the pulse may be positive negative or either The oscilloscope can trigger on slew rates faster or slower than a user specified rate Slope The direction at a point on a waveform You can calculate the direction by computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity Y to the change in the horiz
285. of acquisitions The oscilloscope saves the highest and lowest values in two adjacent intervals similar to the Peak Detect mode But Envelope mode unlike Peak Detect gathers peaks over many trigger events After each trigger event the oscilloscope acquires data and then compares the min max values from the current acquisition with those stored from previous acquisitions The final display shows the most extreme values for all the acquisitions for each point in the waveform record Average Mode Average mode lets you acquire and display a waveform record that is the averaged result of several acquisitions This mode reduces random noise The oscilloscope acquires data after each trigger event using Sample mode It then averages the record point from the current acquisition with those stored from previous acquisitions ae lk Peak Detect Mode Peak Detect mode alternates between saving the highest sample in one acquisition interval and lowest sample in the next acquisition interval Peak Detect mode only works with real time noninterpolated sampling If you set the time base so fast that it requires real time interpolation or equivalent time sampling the mode automatically changes from Peak Detect to Sample although the menu selection will not change 3 30 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Single Waveform Acquisition Samples Acquired in Four Acquisition Displayed Wave
286. off the oscilloscope toggle the ON STBY switch 1 8 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual D Overview This chapter describes the basic concepts of operating the TDS Oscilloscope Understanding the basic concepts of your oscilloscope will help you use it much more effectively The first section Operating Interface Maps quickly shows you how the oscilloscope controls are organized and where you can read about them It also illustrates the general procedures for operating the menu system This section includes the titles m Front Panel Map m Rear Panel Map m Display Map m To Operate a Menu m To Operate a Pop Up Menu The second section Tutorial contains example procedures that lead you through the fundamental tasks needed to display a waveform measurement It also includes an example procedure that teaches you how to store a setup of the oscilloscope controls for later use This section includes the following tuto rial examples m Setting Up for the Examples m Example 1 Displaying a Waveform m Example 2 Displaying Multiple Waveforms m Example 3 Taking Automated Measurements m Example 4 Saving Setups To explore these topics in more depth and to read about topics not covered in this section see Reference A list of the topics covered begins on Page 3 1 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 1 Overview 2 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual E en Operating Interface Maps
287. often missed during longer dead times that accompany normal DSO display This section describes how to use InstaVu mode and how it differs from normal acquisition mode Figure 3 29 illustrates how InstaVu acquisition mode differs from the normal acquisition mode used by digital storage oscilloscopes Note that normal mode follows a capture waveform digitize waveform update waveform memory dis play waveform cycle Normal mode misses short term deviations occurring during the long dead times Typical waveform capture rates are 50 waveforms per second TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 55 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 3 56 To Use InstaVu Mode InstaVu mode increases the waveform capture rate to up to 400 000 waveforms per second maximum waveform rate depends on oscilloscope model updating the waveform array many times between displays This very fast frame rate greatly increases the probability that runts glitches and other short term changes will accumulate in waveform memory The oscilloscope then displays the waveform at the normal display rate using variable or infinite persistence You can control how long the waveform persists on screen by selecting variable persistence and setting a decay constant To turn on InstaVu mode do either of the two following steps 1 Press the front panel button Insta Vu See Figure 3 28 2 Press DISPLAY gt Mode main Push Mode again to toggle to InstaVu
288. olds 3 94 3 98 Time 3 102 Timeout 3 101 3 102 Trigger When 3 83 3 85 3 98 True for less than 3 83 True for more than 3 83 Type 3 72 3 73 3 96 3 101 Type Pulse 3 91 Width 3 92 3 96 MAIN TRIGGER OUTPUT BNC 2 5 Map Math Color menu 3 47 Map Reference Color menu 3 47 Mask Counting 3 136 Masks creating user 3 138 3 139 editing user 3 138 3 139 storing user 3 140 Math waveform derivative See Derivative math waveform FFT See FFT math waveform integral See Integral math waveform Math waveforms 3 191 Disallowed in InstaVu 3 59 Math Color menu 3 47 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index Math1 2 3 More menu 3 191 Maximum 3 115 Glossary 7 Mean 3 115 3 135 Glossary 8 Mean 1 StdDev 3 135 Mean 2 StdDev 3 135 Mean 3 StdDev 3 135 Mean dBm 3 116 B 10 MEASURE button 3 117 3 135 Measure Delay menu Create Measrmnt 3 123 Delay To 3 122 Edges 3 123 Measure Delay To 3 122 OK Create Measurement 3 123 Measure Delay To Measure Delay menu 3 122 Measure menu 3 117 3 124 Gating 3 119 High Ref 3 121 High Low Setup 3 120 Histogram 3 120 Low Ref 3 121 Mid Ref 3 121 Mid2 Ref 3 121 Min Max 3 120 Reference Levels 3 120 Remove Measrmnt 3 118 3 124 Select Measrmnt 3 117 3 122 3 135 Set Levels in units 3 121 Snapshot 3 124 Statistics 3 125 3 126 Measurement Amplitude 3 114 Glossary 1 Area 3 114 Glossary 2
289. on intensified samples TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Interleaving A TDS 500C or TDS 700C Oscilloscope can interleave its channels to attain higher digitizing rates without equivalent time sampling or interpolating The oscilloscope applies the digitizing resources of unused channels that is channels that are turned off to sample those that are in use turned on Table 3 2 lists how interleaving more than one digitizer to sample a channel extends the maximum digitizing rate Once you set horizontal scale to exceed the maximum digitizing rate for the number of channels in use see Table 3 2 the oscilloscope will not be able to get enough samples to create a waveform record At that point the oscilloscope will either interpolate to calculate additional samples or it will switch from real to equivalent time sampling to obtain additional samples See Interpolation on page 3 28 and Equivalent Time Sampling on page 3 27 Table 3 2 How interleaving affects sample rate No of Maximum digitizing rate channels on TDS 520C amp TDS 724C TDS 540C TDS 754C TDS 784C One 1 GS sec 2 GS sec 2 GS sec 4 GS sec Two 500 MS sec 1 GS sec 2 GS sec 2 GS sec Three or Four Not Available 500 MS sec 1 GS sec 1 GS sec 1 When real time sampling GS Gigasamples MS Megasamples The Acquisition Modes All oscilloscopes in this manual support the following four acquisition mode
290. ontal quantity The two values are rising and falling Tek Secure This feature erases all waveform and setup memory locations setup memories are replaced with the factory setup Then it checks each location to verify erasure This feature finds use where this oscilloscope is used to gather security sensitive data such as is done for research or development projects Time base The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis attributes of a waveform record The time base determines when and how long to acquire record points Timeout trigger A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the oscilloscope does NOT find a pulse of the specified polarity and level within the specified time period Trigger An event that marks time zero in the waveform record It results in acquisi tion and display of the waveform Trigger level The vertical level the trigger signal must cross to generate a trigger on edge trigger mode TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary Vertical bar cursors The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a waveform record The oscilloscope displays the value of the active move able cursor with respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars Waveform The shape or form visible representation of a signal Waveform interval The time interval between record points as displayed ee XY format A display format that compares the vo
291. or use with the AM 503S A6302 A6312 and P6021 Peak pulse 2 0 kA 0 5 Hz to 20 MHz with AM 503S A6302 P5210 Differential high voltage probe 5 6 kV DC peak AC 50 MHz TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix A Options and Accessories Accessory Software The optional accessories listed in Table A 4 are Tektronix software products recommended for use with your oscilloscope Table A 4 Accessory software Software Part number Wavewriter AWG and waveform creation S3FT400 WaveStar Waveform capture and documentation WSTR31 Telecommunication Package and i Pattern Software TTiP Warranty Information Check for the full warranty statements for this product and the products listed above on the first page after the title page of each product manual Service Assurance Tektronix offers the following services that you can purchase any time during the warranty period of this product m REPXXXX provides one year of post warranty repair support It is available in One year increments up to three years m CALXXXX provides one year of calibration support It is available in one year increments up to five years TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual A 7 Appendix A Options and Accessories A 8 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual E Appendix B Algorithms The TDS Oscilloscope can take 25 automatic measurements By knowing how it makes these calculations you may be
292. or wider than some specified range of time defined by the upper limit and lower limit To set up for width triggering do the following proce dures Select Width Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Width pop up Select the Source Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side The source selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes Select the Polarity Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Width pop up gt Polarity main gt Positive or Negative side Set to Trig When To set the range of widths in units of time the trigger source will search for and to specify whether to trigger on pulses that are outside this range or within this range do the following steps 1 Press TRIGGER MENU Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Width pop up gt Trig When main 2 Press Within Limits side if you want the oscilloscope to trigger on pulses that fall within the specified range If you want it to trigger on pulses that are outside the range then press Out of Limits side 3 96 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms 3 To set the range of pulse widths in units of time press Upper Limit side and Lower Limit side Enter the values with the general purpose knob or keypad The Upper Limit
293. orial NOTE If you are using a passive probe such as the P6139A probe the corners on your displayed signal may look rounded or pointed See Figure 2 10 If so then you may need to compensate your probe See To Compensate Passive Probes on page 3 6 eM sire Figure 2 10 Display Signals Requiring Probe Compensation Example 2 Displaying Multiple Waveforms Add a Waveform The TDS Oscilloscope can display up to four channels three math waveforms and four reference waveforms at one time Do the following tasks to learn how to display and control more than one waveform at a time The VERTICAL section of the front panel contains the channel selection buttons These buttons are CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 and MORE See Fig ure 2 11 CH 3 and CH 4 will be replaced by AUX1 and AUX2 on some models see Default Model on page xii and Differences by Model on page 1 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 17 Tutorial u A ees VERTICAL CHT O CH 2 VERTICAL Gii C Z CH3 A SCALE zZ J CH 4 J MORE H WAVEFORM OFF MATH REF U Figure 2 11 The Channel Buttons and Lights Each of the channel CH buttons has a light behind its label Right now the CH 1 light is on That light indicates that the vertical controls are set to adjust channel 1 Do the following steps to add a waveform to the display 1 If you are not continuing from the previous example foll
294. orm Start See Mean dBm on page B 10 Amplitude measurement The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude PeaktoPeak Max Min TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 11 Appendix B Algorithms Period Phase Timing measurement Time taken for one complete signal cycle The reciprocal of frequency Measured in seconds Period MCross3 MCross1 Timing measurement The amount of phase shift expressed in degrees of the target waveform cycle between the MidRef crossings of two different wave forms Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the other Phase is a dual waveform measurement that is it is measured from a target waveform to a reference waveform To get a specific phase measurement you must specify the target and reference sources Phase is determined in the following manner 1 The first MidRefCrossing MCrossI Target and third MCross3 in the source target waveform are found 2 The period of the target waveform is calculated see Period above 3 The first MidRefCrossing MCross1Ref in the reference waveform crossing in the same direction polarity as that found MCross1 Target for the target waveform is found 4 The phase is determined by the following _ MCross1Ref MCross1Target y Phase Period 360 If the target waveform leads the reference waveform phase is positive if it
295. oscilloscope is not powered on the screen is blank push the front panel ON STBY button to toggle it on see Figure 1 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Start Up Tektronix TDS 684B ieren Tue oscuoscore WA Tek Run 100kS s5 Sample Tektronix 7 TDS 6846 Digitizing Oscilloscope F v4 0e Options 13 1F 2F c Copyright Tektronix Inc 1991 1995 All rights reserved Power On self check PASSED Push CLEAR MENU to proceed M 500s Chi F OV 17Jul 1995 09 29 30 ON STBY Button Figure 1 2 ON STBY Button The ON STBY button controls power to most of the instrument circuits Power continues to go to certain parts even when this switch is set to STBY Once the oscilloscope is installed it is typical to leave the principal power switch on and use the ON STBY button instead of the power switch Self Test The oscilloscope automatically performs power up tests each time it is turned on It will come up with a display screen that states whether or not it passed the self test To determine the self test results check the screen If the self test passed the status display screen will be removed after a few seconds If the self test fails call your local Tektronix Service Center Depending on the type of failure you may still be able to use the oscilloscope before it is serviced Power Off To power
296. ossary 7 7 Glossary 8 Mean Amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform Minimum Amplitude voltage measurement of the minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage NAND A logic Boolean function in which the output of the AND function is complemented true becomes false and false becomes true On the oscilloscope that is a trigger logic pattern and state function Negative duty cycle A timing measurement representing the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Negative overshoot measurement Amplitude voltage measurement Low Min x 100 NegativeOvershoot Atphiin e Negative width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points falling edge MidRef default 50 and rising edge MidRef default 50 on a negative pulse Normal trigger mode A mode on which the oscilloscope does not acquire a waveform record unless a valid trigger event occurs It waits for a valid trigger event before acquiring waveform data NOR A logic Boolean function in which the output of the OR function is complemented true becomes false and false becomes true On the oscilloscope that is a trigger logic pattern and state function OR A logic Boolean function in which the output is true if any of the inputs are true Otherwise the output is false On the oscil
297. ow the instructions on page 2 9 under the heading Setting Up for the Examples 2 Press SETUP gt Recall Factory Setup main gt OK Confirm Factory Init side 3 Press AUTOSET 4 Press CH 2 The display shows a second waveform which represents the signal on channel 2 Since there is nothing connected to the CH 2 input connector this waveform is a flat line There are several other important things to observe m The channel readout on the display now shows the settings for both Ch1 and Ch2 2 18 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial m There are two channel indicators at the left edge of the graticule Right now they overlap m The light above the CH 2 button is now on and the CH 1 light is off Because the knobs control only one channel at a time the vertical controls are now set to adjust channel 2 m The trigger readout still indicates that the trigger is detecting trigger events on channel one The trigger source is not changed simply by adding a channel You can change the trigger source by using the TRIGGER MENU button to display the trigger menu 5 Turn the vertical POSITION knob clockwise to move the channel 2 waveform up on the graticule You will notice that the channel reference indicator for channel 2 moves with the waveform 6 Press VERTICAL MENU gt Coupling main The VERTICAL MENU button displays a menu that gives you control over many vertical channel parameters See Figur
298. p gt Class main gt Pattern pop up TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 81 Triggering on Waveforms Tek Run 100kS s Sample 4 Logic Pattern Inputs a Pulse__bomv M 500s Pattern HXXX D comm LOJO OC C O Video M cit ee rigger Reena Type Class ial a uts i when hresholds amp lt tagic gt lt Pattern gt Goes TRUE Holdoff a Figure 3 42 Logic Trigger Menu To Define Pattern Inputs To set the logic state for each of the input channels Chl Ch2 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Pattern pop up gt Define Inputs main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch side 2 Repeatedly press each input selected in step to choose either High H Low L or Don t Care X for each channel see Figure 3 42 To Set Thresholds To set the logic threshold for each channel 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt Pattern pop up gt Set Thresholds main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch side 2 Use the MAIN TRIGGER LEVEL knob the general purpose knob or the keypad to set each threshold 3 82 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms To Define the Logic To choose the logic function you want applied to the input channels see page 3 77 for de
299. pecial trigger used on communication signals See tables 3 8 and 3 9 starting on page 3 103 for a list of supported codes standards and pulse forms Video available as option 05 is a special trigger used on video circuits It helps you investigate events that occur when a video signal generates a horizontal or vertical sync pulse Supported classes of video triggers include NTSC PAL SECAM and high definition TV signals i Trigger Modes The trigger mode determines how the oscilloscope behaves in the absence of a trigger event The oscilloscope provides two trigger modes normal and automatic Normal trigger mode enables the oscilloscope to acquire a waveform only when it is triggered If no trigger occurs the oscilloscope will not acquire a waveform You can push FORCE TRIGGER to force the oscilloscope to make a single acquisition TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 65 Triggering on Waveforms Trigger Holdoff 3 66 Automatic trigger mode auto mode enables the oscilloscope to acquire a waveform even if a trigger does not occur Auto mode uses a timer that starts after a trigger event occurs If another trigger event is not detected before the timer times out the oscilloscope forces a trigger anyway The length of time it waits for a trigger event depends on the time base setting Be aware that auto mode when forcing triggers in the absence of valid triggering events does not sync the waveform on t
300. r a name is a main menu or side menu item is clearly indicated Press VERTICAL MENU gt Coupling main gt DC side gt Bandwidth main gt 250 MHz side Using the convention just described results in instructions that are graphically intuitive and simplifies procedures For example the instruction just given replaces these five steps 1 Bu CW S 5 Press the front panel button VERTICAL MENU Press the main menu button Coupling Press the side menu button DC Press the main menu button Bandwidth Press the side menu button 250 MHz Sometimes you may have to make a selection from a pop up menu Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up In this example you repeatedly press the main menu button Type until Edge is highlighted in the pop up menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual xiii Preface xiv TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual E Product Description The Tektronix TDS Oscilloscope is a superb tool for acquiring displaying and measuring waveforms Its performance addresses the needs of both benchtop lab and portable applications with the following features m A maximum sample rate of up to 5 GS s per channel depending on the model see Table 1 1 Key Features and Differences of by Models m A analog bandwidth of 1 GHz or 500 MHz
301. r cursors is the time the logic function is TRUE Since this time is more 216 us than that set in the TRUE for more than menu item 150 us the oscilloscope issues the trigger at that point not at the point at which it has been TRUE for 150 us Tek Stopped 4671 Acquisitions True gt 150 0000us A 4 Chi s00mvaQ soomva M 100pus PatterxHHXX D ig EE STOE mi ey a Noor ET _ Type Class Logic when amp stogic gt lt Pattern gt Inputs AND True gt Thresholds Holdoff Logic Pattern Trig When Goes TRUE Goes FALSE TRUE for less than ens TRUE for more than ERATE Co CoD C Cc Figure 3 43 Logic Trigger Menu Time Qualified TRUE Oooo o TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms To State Trigger When you select the logic class State the oscilloscope uses channel 4 as a clock and triggers on a logic circuit made from the rest of the channels pages 3 76 through 3 78 describe how state triggers work To use state triggering do the following procedures Select State Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic pop up gt Class main gt State pop up Define Inputs To set the logic state for each of the input channels Ch1 Ch2 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Logic
302. r the Set FFT Vert Scale to side 2 Press CURSOR Mode main gt Independent side gt Func tion main gt H Bars side Use the general purpose knob to align the selected cursor to a level that places the tops of the magnitudes of frequen cies of interest above the cursor but places other magnitudes completely below the cursor 3 Read the level in dB from the readout Note the level for use in step 5 4 Press MORE main gt Change Waveform Definition menu side Press Set FFT Vert Scale to side repeatedly to choose either Phase rad or Phase deg 5 Press Suppress Phase at Amplitudes side Use the general purpose knob to set phase suppression to the value obtained using the H Bar cursor Do not change the window selection or you will invalidate the results obtained using the cursor To learn how to optimize your display of FFT data read about how the FFT windows data before computing the FFT math waveform Understanding FFT windowing can help you get more useful displays Windowing Process The oscilloscope multiplies the FFT time domain record by one of four FFT windows before it inputs the record to the FFT function Figure 3 99 shows how the time domain record is processed TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications The FFT windowing acts like a bandpass filter between the FFT time domain record and the FFT frequency domain record The shape of the windo
303. r type is logic or video You can also set the level to 50 in the Trigger menu under the main menu item Level if edge trigger or glitch or width pulse trigger is selected Note that the MAIN LEVEL knob and menu items apply only to the main trigger level To modify the delayed trigger level use the Level item in the Delayed Trigger menu To Force a Trigger To force the oscilloscope to immediately start acquiring a waveform record even without a trigger event press the FORCE TRIG front panel button Forcing a trigger is useful when in normal trigger mode and the input signal is not supplying a valid trigger By pressing FORCE TRIG you can quickly confirm that there is a signal present for the oscilloscope to acquire Once that is established you can determine how to trigger on it press SET LEVEL TO 50 check trigger source setting and so on The oscilloscope recognizes and acts upon FORCE TRIG even when you press it before the end of pretrigger holdoff However the button has no effect if the acquisition system is stopped TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 69 Triggering on Waveforms To Single Trigger To trigger on the next valid trigger event and then stop press SHIFT FORCE TRIG Now press the RUN STOP button each time you want to initiate the single sequence of acquisitions To leave Single Trig mode press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Stop Af ter main RUN STOP Button Only side See the description und
304. r value holds time in seconds between samples m The third header value holds the trigger position expressed as an index in the data position m The fourth header value refers to the fractional trigger position Also note that the delimiters are carriage returns To Delete Waveforms To delete a reference waveform s that you no longer need TDS 600B Press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Delete Refs main gt Delete Ref1 Delete Ref2 Delete Ref3 Delete Ref4 or Delete All Refs side TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press SAVE RECALL WAVEFORM gt Normal pop up gt Delete Refs main gt Delete Ref1 Delete Ref2 Delete Ref3 Delete Ref4 or Delete All Refs side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 157 Saving Waveforms and Setups To Delete All Waveforms To remove all stored reference waveforms and setups use the feature called Tek and Setups Secure See To Delete All Setups and Waveforms on page 3 153 To Display a To display a waveform in internal reference memory Saved Waveform Press MORE gt Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 or Ref4 main See Figure 3 73 Note that in Figure 3 73 the main menu items Ref2 Ref3 and Ref4 appear shaded while Ref1 does not References that are empty appear shaded in the More main menu la Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample Math Change Math waveform definition No Extended mee Processsing Average 2 300m Oooo o
305. rconnect cabling 3 175 Index 12 Preparation for 3 174 Procedures for 3 176 Selecting and configuring the port 3 176 Remove Measrmnt Measure menu 3 118 3 124 Rename File Utilities menu 3 162 Repetitive Signal Acquire menu 3 34 Reset How to execute 3 11 Reset All Mappings To Factory Color menu 3 49 Reset All Palettes To Factory Color menu 3 49 Reset Current Palette To Factory Color menu 3 49 Reset to Factory Color Color menu 3 46 Reset Zoom Factors Zoom menu 3 52 Restore Colors Color menu 3 48 Ring Bell if Condition Met Acquire menu 3 187 Rise time 2 23 3 116 Glossary 11 Rising edge Delayed Trigger menu 3 111 Rising edge Main Trigger menu 3 76 3 85 3 86 RLE Color Hardcopy menu 3 167 RMS 3 116 Glossary 11 RS 232 2 5 RS 232 Port 3 167 3 174 RS232C Centronics Hardcopy Interface Option 13 A 1 RUN STOP 3 61 RUN STOP Acquire menu 3 36 Runt trigger 3 89 3 90 Glossary 11 How to set up 3 93 3 112 Runt Main Trigger menu 3 93 S Sample acquisition mode 3 30 Glossary 11 Sample interval Glossary 1 1 Sample Rate Maximum 3 29 Sample Acquire menu 3 33 Sampling 3 26 Glossary 11 Sampling and acquisition mode 3 34 Sampling and digitizing 3 25 Saturation Color menu 3 46 Save Setups 3 151 Save Acq Save Recall Waveform menu 3 156 Save Current Setup Save Recall Setup menu 3 152 Save Format Save Recall Waveform menu 3 157 Save Wav
306. rd disk Option applies to TDS 500C amp TDS 700C only 05 Video trigger Oscilloscope comes with tools for investigating events that occur when a video signal generates a horizontal or vertical sync pulse These tools allow investigation of a range of NTSC PAL SECAM and high definition TV signals 13 RS 232 Centronics Hard Add RS 232 C and Centronics interface ports copy Interface Ports Option applies to TDS 500C only 1K Scope cart K420 scope cart This cart can help transport the oscilloscope around many lab environ ments TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual A 1 Appendix A Options and Accessories Table A 1 Options cont Option Label Description 1M 130 000 record length Extend record length from 50 000 samples standard as follows TDS 520C and TDS 724C To 250 000 samples on one channel and 130 000 on two channels TDS 540C TDS 754C amp TDS 784C To 500 000 samples on one channel 250 000 on two channels and 130 000 samples on three or four channels Option is only available for the models listed above 2M 8 M acquisition length Extend acquisition length from 50 000 samples standard as follows TDS 520C and TDS 724C To 2 M samples on two channels and 4 M on one channel TDS 540C TDS 754C amp TDS 784C To 2 M samples on three or four channels 4 M on two channels and 8 M samples on one channel Option is only available for the models listed above 1R Rackmount Oscilloscope
307. reference point The zero reference point is the point at the center of the FFT math waveform but corresponds to various points on the source time domain record See Figure 3 96 on page 3 199 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications To measure the phase relative to most source waveforms you need only to center the positive peak around the zero phase point For instance center the positive half cycle for a sine or square wave around the zero phase point Use the following method m First be sure the FFT math waveform is selected in the More menu then set horizontal position to 50 in the Horizontal menu This positions the zero phase reference point to the horizontal center of the screen m In the Horizontal menu vary the trigger position to center the positive peak of the source waveform at the horizontal center of screen Alternately you can adjust the trigger level knob to bring the positive peak to center screen if the phase reference waveform has slow enough edges When impulse testing and measuring phase align the impulse input into the system to the zero reference point of the FFT time domain waveform m Set the trigger position to 50 and horizontal position to 50 for all record lengths less than 15 K m For records with a 100 K length set the trigger position to 5 Use the horizontal position knob to move the trigger T on screen to the center horizontal graticul
308. retrigger Glossary 10 Preview Zoom menu 3 52 Principal power switch 1 7 2 5 Print File Utilities menu 3 163 Printer Color Option 3I and 3P A 3 Printing a Hardcopy Reference Article 3 164 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Probe Cal 3 143 Probe usage 1 5 Probe channel deskew 3 143 Glossary 3 Probes Accessories A 5 Active voltage D 3 Compensation 2 17 Glossary 10 Compensation of 3 6 Compensation Signal 2 14 Connection 2 9 Current D 4 Definition Glossary 10 Differential active D 4 Fixtured active D 4 General purpose high input resistance D 1 High speed D 4 High voltage D 2 Low impedance Zo D 2 Optical D 5 Option 22 to add A 2 Option 23 to add A 2 Option 24 to add A 2 Option 26 to add A 2 Option 27 to add A 2 Option 2D to delete A 3 Option 4D to delete A 3 P6205 Active 1 5 Passive 3 6 Passive voltage D 1 Selection D 1 Procedures Inspection and Cleaning E E 2 Product description 1 1 Programmer manual F 1 Programming GPIB F 1 Programming Examples F Propagation delay 3 115 Pulse trigger 3 65 3 89 definition of classes 3 89 Pulse triggers definitions of 3 90 Pulse Main Trigger menu 3 72 3 93 3 96 3 101 Q Quantizing Glossary 10 R Rack mounting A 2 Readout Acquisition 3 33 Channel 2 6 3 11 3 50 Cursors 2 6 Index 11 Index Edge trigger 3 72 General purpose knob 2 6
309. rithmetic mean If Start End then return the interpolated value at Start Otherwise End Waveform t dt Start Mean End Start x SampleInterval For details of the integration algorithm see page B 15 The normalized mean If the waveform source is from an optical probe this can give average optical power Mean dBm 10 0 log o Mean 0 001 Amplitude voltage measurement The minimum amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Examine all Waveform samples from Start to End inclusive and set Min equal to the smallest magnitude Waveform value found TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms Negative Duty Cycle Negative Overshoot Negative Width Optical Power Peak to Peak Timing measurement The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage NegativeWidth is defined in Negative Width below If Period 0 or undefined then return an error NegativeWidth Period we NegativeDutyCycle Amplitude voltage measurement NegativeOvershoot Amplitude Note that this value should never be negative unless High or Low are set out of range Timing measurement The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse If MCross1 Polarity then NegativeWidth MCross2 MCross1 else NegativeWidth MCross3 MCross2 Wavef
310. rn more about trigger mode and holdoff see the descriptions Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 When you select the pulse class Runt the oscilloscope will trigger on a short pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first To set up for runt triggering do the following procedures Select Runt Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Runt pop up See Figure 3 47 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 93 Triggering on Waveforms Select the Source To specify which channel becomes the pulse trigger source Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side The source selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes Select the Polarity To specify the direction of the runt pulse Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Runt pop up gt Polarity main gt Positive Negative or Either side Positive looks for positive going runt pulses Negative looks for negative going runt pulses Either looks for both positive and negative runt pulses Set to Trig When To determine how wide a runt pulse the oscilloscope will trigger on 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Runt pop up gt Trig When main 2 Press Occurs to trigger on all runt
311. robe installed is different from that stored for the last Probe Cal Therefore the oscilloscope sets the status to Initialized If a probe has a simple oscilloscope interface and the probe attenuation factor is the same as was stored at the last Probe Cal the oscilloscope cannot determine whether it is the same probe Therefore it displays the Re use Probe Calibration data menu See Figure 3 70 If the Re use Probe Calibration data menu is displayed you can choose one of the following options Press OK Use Existing Data side to use the Probe Cal data last stored to compensate the probe Press OK Erase Probe Cal Data side to erase the Probe Cal data last stored and use the probe uncompensated Press CLEAR MENU on the front panel to retain the Probe Cal data last stored and use the probe uncompensated TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms le Tek Running 100kS 5 Samp Re use Probe Cal OK Use Existing Cal Data Re use Probe Calibration data Probe cal data exists for MiA but it may not be for the attached probe To use the existing probe cal data for this probe press Use Existing Cal Data To use the probe uncalibrated and erase the existing cal data press Erase Probe Cal Data To use the probe uncalibrated while retaining OK the existing cal data for later use press Erase Probe Clear Menu sake Cal Data chi 1 00 V T 00 M 500p
312. robes also reduce the maximum volts div to 10 V as just described This behavior results in 50 Q nonAC coupling which is appropriate for such probes probes with a level 2 interface do not display Q in the readout NOTE If you remove an active probe the oscilloscope does not switch coupling back to 1 MQ nor AC if it was previously selected Nor does the oscilloscope when you restore 1 MQ coupling return to a volts division setting that was reduced due to the 50 Q selection In general you must set channel scale input coupling and impedance appropriate for your input coupling scheme Be sure to switch to 1 MQ for any input signal not from a 50 Q system To find a procedure for changing the coupling and input impedance settings see To Change Vertical Parameters on page 3 17 To find a list of available probes see Accessory Probes on page 0 5 To find a guide for selecting probes for a variety of applications see Appen dix D Probe Selection on page D 1 Setting up Automatically Autoset and Reset 3 8 The TDS Oscilloscope can automatically obtain and display a stable waveform of usable size It can also be reset to its factory default settings This subsection describes how to execute Autoset and reset and lists the default settings in effect after an Autoset Autoset automatically sets up the front panel controls based on the characteristics of the input signal It is much faster and easier than a manual control by co
313. rs m The trigger point indicator shows where the oscilloscope triggers For a slew rate triggered waveform the trigger point is always at the threshold crossed last the upper threshold for positive polarity settings the lower for negative settings Set the Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode and holdoff refer to Set Mode amp Holdoff on page 3 75 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 65 Trigger Based on When you select the pulse class Timeout the TDS oscilloscope will trigger on a Pulse Timeout pulse change that does NOT occur within the specified limits That is the trigger will occur when depending on the polarity you select the signal stays higher or stays lower than the trigger level for the timeout value To set up for timeout triggering do the following procedures Select Timeout Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Timeout pop up Select the Source Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side The source selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes Select the Polarity Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Timeout pop up gt Polarity main gt Stays High Stays Low or Either side J Stays High causes a trigger
314. rvice cabinet feet Cleaning Procedure Exterior To clean the oscilloscope exterior do the following steps 1 Remove loose dust on the outside of the oscilloscope with a lint free cloth 2 Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened in a general purpose detergent and water solution Do not use abrasive cleaners 3 Clean the light filter protecting the monitor screen with a lint free cloth dampened with either isopropyl alcohol or preferably a gentle general purpose detergent and water solution CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the oscilloscope during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Lubrication There is no periodic lubrication required for this oscilloscope TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual SSE Appendix F Programmer Disk The TDS Family Programmer disk is a Microsoft Windows help file that covers operating your oscilloscope using the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB optional on some oscilloscopes The disk also includes some example programs The program runs on a PC compatible system with Microsoft Windows or Windows 95 See Figure F 1 PC Compatible with Microsoft Windows TDS Family Programmer Figure F 1 Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs Loading the Programs For instructions on installing the programmer manual and the other
315. s Sample Envelope Average and Peak Detect TDS 500 C and TDS 700C Oscilloscopes also support Hi Res Keep in mind which modes apply to your model oscilloscope as you read the following descriptions Sample the mode most commonly used Peak Detect and Hi Res modes operate in real time on a single trigger event provided that the oscilloscope can acquire enough samples for each trigger event Envelope and Average modes operate on multiple acquisitions the oscilloscope averages or envelopes several waveforms on a point by point basis For TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only Hi Res Envelope and Average modes are not available when in InstaVu mode see Incompatible Modes on page 3 58 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 29 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Figure 3 15 illustrates the different modes and lists the benefits of each It will help you select the appropriate mode for your application Refer to it as your read the following descriptions of each mode rials Sample Mode In Sample mode the oscilloscope creates a record point by saving the first sample of perhaps many during each acquisition interval An acquisition interval is the time covered by the waveform record divided by the record length Sample mode is the default mode seg Envelope Mode In Envelope mode the oscilloscope acquires and displays a waveform record that shows the extremes in variation over several acquisitions you specify the number
316. s Use of instruments that support these commands can greatly simplify development of GPIB systems Know the GPIB Interface Requirements To prepare to connect the oscilloscope to GPIB networks read and follow these rules m Connect no more than 15 devices including the controller to a single bus m Connect one device load every two meters about six feet of cable length to maintain bus electrical characteristics Generally each instrument represents one device load on the bus m Do not exceed 20 meters about 65 feet of the total cumulative cable length 3 174 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups m Turn on at least two thirds of the device loads present when you use your network m Include only one cable path between devices on your network See Figure 3 81 Do not create loop configurations GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device Figure 3 81 Typical GPIB Network Configuration GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device GPIB Device Obtain the Proper Interconnect Cabling To connect the oscilloscope to a GPIB network obtain at least one GPIB cable Connecting two GPIB devices requires an IEEE Std 488 1 1987 GPIB cable available from Tektronix part number 012 0991 00 The standard GPIB cable connects to a 24 pin GPIB connector located on the rear panel of the oscilloscope The connector has a D type shell and conforms to IEEE Std 488 1 1987
317. s Chi F LOO IDID ID I 119 1 1 a Figure 3 70 Re use Probe Calibration Data Menu NOTE If the Re use Probe Calibration data menu is displayed do not select OK Use Existing Data if the probe currently installed is not of the same impedance stored for the Probe Cal For example if the last Probe Cal stored for a channel was done with a passive 50 Q probe installed do not install a passive 1 MQ probe and select OK Use Existing Data if the menu appears If you do so most of any signal you attempt to measure will not be coupled to the input channel because of the probe to oscilloscope impedance mismatch Table 3 13 shows the action the oscilloscope takes based on the probe connected and user operation performed TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 149 Measuring Waveforms Table 3 13 Probe cal status Type probe connected Probe Cald User action Simple interface TEKPROBE interface No Doesn t Matter Initialized Initialized Yes Power off Initialized Initialized probe data is retained probe data is retained Yes Poweron Can not detect differ Display Re use Probe Cal d Probe Pass ent probe Calibration Data menu Different probe Initialized Different probe Initialized Yes Disconnect Probe Initialized Initialized Yes Connect Probe Cannot detect differ Display Re use Probe Cal d Probe Pass ent probe
318. s in setup locations labeled factory without disturbing previously stored setups 2 To store to a setup internally choose one of the ten internal storage locations from the side menu To Setup 1 To Setup 2 see Figure 3 71 Now the current setup is stored in that location Tek Run 100kKS 5 Sample A Save Current Setup i To File To Setup factory To Setup 2 factory To Setup3 factory 20 0m v M 3004s chi F 27 2mv more 1of3 fecal E ea i an ae File Saved Current Factory Utilities Setup Setu Setup DIGIC IG Cla e OID IDID ID Figure 3 71 Save Recall Setup Menu 3 To store a setup to disk press To File side Then use the general purpose knob to select the exact file from the resulting scrollbar list Finally press Save To Selected File side to complete the operation 3 152 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups NOTE Upon power on the oscilloscope creates the wild card file marked in the on the left of this page for storing setups Selecting this file in step 3 stores a setup in a uniquely named sequentially numbered file For instance the oscilloscope saves the first setup you save in the file TEKOO001 SET the second in TEK00002 SET and so on To Recall a Setup To recall a setup do the following steps 1 To recall
319. sary 4 How to set up 3 73 Readout 3 72 Edge Main Trigger menu 3 72 3 73 Edges Measure Delay menu 3 123 Either Main Trigger menu 3 92 3 94 3 97 empty Saved waveform status 3 155 Encapsulated Postscript 3 165 Enter Char Labelling menu 3 162 3 163 Envelope Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 Envelope acquisition mode 3 30 3 61 Glossary 4 Envelope Acquire menu 3 33 EPS Color Img Hardcopy menu 3 167 EPS Color Plt Hardcopy menu 3 167 EPS Mono Img Hardcopy menu 3 167 EPS Mono Plt Hardcopy menu 3 167 Epson 3 165 Epson Hardcopy menu 3 167 Equivalent time sampling 3 27 3 61 Equivalent time sampling random Glossary 4 Extended acquisition length 3 22 External Attenuation Vertical menu 3 18 Extinction 3 116 Extinction dB 3 116 Extinction Ratio 3 116 B 8 Extinction ratio Glossary 4 F Factory Setup How to execute 3 11 factory Saved setup status 3 152 Fall time 3 115 Glossary 4 Falling edge Delayed Trigger menu 3 111 Falling edge Main Trigger menu 3 76 3 85 3 86 Fast Fourier Transforms description 3 191 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Fast Fourier Transforms FFTs applications 3 191 FastFrame Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 FastFrame interactions 3 61 3 128 FastFrame Setup Horizontal menu 3 60 FastFrame Horizontal menu 3 60 FFT frequency domain record 3 198 defined 3 199 length of 3 200 FFT math waveform 3 192 acqu
320. se errors to show the true value for the DC component of the input signal The Position and Offset must be set to zero for the source waveform in the Vertical menu When measuring the amplitude at DC remember that 1 VDC equals 1 Vrms and the display is in dB Most often you will want to use a short record length because more of the FFT waveform can be seen on screen and long record lengths can slow oscilloscope response However long record lengths lower the noise relative to the signal and increase the frequency resolution for the FFT More important they might be needed to capture the waveform feature you want to include in the FFT TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 201 Using Features for Advanced Applications Acquisition Mode Zoom and Interpolation 3 202 To speed up oscilloscope response when using long record lengths you can save your source waveform in a reference memory and perform an FFT on the saved waveform That way the DSP will compute the FFT based on saved static data and will only update if you save a new waveform Selecting the right acquisition mode can produce less noisy FFTs Set up in Sample Use sample mode until you have set up and turned on your FFT Sample mode can acquire repetitive and nonrepetitive waveforms and does not affect the frequency response of the source waveform Hi Res and Average Reduce Noise If the pulse is repetitive Average mode may be used to reduce noise in the s
321. se knob or the keypad If you want to enter a large number using the general purpose knob press the SHIFT button before turning the knob When the light above the SHIFT button is on and the display says Coarse Knobs in the upper right corner the general purpose knob speeds up significantly You can set holdoff from 250 ns minimum holdoff available to 12 seconds maximum available See Holdoff Variable Main Trigger in the TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Oscilloscopes Performance Verification and Specifica tions manual for typical minimum and maximum values 3 To change to the factory default holdoff setting for the current horizontal scale setting press Default Holdoff side NOTE If you select Default Holdoff the default holdoff time will vary with the horizontal scale setting to maintain a good value for general purpose triggering at that scale However if you select Holdoff as opposed to Default Holdoff the time set in the Holdoff menu item is used at all horizontal scale settings To Set Slope To select the slope that the edge trigger will occur on 1 Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Slope main TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 75 Triggering on Waveforms Se AL To Set Level 2 Select the rising or falling edge from the side menu Press the TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge pop up gt Level main gt Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set
322. se linear interpolation if necessary TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms Fall Time as THF TLF High HighR ef LowRef Low Figure B 2 Fall Time 3 From THF continue the search looking for a crossing of LowRef Update THF if subsequent HighRef crossings are found When a LowRef crossing is found it becomes TLF Use linear interpolation if necessary 4 FallTime TLF THF Frequency Timing measurement The reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second If Period 0 or is otherwise bad return an error Frequency 1 Period High 100 highest voltage reference value See High Low on page B 1 tale Using the min max measurement technique High Max TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 9 Appendix B Algorithms Low Maximum Mean Mean dBm Minimum B 10 0 lowest voltage reference value calculated See High Low on page B 1 Using the min max measurement technique Low Min Amplitude voltage measurement The maximum voltage Typically the most positive peak voltage Examine all Waveform samples from Start to End inclusive and set Max equal to the greatest magnitude Waveform value found The arithmetic mean for one waveform Remember that one waveform is not necessarily equal to one cycle For cyclical data you may prefer to use the cycle mean rather than the a
323. sed on the FDDI SONET and Fiber Channel standards optical disk devices digital video and high speed fiber optic communications systems NOTE When you connect any probe with a TEKPROBE level 2 interface to the oscilloscope the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 Q If you then connect a high input impedance passive probe you need to set the input impedance back to 1 MQ The procedure To Change Vertical Parame ters on page 3 17 explains how to change the input impedance TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual a E Appendix E Inspection and Cleaning General Care Inspection and Cleaning Procedures A Inspect for dirt and damage on and clean the exterior of the TDS Oscilloscope When done regularly this preventive maintenance may prevent oscilloscope malfunction and enhance its reliability How often to do this preventive maintenance depends on the severity of the environment in which the oscilloscope is used A proper time to perform preventive maintenance is just before oscilloscope adjustment The cabinet helps keep dust out of the oscilloscope and must be in place when operating the oscilloscope The oscilloscope front cover protects the front panel and display from dust and damage Install it when storing or transporting the oscilloscope Inspect and clean the oscilloscope exterior as often as operating conditions require Send the oscilloscope in for service if it requires
324. set scale and position affect the math waveform you obtain Note the following tips for obtaining a good display m You should scale and position the source waveform so it is contained on screen Off screen waveforms may be clipped resulting in errors in the derivative waveform m You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your derivative waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so it is clipped m When using the vertical scale knob to scale the source waveform note that it also scales your derivative waveform TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 213 Using Features for Advanced Applications Because of the method the oscilloscope uses to scale the source waveform before differentiating that waveform the derivative math waveform may be too large vertically to fit on screen even if the source waveform is only a few divisions on screen You can use Zoom to reduce the size of the waveform on screen see Using Zoom that follows but if your waveform is clipped before zooming it will still be clipped after it is zoomed If your math waveform is a narrow differentiated pulse it may not appear to be clipped when viewed on screen You can detect if your derivative math wave form is clipped by expanding it horizontally using Zoom so you can see the clipped portion Also the automated measurement Pk Pk wi
325. set to Factory Color Set Reference Waveform To define reference waveform colors Color 1 Press Map Reference in the main menu See Figure 3 23 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 47 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 2 Select one of the four reference waveforms by pressing Ref in the side menu 3 To assign the selected reference waveform to a specific color press repeatedly Color and choose the value 4 To make the selected reference waveform the same color as the waveform it is based on select Color Matches Contents To return to the factory defaults select Reset to Factory Color 5 Tek Run 250kS 5 Sample Ref Mappings Ref Refi chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Math Palette Change Normal Colors ap Math Colors Settings lt Color gt Tap aides Options Colors Color Matches Contents Color Ref Reset to Factory Color Restore Colors eas oe e es C C Figure 3 23 Display Menu Map Reference Colors Select Options To define what color to show where a waveform crosses another waveform 1 Press the Options main menu item 2 Toggle Collision Contrast to ON in the side menu to mark collision zones with a special color Restore Colors To restore colors to their factory default settings 1 Press the main menu Restore Colors item See
326. software on the TDS Family Programmer Manual disk read the readme file on the disk Running the Help Program To run the programmer manual help file using Windows 3 1 perform the following 1 Double click on the TDS Family Programmer program group 2 Double click on the TDS Family Programmer icon If you have not created a program group or a Windows 95 shortcut use the File Manager Windows 3 1 or Explorer Windows 95 to select and run the tds pgm hlp program TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual F 1 Appendix F Programmer Disk F 2 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Glossary ACM 2 2 channel operation Two plus two channel operation limits the simultaneous display of channels to two of the four channels provided Channels not displayed can be used to couple a triggering signal to the oscilloscope AC coupling A type of signal transmission that blocks the DC component of a signal but uses the dynamic AC component Useful for observing an AC signal that is normally riding on a DC signal Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition The process of sampling signals from input channels digitizing the samples into data points and assembling the data points into a waveform record The waveform record is stored in memory The trigger marks time zero in that process Acquisition interval The time duration of the waveform record divided by the record length Th
327. splay screen is illustrated in this manual This manual documents the TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C Digitizing Oscilloscopes Take note of the following conventions used when referencing these oscilloscopes The name TDS 500C is used when providing information common to the TDS 520C and TDS 540C model oscilloscopes The name TDS 600B is used when providing information common to the TDS 620B TDS 644B TDS 680B and TDS 684B model oscilloscopes The name TDS 700C is used when providing information common to the TDS 724C TDS 754C and TDS 784C model oscilloscopes In this manual you will find various procedures which contain steps of instructions for you to perform To keep those instructions clear and consistent this manual uses the following conventions In procedures names of front panel controls and menu labels appear in boldface print TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Preface m Names also appear in the same case initial capitals or all uppercase in the manual as is used on the oscilloscope front panel and menus Front panel names are all upper case letters for example VERTICAL MENU and CH 1 Instruction steps are numbered The number is omitted if there is only one step When steps require that you make a sequence of selections using front panel controls and menu buttons an arrow marks each transition between a front panel button and a menu or between menus Also whethe
328. ssary 6 Intensity Display menu 3 40 Interleaf 3 165 Interleaf Hardcopy menu 3 167 Interleaving 3 29 Glossary 7 Interpolation 3 28 3 29 3 42 Glossary 6 And zoom 3 50 FFT distortion 3 203 Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 linear versus sin x x 3 203 IRE NTSC Cursor menu 3 131 K Keypad 2 7 2 26 Knob Glossary 7 General purpose 2 7 2 25 Glossary 5 Horizontal POSITION 2 14 3 19 Horizontal SCALE 2 14 3 19 Trigger MAIN LEVEL 2 15 3 68 Vertical POSITION 2 14 3 15 Vertical SCALE 2 14 3 15 L Labelling menu Enter Char 3 162 3 163 Landscape Hardcopy menu 3 167 Language options Option L A 3 Laserjet 3 165 Laserjet Hardcopy menu 3 167 Layout Hardcopy menu 3 167 Level Delayed Trigger menu 3 112 Level Main Trigger menu 3 76 3 93 3 97 3 102 Index 7 Index Level Telecom Trigger menu 3 106 Level Trigger 3 68 LF Rej Main Trigger menu 3 74 Lightness Color menu 3 46 Limit Test Condition Met Acquire menu 3 187 Limit Test Setup Acquire menu 3 186 3 187 Limit Test Sources Acquire menu 3 186 Limit Test Acquire menu 3 187 Limit Testing Incompatible with InstaVu 3 58 Limit testing 3 183 Linear interpolation 3 28 3 42 Glossary 6 Linear interpolation Display menu 3 42 Logic trigger 3 65 3 78 Definitions 3 78 Pattern 3 77 Glossary 7 Readout 3 79 State 3 78 Glossary 7 Logic triggering 3 76 Logic Main Tri
329. sses selected For these settings the oscilloscope will force the delayed time base to be in Runs After mode You use the Horizontal menu to select and define either delayed runs after main or delayed triggerable Delayed triggerable however requires further selections in the Delayed Trigger menu Do the following steps to set the delayed time base to run immediately after delay 1 Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Time Base main gt Delayed Only side gt Delayed Runs After Main side 2 Use the general purpose knob or the keypad to set the delay time If you press Intensified side you display an intensified zone on the main timebase record that shows where the delayed timebase record occurs relative to the main trigger For Delayed Runs After Main mode the start of the intensified zone corresponds to the start of the delayed timebase record The end of the zone corresponds to the end of the delayed record NOTE The intensified zone is not visible when in InstaVu mode TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only see Incompatible Modes on page 3 58 To make sure that the Main Trigger menu settings are compatible with Delayed Triggerable and to select that mode do the following steps 1 Press TRIGGER MENU 2 If Type is set to Logic press Type main to change it to either Edge or Pulse as fits your application Logic type is incompatible with Delayed Triggerable 3 If Source is set to Auxiliary press Source main Select
330. struments shipped with Option 1M the TDS 500C and TDS 700C Oscilloscopes provide additional extended record lengths up to 500 000 points depending on the model For specific record lengths available see the 1M option in the Table A 1 on page A 2 Option 1M is available only at the time of original purchase and is not available for the TDS 600B models NOTE TDS 500C and TDS 700C Models Hi Res acquisition mode requires twice the acquisition memory of other acquisition modes Therefore the maximum record length available is 15 000 points without option 1M and 50 000 points with option 1M Turning Hi Res on switches the setting for record length accordingly thereby keeping the oscilloscope from running out of memory m For instruments with Option 2M the oscilloscopes provide extended acquisition lengths up to 8 M points depending on the model For specific Acquisition lengths available see the 2M option in Table A 1 on page 0 1 Option 2M is available only at the time of original purchase and is not available for the TDS 600B models TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 21 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 2 To fit an acquired waveform or with Extended Acquisition On an acquisi tion to the visible screen regardless of record length press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Record Length main Then toggle Fit to Screen to ON from the side menu This feature fits the waveform automatically much like you could do manually
331. surement to an edge on another waveform To take a delay measurement do the following steps 1 TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Select Measrmnt main gt Delay side gt Delay To main gt Measure Delay to 2 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Press MEASURE gt Measure pop up gt Select Measrmnt main gt Delay side gt Delay To main gt Measure Delay to 3 Press Measure Delay to side repeatedly to choose the delay to waveform The choices are Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Math1 Math2 Math3 Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 and Ref4 Tek Run 100kS 5 Sample Measure Delay to Chl Delay from Selected Wim Measure man to a k utani AE a a A EAA E verify or change the waveform to which Delay will be measured the Search Direction and the Edges at which to measure when you are satisfied with the selections press Create Measurement Press CLEAR MENU to return to the Measure menu without creating the Delay measurement agmv OK i Create Measurement Delay To Edges chi gt F gt F G Oooo o Figure 3 59 Measure Delay Menu Delay To The steps just performed select the waveform you want to measure to note that the waveform you are measuring delay from is the selected waveform See Figure 3 59 3 122 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms 4 TDS 600B Press MEASURE gt Sele
332. t the general acquisition vertical bar cursors in the Trigger The value entered with purpose knob makes coarse status waveform record position T the general purpose adjustments when absent page 3 33 page 3 130 page 3 71 knob or keypad fine adjustments Tek Run 5 00GS s gt _ _Trigger Level 252mV EA x The acquisition record icon Shows what part of the waveform record is displayed page 3 18 Tek Run 5 00GS s Sample Coarse K Tana The waveform Shows what part of record icon the acquisition record is in the waveform record Trigger level on waveform may be an arrow at right side of screen instead of a bar 7 page 3 24 _Trigaer Level Bae Vike en Level Cursor measurements page 3 126 Channel level and waveform source Vertical scale page 3 15 Type lt Edge gt The main menu with choices of major actions 2 6 The side menu with choices of Set to ECL specific actions Trigger parameters page 3 71 Level A E Sml 252mMV Holdoff Horizontal scale and time base type page 3 19 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Operating Interface Maps To Operate a Menu 1 Press front panel menu button Press SHIFT first if button label is blue Tektronix TDS 684B 22 2h32 8uoscox sa APPLICATION MENU ACQUIRE METS MEASURE HARDCOPY RUN STOP CO CO CGC CURSOR
333. t chosen m The complexity of the display 3 170 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Saving Waveforms and Setups Although not guaranteed usually about 2 5 hardcopies can be spooled before the oscilloscope must wait to send the rest of the third copy To Save to a Disk To send hardcopies to a disk do the following steps 1 Set up the oscilloscope communication and hardware parameters as outlined in To Set Up for Making Hardcopies on page 3 166 2 If saving to a floppy disk insert a formatted 720 Kbyte or 1 44 Mbyte floppy disk into the slot at the left of the oscilloscope display NOTE To format disks delete hardcopy files you save to disk and otherwise manage the disk storage see Managing the File System on page 3 160 3 Press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU gt Port main gt File side to specify that any hardcopy be output to a disk file The file list and its scrollbar will appear 4 Turn the general purpose knob to place the scroll bar over the file in which to store the hardcopy NOTE Upon power on the oscilloscope creates the wild card file hardcopy format you select Selecting this file and pressing Hardcopy stores a hardcopy in a uniquely named sequentially numbered file For instance the oscilloscope saves the first hardcopy you save to the file TEKO0001 FMT the second to TEK00002 FMT and so on 5 Press HARDCOPY to print your hardcopy to the selected file Saving files t
334. t indicates the instantaneous rate of change of the waveform acquired This section describes how to setup the oscilloscope to display and measure derivative math waveforms Derivative waveforms are used in the measurement of slew rate of amplifiers and in educational applications You can store and display a derivative math waveform in a reference memory then use it as a source for another derivative waveform The result is the second derivative of the waveform that was first differentiated 3 210 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications The math waveform derived from the sampled waveform is computed based on the following equation Yn Karn XE Where X is the source waveform Y is the derivative math waveform T is the time between samples Since the resultant math waveform is a derivative waveform its vertical scale is in volts second its horizontal scale is in seconds The source signal is differen tiated over its entire record length therefore the math waveform record length equals that of the source waveform To Create a Derivative ofa To obtain a derivative math waveform Waveform Connect the waveform to the desired channel input and select that channel 2 Adjust the vertical and horizontal scales and trigger the display or press AUTOSET 3 Press MORE gt Math1 Math2 or Math3 main gt Change Math Definition side gt Single Wfm Math main See Figure
335. t message 3 146 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Measuring Waveforms 15 Note the compensation error amount Skip to step 20 16 Disconnect the probe from any signal you may have connected it to Leave the probe installed on its channel 17 Press OK Compensate Offset side D 18 Wait for offset compensation to complete one to three minutes When offset compensation completes the following occurs m The clock icon will disappear m If offset compensation did not complete successfully you may get the message Compensation Error This error implies that the probe offset scale 10 error and or offset 50 mV is too great to be compensated You can substitute another probe and continue Have your probe checked by service personnel You can also check the error log by doing steps 14 through 15 19 After the clock icon is removed verify the word Initialized changed to Pass under Cal Probe in the main menu See Figure 3 69 20 If desired repeat this procedure beginning at step 1 to compensate for other probe channel combinations But before you do so be sure you take note of the following requirements m Remember to first low frequency compensate any passive probe you connect see the prerequisites listed on page 3 144 at the beginning of this procedure m Remember to connect all but simple passive probes to the oscilloscope for a twenty minute warm up before running Probe Cal Changing Probes
336. ta array n is the index to the time domain data array k is the index to the frequency domain data array N is the FFT length jis the square root of 1 The resulting waveform is a display of the magnitude or phase angle of the various frequencies the waveform contains with respect to those frequencies For example Figure 3 92 shows the untransformed impulse response of a system in channel 2 at the top of the screen The FFT transformed magnitude and phase appear in the two math waveforms below the impulse The horizontal scale for FFT math waveforms is always expressed in frequency per division with the beginning left most point of the waveform representing zero frequency DC The FFT waveform is based on digital signal processing DSP of data which allows more versatility in measuring the frequency content of waveforms For example DSP allows the oscilloscope to compute FFTs of source waveforms that must be acquired based on a single trigger making it useful for measuring the frequency content of single events DSP also allows the phase as well as the magnitude to be displayed 3 192 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications Tek Stopped 820 Acquisitions i i s Mdth3 Zoom 0 5X vent 2 0x Horz Normal Waveform of an Impulse Response sleleel FFT Waveform of the Magnitude Response FFT Waveform of the Phase Response Ch 250m V Math3 90
337. tch triggering do the following procedures Select Glitch Triggering Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Glitch pop up TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 91 Triggering on Waveforms Tek Run ear Sample ec E fe Nea aa te ch A Pulse Glitch Source Runt Slew Rate 2q_Width M 500qs Glitch Chi Timeout i Eeg oei cich Level oge Type Class 5 amp amp lt Pubse gt lt Glitch gt e width cept 252mV Holdoff W Figure 3 46 Main Trigger Menu Glitch Class Select the Source To specify which channel becomes the pulse trigger source Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Source main gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 or Ch4 side The source selected becomes the trigger source for all four trigger classes Select the Polarity amp Width To specify polarity positive negative or either and width of the glitch do the following steps 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Polarity amp Width main gt Positive Negative or Either side 4 Positive looks at positive going pulses rt Negative looks at negative going pulses qt Either looks at both positive and negative pulses 2 Press Width side and set the glitch width using the general purpose knob or keypad
338. tching to other graticule types Therefore you might want to recall the factory setup or other stored setup after selecting a different graticule The oscilloscope displays waveforms in either of two formats YT and XY To set the display axis format TDS 600B Press DISPLAY gt Format main gt XY or YT side TDS 500C and TDS 700C models Press DISPLAY Mode main gt Normal pop up gt Format RO main gt XY or YT side YT is the conventional oscilloscope display format It shows a signal voltage the vertical axis as it varies over time the horizontal axis XY format compares the voltage levels of two waveform records point by point That is the oscilloscope displays a graph of the voltage of one waveform record against the voltage of another waveform record This mode is particularly useful for studying phase relationships When you choose the XY format any channel or reference displayed is assigned to the axis indicated in Table 3 5 and displayed as part of an XY pair If only one source in an XY pair is displayed the oscilloscope automatically turns on the other source to complete the XY pair when you select XY Moreover once XY is on selecting either source in a pair turns the pair on pressing WAVEFORM OFF for either source in the pair removes both sources from the display Table 3 5 XY Format pairs XY Pair X Axis source Y Axis source ChlandCh2 Chl Ch2 Ch3 and Ch 4 Axl and Ax2 Ch 3 Ax1 C
339. ter main looks for a main trigger then waits a user defined time and then starts acquiring See Figure 3 50 Acquire Data Delayed triggerable looks for a main trigger and then depending on the type of delayed trigger selected makes one of the three types of delayed triggerable mode acquisitions After Time After Events or After Events Time Study Figure 3 51 to understand the sequence the oscilloscope goes through for each delayed mode Acquire A Data Wait for Wait User specified Main Time Trigger Figure 3 50 Delayed Runs After Main Wait for Main Trigger Wait User specified Time Wait the User specified Number of Delayed Trigger Events Wait the User specified Number of Delayed Trigger Events Wait User specified Time Figure 3 51 Delayed Triggerable The oscilloscope is always acquiring samples to fill the pretrigger part of the waveform record When and if delay criteria are met it takes enough posttrigger samples to complete the delayed waveform record and then displays it Refer to Figure 3 52 for a more detailed look at how delayed records are placed in time relative to the main trigger 3 107 Triggering on Waveforms To Run After Delay To Trigger After Delay 3 108 NOTE Due to hardware limitations the delayed time base cannot be made triggerable when the main trigger type is Logic any class or when the main trigger type is Pulse with Runt or Slew Rate cla
340. the interpolated value at Start Otherwise Area rd Waveform t dt Start For details of the integration algorithm see page B 15 Amplitude voltage measurement The area over one waveform cycle For data not cyclical you might prefer to use the Area measurement If StartCycle EndCycle then return the interpolated value at StartCycle EndCycle Geene Waveform t dt StartCycle For details of the integration algorithm see page B 15 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms Burst Width UU Cycle Mean Cycle RMS Timing measurement The duration of a burst 1 Find MCross1 on the waveform This is MCross Start 2 Find the last MCross begin the search at EndCycle and search toward StartCycle This is MCrossStop This could be a different value from MCross1 3 Compute BurstWidth MCrossStop MCrossStart Amplitude voltage measurement The mean over one waveform cycle For non cyclical data you might prefer to use the Mean measurement If StartCycle EndCycle then return the interpolated value at StartCycle EndCycle Waveform t dt Si tartCycle CycleMean EndCycle StartCycle x SampleInterval For details of the integration algorithm see page B 15 The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle If StartCycle EndCycle then CycleRMS Waveform Start Otherwise EndCycle Waveform t dt Si tartCycle
341. the documentation for your hardcopy device Print To print a single hardcopy or send additional hardcopies to the oscilloscope spool queue while waiting for earlier hardcopies to finish printing press HARDCOPY While the hardcopy is being sent to the printer the oscilloscope will display the message Hardcopy in process Press HARDCOPY to abort Abort To stop and discard the hardcopy being sent press HARDCOPY again while the hardcopy in process message is still on screen Add to the Spool To add additional hardcopies to the printer spool press HARDCOPY again after the hardcopy in process message is removed from the screen You can add hardcopies to the spool until it is full When adding a hardcopy fills the spool the message Hardcopy in Process Press HARDCOPY to abort remains displayed You can abort only the ast hardcopy sent by pressing the button while the message is still displayed When the printer empties enough of the spool to finish adding the last hardcopy it does so and then removes the message Clear the Spool To remove all hardcopies from the spool press SHIFT gt HARDCOPY MENU gt Clear Spool main gt OK Confirm Clear Spool side The oscilloscope takes advantage of any unused RAM when spooling hardcopies to printers The size of the spool is therefore variable The number of hardco pies that can be spooled depends on three variables m The amount of unused RAM m The hardcopy forma
342. the following procedures Coupling To choose the type of coupling for attaching the input signal to the vertical attenuator for the selected channel and to set its input impedance Press VERTICAL MENU gt Coupling main gt DC AC GND or Q side m DC coupling shows both the AC and DC components of an input signal m AC coupling shows only the alternating components of an input signal m Ground GND coupling disconnects the input signal from the acquisition m Input impedance lets you select either 1 M Q or 50 Q impedance NOTE If you select 50 Q impedance with AC coupling the digitizing oscillo scope will not accurately display frequencies under 200 kHz Also when you connect an active probe to the oscilloscope such as the P6245 the input impedance of the oscilloscope automatically becomes 50 Q If you then connect a passive probe like the P6139A you need to set the input impedance back to 1 MQ The maximum volts div setting is reduced from 10 V to 1 V when you select 50 Q impedance See the discussion Input Impedance Considerations on page 3 7 Bandwidth Bandwidth refers to the range of frequencies that an oscilloscope can acquire and display accurately that is with less than 3 dB attenuation If you limit the upper limit for the higher frequency components by selecting 250 MHz or 20 MHz a Bw symbol will appear in the lower part of the display To change the bandwidth of the selected channel Press VERTICAL
343. then i A A 2 B 1 Rees vm ar sx SSO WO x Mit D t WES DY A where s is the sample interval TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 15 Appendix B Algorithms Measurements on Envelope Waveforms Time measurements on envelope waveforms must be treated differently from time measurements on other waveforms because envelope waveforms contain so many apparent crossings Unless otherwise noted envelope waveforms use either the minima or the maxima but not both determined in the following manner 1 Step through the waveform from Start to End until the sample min and max pair DO NOT straddle MidRef MidR ef Both min and max samples are above MidRef so use minima Both min and max samples are below MidRef so use maxima MidR ef Figure B 4 Choosing Minima or Maxima to Use for Envelope Measurements B 16 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms 2 If the pair gt MidRef use the minima else use maxima If all pairs straddle MidRef use maxima See Figure B 4 The Burst Width measurement always uses both maxima and minima to determine crossings Missing or Out of Range Samples If some samples in the waveform are missing or off scale the measurements will linearly interpolate between known samples to make an appropriate guess as to the sample value Missing samples at the ends of the measurement record will be assumed to h
344. tion ETI occurs for your model Table 3 4 TDS 500C and TDS 700C Sampling mode selection when fit to screen is off Channels on 2 3or4 Time base gt 50 ns RT RT 50 ns RT RT 25 ns RT ETI 12 5 ns ETI ETI lt 25ns ETI ETI ETI Note that the TDS 520C and TDS 724C can have no more that two channels on at a time gt means slower than lt means faster than RT abbreviates Real Time Sampling throughout this table ETI abbreviates Equivalent Time Sampling or Interpolation throughout this table 5 Time base setting not available for this model Stop After To choose the event that stops the acquiring waveforms do the following step Press SHIFT ACQUIRE MENU gt Stop After main gt RUN STOP button only Single Acquisition Sequence or Limit Test Condition Met side See Figure 3 17 TDS 500C and TDS 700C models only single acquisition and limit testing are ignored in InstaVu mode see Incompatible Modes on page 3 58 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 35 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Tek Run MORIS Sample stop After RUNZSTOP button only Single Acquisition Sequence Limit Test Condition Met oomva SM 500s Chit 248mv LOO ID ID IO Mode Repetitive Stop Limit Test Limit Test create Signal Limit Test Sample N RZS button Setup Sources Template I 1 1 1
345. to 50 side Level lets you enter the trigger level using the general purpose knob or the keypad Set to TTL fixes the trigger level at 1 4 V Set to ECL fixes the trigger level at 1 3 V NOTE When you set the volts div smaller than 200 mV the oscilloscope reduces the Set to TTL or Set to ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and ECL levels This reduction occurs because the trigger level range is fixed at 12 divisions from the center At 100 mV the next smaller setting after 200 mV the trigger range is 1 2 V which is smaller than the typical TTL 1 4 V or ECL 1 3 V level Set to 50 fixes the trigger level to approximately 50 of the peak to peak value of the trigger source signal Triggering Based on Logic 3 76 The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on a logic or binary pattern and on the state of a logic pattern at the time it is clocked It can also trigger on data that violates setup and hold times relative to a clock This subsection describes how to use these three classes of logic triggering pattern state and setup hold A pattern trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function you select cause the function to become TRUE or at your option FALSE When you use a pattern trigger you define m The precondition for each logic input logic high low or do not care the logic inputs are channels 1 2 3 and 4 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms m
346. to occur if the signal stays higher than the trigger level for longer than the timeout value pe Stays Low causes a trigger to occur if the signal stays lower than the trigger level for longer than the timeout value TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 101 Triggering on Waveforms 3 102 Either causes a trigger to occur if the signal stays lower or stays higher than the trigger level for longer than the timeout value Time To set the timeout time 1 Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Timeout pop up gt Time main Turn the general purpose knob or use the keypad to set values for the timeout time Set the Level Press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Pulse pop up gt Class main gt Timeout pop up gt Level main gt Level Set to TTL Set to ECL or Set to 50 side If you select Level you set the trigger level by entering a value with the general purpose knob or the keypad If you select Set to TTL the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the TTL switching threshold If you select Set to ECL the oscilloscope sets the trigger level to the ECL switching threshold If you select Set to 50 the oscilloscope searches for the point halfway between the peaks of the trigger source signal and sets the trigger level to that point Set the Mode and Holdoff Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types and classes To set mode
347. to the Auxiliary Trigger input connector on the oscilloscope rear panel TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Triggering on Waveforms Trigger Types The digitizing oscilloscope provides three standard triggers for the main trigger system edge pulse and logic Option 05 provides a video trigger The standard triggers are described individually starting on page 3 72 A brief definition of each type follows EA Edge is the basic trigger You can use it with both analog and digital test Ae circuits An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source the signal the trigger circuit is monitoring passes through a specified voltage level in the specified direction the trigger slope J Pulse is a special purpose trigger primarily used on digital circuits The five MIE classes of pulse triggers are glitch runt width slew rate and timeout Pulse triggering is available on the main trigger only Logic is a special purpose trigger primarily used on digital logic circuits Two of the classes pattern and state trigger based on the Boolean operator you select for the trigger sources Triggering occurs when the Boolean conditions are satisfied A third class setup hold triggers when data in one trigger source changes state within the setup and hold times that you specify relative to a clock in another trigger source Logic triggers are available on the main trigger system only Comm available as option 2C is a s
348. tter understand how to use your oscillo scope and how to interpret your results Measurement Variables The oscilloscope uses a variety of variables in its calculations These include High Low High is the value used as the 100 level in measurements such as fall time and rise time For example if you request the 10 to 90 rise time then the oscilloscope will calculate 10 and 90 as percentages with High representing 100 Low is the value used as the 0 level in measurements such as fall time and rise time The exact meaning of High and Low depends on which of two calculation methods you choose from the High Low Setup item of the Measure menu These are Min max and Histogram Min Max Method defines the 0 and the 100 waveform levels as the lowest amplitude most negative and the highest amplitude most positive samples The min max method is useful for measuring frequency width and period for many types of signals Min max is sensitive to waveform ringing and spikes however and does not always measure accurately rise time fall time overshoot and undershoot The min max method calculates the High and Low values as follows High Max and Low Min TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual B 1 Appendix B Algorithms HighRef MidRef LowRef Mid2Ref Histogram Method attempts to find the highest density of points above and below the waveform midpoint It attempts to ignore ringing and spikes when
349. twd 2 4 050ms Rise Sus Fall 8ys Duty 147 6 Duty 52 4 Over 31 6 Over 21 6 High 528mY Low 24mvV Max 5336mV Min 16mY Ampl 504mV Pk Pk 520m Mean 262 4mY CycMean 261 2m RMS 363 6mv CycRMS 362 8mV nv g Area 2 1 30880m s CycArea 263 84yVs elec 7 Tat Messure measrmnt Remove Gating statisties Level setur MICO IG ClO S Figure 2 17 Snapshot of Channel 1 Example 4 Saving Setups 2 28 The TDS Oscilloscope can save its controls settings and recall them later to quickly re establish a setup It provides ten storage locations to store up to ten setups It also provides a file system so that you can also save setups to a floppy disk Do the following procedures to learn how to save and then recall a setup NOTE Besides being able to save several complete setups the oscilloscope remembers all the parameter settings when you power it off That feature lets you power on and continue where you left off without having to reconstruct the setup in effect when you powered off the oscilloscope TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Tutorial Save a Setup First you need to create an instrument setup you want to save Perform the following steps to create and save a setup that is complex enough that you might prefer not to go through all these steps each time you want that display 1
350. u can also select AC coupling in the vertical menu of the source waveform or otherwise DC filter it before applying it to the oscilloscope input Once you have your waveform optimally displayed you may magnify or reduce it vertically and horizontally to inspect any feature you desire Just be sure the integrated waveform is the selected waveform Press MORE then select the integrated waveform in the More main menu Then use the Vertical and Horizontal SCALE knobs to adjust the math waveform size If you want to see the zoom factor 2X 5X etc you need to turn Zoom on press ZOOM gt On side The vertical and horizontal zoom factors appear on screen Whether Zoom is on or off you can press Reset main gt Reset Live Factors or Reset All Factors side to return the zoomed integral waveform to no magnification TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual a a Appendix A Options and Accessories Options This appendix describes the various options as well as the standard and optional accessories that are available for the TDS Oscilloscope Tektronix will ship the options shown in Table A 1 Table A 1 Options Option Label Description Al Universal European 220 V 50 Hz power cord power cord A2 UK power cord 240 V 50 Hz power cord A3 Australian power cord 240 V 50 Hz power cord A4 North American power 240 V 60 Hz power cord cord A5 Switzerland power cord 220 V 50 Hz power cord HD Hard disk Add a ha
351. u can move to and display any portion of the data see Figure 3 9 3 22 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms NOTE To function properly Extended acquisition mode forces some oscilloscope modes and settings to new values Also measurements gating math and cursors are restricted to the current waveform record Move to any portion of the acquisition record Extended length Acquisition Record Waveform Record Display Figure 3 9 Displaying an Extended Acquisition Length Record Extended acquisition mode is a single acquisition sequence mode allowing you time to examine the acquired data To set Extended Acquisition mode Press HORIZONTAL MENU gt Extd Acq Setup main gt Extended Acquisition side to toggle Extended Acquisition mode On see Figure 3 10 To acquire a new data record press Run Stop Read the side menus to determine the acquisition length waveform record length acquisition duration and the record starting location m Acq Len displays the length of the acquisition record The oscilloscope model and the number of channels in use determines the length TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 23 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms m Wfm Len displays the length of the waveform record The settings for Record Length in the Horizontal menu and for Extended Acquisition mode on or off determine the length m Acq Duration displays
352. u to adjust the style intensity level graticule and format features To find more information on display see Change the Display Settings on page 3 39 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Tek Run 250kKS 5 Sample Palettes Normal Bold Hardcopy Preview Monochrome Persistence Palettes Change ap Restore Settings lt Color Colors lor Colors Gpe Figure 3 21 Display Menu Setting Choose a Palette To choose a palette of 13 colors from a menu of preset palettes 1 Choose the starting palette by selecting Palette from the main menu 2 Select one of the available palettes in the side menu Choose from Normal Bold Hardcopy Preview or Monochrome 3 If you are using a persistence display and want to vary the color of each point depending on its persistence choose Persistence Palettes Then choose Temperature Spectral or Gray Scale from the resulting side menu Choose View Palette to preview your selection on the display Press Persistence Palette to quit preview mode Press Clear Menu to return to the Palette menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 45 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms Change the Palette Colors 3 46 NOTE Use at higher room temperatures or with higher intensity display formats such as the white fields in the Har
353. ual B 13 Appendix B Algorithms RMS 3 From TLR continue the search looking for a crossing of HighRef Update TLR if subsequent LowRef crossings are found If a HighRef crossing is found it becomes the high rise time or THR Use linear interpolation if necessary 4 RiseTime THR TLR Rise Time TLR THR High HighR ef LowR ef Low Figure B 3 Rise Time Amplitude voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage If Start End then RMS the interpolated value at Waveform Start Otherwise End Waveform t dt RMS Start End Start x SampleInterval For details of the integration algorithm see below TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Appendix B Algorithms Integration Algorithm The integration algorithm used by the oscilloscope is as follows W t dt A 2 is approximated by f where W ndt A W t is the sampled waveform W t is the continuous function obtained by linear interpolation of W t A and B are numbers between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 If A and B are integers then B BET Be aaa Wi WG 2D Wndt s X a A i A where s is the sample interval Similarly Wit dt A B is approximated by f 2 where WO dt A W t is the sampled waveform Wais the continuous function obtained by linear interpolation of W t A and B are numbers between 0 0 and RecordLength 1 0 If A and B are integers
354. uld allow Equivalent time sampling should only be used on repetitive signals Record Points ae ae TE Ist Acquisition Cycle JL JL LL 3rd Acquisition Cycle es ee j nth Acquisition Cycle oe Figure 3 14 Equivalent Time Sampling 2nd Acquisition Cycle The type of equivalent time sampling the oscilloscope uses is called random equivalent time sampling Although it takes the samples sequentially in time it takes them randomly with respect to the trigger Random sampling occurs because the oscilloscope sample clock runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The oscilloscope takes samples independently of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 27 Acquiring and Displaying Waveforms 3 28 Interpolation Your oscilloscope can interpolate between the samples it acquires Like for equivalent time sampling it does so only when it cannot obtain all the real samples it needs to fill up its waveform record For instance setting the horizontal SCALE to progressively faster acquisition rates leaves progressively shorter time periods for the waveform record Therefore the oscilloscope must sample faster to acquire the samples record points needed to fill up the record Eventually the time period established by scale setting does not allow enough time to get all the real samples neede
355. ults in terms of video line number To choose vertical bar cursor units do the following step Press CURSOR Time Units main gt seconds or 1 seconds Hz or with Option 5 Video Line Number side Select Amplitude Units If you are measuring NTSC signals you can choose to display vertical readings in IRE units If you are trying to measure such a signal you should have Option 05 Video Trigger installed as it would be difficult to trigger on composite video waveforms without Option 05 To switch between IRE and base cursor units do the following steps 1 Press CURSOR Amplitude Units main gt IRE NTSC 2 To return to normal press CURSOR Amplitude Units main gt Base To Find More Information To find instructions for using cursors with math waveforms see Waveform Math on page 3 188 To find instructions on using cursor with FFT waveforms differentiated waveforms and integrated waveforms see Fast Fourier Transforms on page 3 191 Waveform Differentiation on page 3 210 and Waveform Integration on page 3 215 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 131 Measuring Waveforms To find information on cursor units with video waveforms see the TDS Family Option 05 Video Trigger Interface if your oscilloscope is equipped with the video trigger option Taking Graticule Measurements The TDS Oscilloscope provides a graticule for measuring the difference either in time or amplitude between two poi
356. urements on Automated Measurements screen You can also pop up a display of almost all of the automated measure ments available in the Select Measrmnts side menus This snapshot of measure ments is taken on the waveform currently selected using the channel selection buttons As when displaying individual measurements you must have a stable display of your signal and that signal must have all the segments necessary for the measurement you want 1 Press Snapshot main to pop up a snapshot of all available single waveform measurements See Figure 2 17 The snapshot display includes the label Ch 1 meaning that the measure ments displayed are taken on the channel 1 waveform You take a snapshot of a waveform in another channel by first selecting that channel using the channel selection buttons The snapshot measurements do not continuously update Snapshot executes a one time capture of all measurements and does not update those measure ments unless it is performed again 2 Press Again side to do another snapshot and update the snapshot measure ments 3 Press Remove Measrmnt main to remove the snapshot display You can also press CLEAR MENU but a new snapshot will be executed the next time you display the Measure menu TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 2 27 Tutorial Tek Run Beir Sample Snapshot s is de ig X Snapshot on S Period 1 oie Freq 990 16 Hz Width 480ps width 530ps Brs
357. urements you make are made with the most accuracy possible You should also run an SPC if the temperature has changed more than 5 C since the last SPC was performed NOTE When making measurements at volts division settings less than or equal to 5 mV you should run SPC at least once per week Failure to do so may result in the oscilloscope not meeting warranted performance levels at those volts div settings Warranted characteristics are listed in the Performance Verification and Specifications manual To run an SPC do the following steps 1 Power on the digitizing oscilloscope and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 2 Disconnect any input signals you may have connected from all four input channels STOP When doing steps 3 and 4 do not turn off the oscilloscope until signal path compensation completes If you interrupt or lose power to the instrument while signal path compensation is running a message is logged in the oscillo scope error log If such a case occurs rerun signal path compensation 3 Press SHIFT UTILITY System main gt Cal pop up gt Signal Path main gt OK Compensate Signal Paths side 4 Wait for signal path compensation to complete up to 15 minutes While it progresses a clock icon shown at left is displayed on screen When compensation completes the status message will be updated to Pass or Fail in the main menu 5 Verify the word Pass appears un
358. urpose knob or the keypad to set the parameter you have chosen to the value desired The format when using the keypad is day month For example use 23 6 for the 234 of June 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set other parameters as desired 4 Press OK Enter Date Time side to put the new settings into effect This sets the seconds to zero NOTE When setting the clock you can set to a time slightly later than the current time and wait for it to catch up When current time catches up to the time you have set pressing Ok Enter Date Time side synchronizes the set time to the current time 5 Press CLEAR MENU to see the date time displayed with the new settings To Print Directly toa To make your hardcopies use the procedures that follow Hardcopy Device Connect to a Hardcopy Device To connect the oscilloscope directly to a hardcopy device determine which interface and cable the device uses and connect accordingly See Figure 3 79 Digitizing Oscilloscope matacony Device GPIB RS 232 or Centronics Cable Figure 3 79 Connecting the Oscilloscope Directly to the Hardcopy Device TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 169 Saving Waveforms and Setups Some devices such as the Tektronix HC100 Plotter use the GPIB interface Many printers such as the Tektronix HC200 use Centronics interfaces Many hardcopy devices including the HC100 and HC200 with option 03 provide RS 232 support Check
359. ut signal path compensation and the proper use of the probe you choose to use with your oscilloscope Signal Path Compensation Be sure you compensate your oscilloscope for the surrounding temperature This action called Signal Path Compensation SPC ensures maximum possible accuracy for your most critical measurements See Signal Path Compensation on page 3 142 for a description of and operating information on this feature Recommended Probes The TDS 680B TDS 684B and TDS 784C oscilloscopes ship without probes To take advantage of the higher bandwidth of the oscilloscopes order the P6245 Active Probe The remaining TDS 500C TDS 600B and TDS 700C oscilloscopes ship with general purpose probes either the P6139A or the P6243 depending on the oscilloscope model The standard accessory probes and quantities shipped for these oscilloscopes are listed on in Standard Accessories on page A 4 For a list of optional accessory probes for all TDS 500C TDS 600B and TDS 700C oscilloscope models see Accessory Probes on page A 5 Probe Usage Be sure you use the appropriate probe for the measurement For instance do not use the P6245 Active Probe to measure signals greater than 8 volts or with more than 10 volts of offset since errors in signal measurement will result See the User manual for the probe for more information Instead use a passive probe such as P6139A passive probe that allows higher voltage measurements The P6139A probe
360. veform OK Create Math wim LOIOIDIC O 11110 1 Figure 3 93 Define FFT Waveform Menu 7 Press Set FFT Vert Scale to side repeatedly to choose from the following vertical scale types dBV RMS Magnitude is displayed using log scale expressed in dB relative to 1 Vrms where 0 dB 1 Vrms Linear RMS Magnitude is displayed using voltage as the scale Phase deg Phase is displayed using degrees as the scale where degrees wrap from 180 to 180 Phase rad Phase is displayed using radians as the scale where radians wrap from T to 0 The topic Considerations for Phase Displays on page 3 204 provides in depth information on setup for phase displays 3 194 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Using Features for Advanced Applications 8 Press Set FFT Window to side repeatedly to choose from the following window types Rectangular Best type of window for resolving frequencies that are very close to the same value but worst for accurately measuring the amplitude of those frequencies Best type for measuring the frequency spectrum of nonrepetitive signals and measuring frequency components near DC Hamming Very good window for resolving frequencies that are very close to the same value with somewhat improved amplitude accuracy over the rectangular window Hanning Very good window for measuring ampl
361. w controls the ability of the FFT to resolve separate the frequencies and to accurately measure the amplitude of those frequencies FFT Window O FFT Time Domain R ecord After Windowing FFT Frequency Domain Record Figure 3 99 Windowing the FFT Time Domain Record Selecting a Window You can select your window to provide better frequency resolution at the expense of better amplitude measurement accuracy in your FFT better amplitude accuracy over frequency resolution or to provide a compromise between both You can choose from these four windows Rectangular Hamming Hanning and Blackman Harris TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 207 Using Features for Advanced Applications In step 8 page 3 195 in To Create an FFT the four windows are listed in order according to their ability to resolve frequencies versus their ability to accurately measure the amplitude of those frequencies The list indicates that the ability of a given window to resolve a frequency is inversely proportional to its ability to accurately measure the amplitude of that frequency In general then choose a window that can just resolve between the frequencies you want to measure That way you will have the best amplitude accuracy and leakage elimination while still separating the frequencies You can often determine the best window empirically by first using the window with the most frequency resolution rectangular then proceeding toward
362. y 8 OR Main Trigger menu 3 83 3 85 Oscilloscope Glossary 9 Overall Display menu 3 40 Overshoot Glossary 9 Overwrite Lock File Utilities menu 3 164 TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual Index P P6205 Active Probe 1 5 P6701A B with calibration A 2 P6703A B with calibration A 2 Packaging C 1 Paired cursor 3 127 PAL Display menu 3 42 Palette Color menu 3 45 Palette Hardcopy menu 3 167 Passive voltage probes D 1 Pattern trigger 3 76 How to setup 3 81 PCX 3 165 PCX Color Hardcopy menu 3 167 PCX Hardcopy menu 3 167 Peak detect acquisition mode 3 30 Glossary 9 Peak Detect Acquire menu 3 33 Peak Hits 3 135 Peak to peak 3 115 Glossary 9 Period 3 116 Glossary 9 Persistence 3 39 Persistence Palette Color menu 3 45 Phase 3 116 Glossary 9 Phase suppression 3 205 Pixel Glossary 9 Pk Pk 3 135 Polarity and Width Main Trigger menu 3 92 Polarity Main Trigger menu 3 94 3 97 Pop up menu 2 8 Glossary 9 Port Hardcopy menu 3 167 Port Utility menu 3 177 Portrait Hardcopy menu 3 167 Position Vertical 3 16 vertical 3 201 3 213 3 219 Position Vertical menu 3 18 Positive duty cycle 3 116 Positive overshoot 3 116 Positive width 3 116 Positive Main Trigger menu 3 92 3 94 3 97 Postscript 3 165 Posttrigger Glossary 10 Power connector 1 7 2 5 Power cords A 1 Power off 1 8 Power on 1 7 P
363. yed trigger systems press SHIFT STATUS gt STA TUS main gt Trigger side TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 71 Triggering on Waveforms Trigger Position Relative to the Display and Waveform Record Trigger Point Indicator Indicating the Trigger Position Tek Run 1 00G5 s Se Select Measurement Period on the Waveform Record Trigger Bar Indicating the Trigger Frequency Positive width Negative width Level on the Waveform R ecord Trigger Menu 200mva q M50 0ns Chis 208mv more 1ofs a a oa as Measure Measrmnt lt Measure gt wessrmnt rchi I 1 1 1 1 1 C9 LOJC C C C Remove Measrmnt Gating OFF Statistics Level Setu OFF Histogram Stapshot Figure 3 37 Record View Trigger Position and Trigger Level Bar Readouts Each trigger type edge logic and pulse has its own main trigger menu which is described as each type is discussed in this section To select the trigger type press TRIGGER MENU gt Type main gt Edge Logic or Pulse pop up Triggering on a Waveform Edge To Check Edge Trigger Status 3 72 The TDS Oscilloscope can trigger on an edge of a waveform An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source passes through a specified voltage level in a specifie
364. ypically time or frequency See Cursor Readouts on page 3 128 for more information NOTE When cursors measure certain math waveforms the measurement may not be of time frequency or voltage Cursor measurement of those math waveforms that are not of time frequency or voltage is described in Waveform Math which begins on page 3 188 Cursor Modes There are two cursor modes independent and tracking See Figure 3 62 In independent mode you move only one cursor at a time using the general purpose knob The active or selected cursor is a solid line Press SELECT to change which cursor is selected TDS 500C TDS 600B amp TDS 700C User Manual 3 127 Measuring Waveforms Independent Mode Tracking Mode Cursor Readouts 3 128 In tracking mode you normally move both cursors in tandem using the general purpose knob The two cursors remain a fixed distance time or voltage from each other Press SELECT to temporarily suspend cursor tracking You can then use the general purpose knob to adjust the distance of the solid cursor relative to the dashed cursor A second push toggles the cursors back to tracking lt o I Only Selected Cursor Moves day Both Cursors Move in Tandem Figure 3 62 Cursor Modes The cursor readout shows the absolute location of the selected cursor and the difference between the selected and non selected cursor The readouts differ depending on the cursor type you sel

Link to 500, 600, 700 Specifications/User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents